Faculty of Engineering HANDBOOK 1963

THE цNIVERSITY OF MELBOURNE

HANDBOOK 1963

PUBLISHED BY THE UNIVERSITY

CONTENTS

Page List of Administrative Officers . 5 Faculty List

Chapter i GENERAL INFORMATION Administration 8 Dates 8 First Degree Course 8 Postgraduate Courses 9 Admission to First Year Courses 9 Faculty Prerequisites 11 Photographic Record 11 Suspension and Limitation for Unsatisfactory Progress 11 Recognition of Work done at Technical Colleges 12 Block Exemption Courses 17 Practićal. Work 18 Practical Experience . 18 First Aid 18 Variations in Courses 19 Combined Courses 1д Passing by Years 1д Honour Work 20 Examinations 20 Final. Honours ZO Enrolment 21 Fees гг Lectures and Time-tables г3 Vacation Work 3', Matriculation 3 ". Examinations г4 Graduation 25 Student Counsellors 25 Appointments Board 25 Student Facilities 25 University Libraries 25 Colleges 26 Halls of Residence гб Diary: г7 Chapter 2 REGULATION FOR FIRST DEGREE Degree of Bachelor of Engineering and Bachelor of Surveying

Chapter 3 DETAILS OF COURSES First Year Courses 30 Courses in Agricultural Engineering ;1 Courses in Chemical Engineering 34 Courses in Civil Engineering 37 Courses in Electrical Engineering 42 Page Courses in Industrial Engineering 47 Courses in Mechanical Engineering 51 Courses in Metallurgical Engineering 57 Courses in Mining and Mineral Engineering 61 Courses in Surveying 65 Diploma in Engineering Management 68

Chapter 4 дЕТAІLS OF sUBJECTS AND BOOKS

Chapter 5 POSTGRADUATE STUDIES AND GRADUATE STUDIES Higher Degrees 136 Graduate School in Civil Engineering 136 Fees 138 Graduation 138 Grants from Research Funds 138 Chapter REGULATIONS FOR HIGHER DEGREES Degree of Master of Engineering Science 140 Degree of Master of Engineering and Master of Surveying 140 Degree of Doctor of Engineering 141 Degree of Doctor of Philosophy 141 Examination of Theses for Higher Degrees 144

Chapter 7 SUMMARY OF AWARDS AVAILABLE TO ENGINEERING STUDENTS 145 јјІпí лr ítp of jfleibourne ADMINISTRATIVE OFFICERS OF THE UNIVERSITY Chancellor, THE HON. SIR ARTHUR DEAN Vice-Chancellor, PROFESSOR SIR GEORGE PATON Registrar, F. H. JонNSтоN Accountant, R. A. CUMMING Assistant Registrar, A. J. G. WILLIAMS Academic Secretary, S. H. SHEFFIELD Officer-in-Charge, Scientific, Medical and Technical Branch and Secretary, Medical Branch, F. G. ELFORD Secretary, Schools Board, J. E. WARFE Secretary, Graduate Studies, L. R. D. PYKE Buildings Officer, F. E. BEDBROOK Assistant Accountant, M. N. FERGUSON Administrative Assistants Registrar's Assistants, R. B. OSBORN, I. R. BARRAI, G. ANDERSON Matriculation Officer, H. G. HELMS Publications Officer, P. G. KELLY Secretary, Scientific Branch (Science and Applied Science), A. SANDERSON Secretary, Technical Branch (Engineering, Architecture and Town and Regional Planning), P. F. DORIAN Assistant Secretary, Scientific and Medical Branches (Agricultural Science, Veterinary Science and Medicine), I. L. MILNE Students' Records Clerk of Students' Records, E. FINN Fee Clerk, R. H. SHUREY Records Administrative Assistant, R. SHEFFIELD Student Counsellors Student Counsellor, R. R. PRIESTLEY Assistant Student Counsellors, MARJORIE ROSS, G. A. CALLY Appointments Board Secretary, H. F. DOWNES Assistant Secretary, K. GRAVELL Administrative Assistant, S. J. OERTEL University Union Warden of the Union, J. B. WEBB Secretary of the Union, D. B. CARSWELL Sports Union Secretary, W. K. TICKNER Registrar's Office Counter Clerk, G. K. GUYMER Library Librarian, К. A. LODEWYCKS Reference Librarian, MARY LUGTON Deputy Librarian, G. J. L. MACFARLAN Engineering Librarian, J. S. GREIG

FACULTY OF ENGINEERING

Dean: PROFESSOR МOORНOUSE The Vice-Chancellor Council Member: SIR ROBERT BLACKWOOD Professors: Professor Belz Professor Henderson Professor Caro Professor Hills Professor Cherry Professor Lewis Professor Forster Professor Mohr Professor Francis Professor Moorhouse Professor Goldberg Professor °eser Professor Greenwood Professor Worrier Associate Professors: Assoc. Prof. Dunkin Assoc. Prof. Thomton-Smith Appointed Annually by the Surveyors' Board: Mr F. W. Arter Appointed by the Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy: Мr W. J. Curing Appointed by the Institute of Engineers, Australia: Mr M. G. Speedie Nominated Annually by Faculty: Mr J. C. Barton Mr N. H. Olver Mr T. Brownlee Dr C. J. Osborn Dr K. J. Cannon Dr J. Patterson Mr J. S. Carr Dr C. J. Pengilley Mr R. O. Cherry Dr O. E. Potter Mr S. J. Clifton Mr J. P. Ryan Dr D. H. Clyde Mr B. B. Snarp Mr A. E. Ferguson Dr L. K. Stevens Dr G. Gregory Mr J. K. Strahan Mr J. S. Hoggart Mr N. L. Svensson Mr P. N. Joubert Dr F. J. D. Syer Mr E. A. King-Smith Dr D. H. Trollope Dr F. Laszlo Mr A. K. Turner Dr J. D. Lawson Mr G. H. Vasey Dr I. K. Lee Dr J. F. Ward Mr J. C. McCutchan Mr G. M. Willis Mr J. V. Wood Mr W. R. В. Martin Mr B. T. Murphy Dr W. A. Wood Mr H. F. C. Nevin Nominated Triennially by Faculty (i2): Mr H. . Borwick Mr I. McLennan Mr W. H.В Connolly Sir Maurice Mawby Mr L. P. Coombes Mr G. В. O'Malley Mr L. R. East Capt. A. G. Pither Mr J. L. Kepert Mr H. Weber Mr K. P. Lewis

7 CНАТtќ 1 General Information ADMINISTRATION Correspondence should be addressed to the Registrar. Personal enquiries should be made to the Secretary, Technical branch of the Registrar's Office. DATES DATES FOR ENROLMENT (a) Friday, 30 November 1962 Last day of application for admission to the First Year of courses commencing in 1963 for all visiting students from overseas countries (including those who have presented for the Melbourne Matriculation Examination in 1962). (b) Friday, 18 January igб3 Last day for lodging of applications as a student for 1863. (c) Friday, 18 January 2963 Last day for amendment of applications (lodged before November 1962) for admission to First Year Engineering Courses. зо (d) Friday, 25 January igб3 Last day of enrolment for all students previously enrolled, except those applying to repeat First Year. (e) Friday, i November 1963 Last day of application for admission to First Year Engineering and Surveying courses commencing in 1964 for all visiting students from overseas countries (including those who have presented for the Melbourne Matriculation Examination, 1863). (f) Friday, 22 February 1963 Last day of enrolment for new studeńts. COMMENCEMENT OF COURSES (a) Tuesday, 26 February 1963, for all First Year courses for Bachelor of Engineering or Bachelor of Surveying. The first two weeks will be devoted to Drawing Office work with lectures in the subject Engineering Part I. (b) Monday, 4 March 1963, for all Engineering and Surveying courses other than First Year. TERM DATES (a) First term (io weeks)-4, March to 1 1 May 1963 (b) Second term (g weeks)-3 June to 3 August 1963 (ć) Third term (7 weeks)-a September to 19 October 1963 VACATIONS (a) Sunday, 12 May to Sunday, 1 June, inclusive (3 weeks). (b) Sunday, 4 August to Sunday, i September, inclusive (4 weeks). ANNUAL EXAMINATIONS (a) 2g July-Last day of entry examinations. (b) 28 October—Annual Examinations commence. MACHINE SHOP COURSE FOR FIRST YEAR (Provisional Dates) (a) 18 November-3-week course commences. (b) 6 December—course concludes. FIRST DEGREE COURSE BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING The following courses may be undertaken : 8 Agricultural Engineering Course. Chemical Engineering Course. Civil Engineering Course. Electrical Engineering Course. • Industrial Engineering Course. Mechanical Engineering Course. Metallurgical Engineering Course. Mineral Engineering Course. Mining Engineering Course. . Each of these courses is of four years' duration, specialized in the later years according to the branch of Engineering selected, and intended to qualify for the practice of the Engineering profession. BACHELOR OF SURVEYING A four-year degree course. The First Year is identical with that of the Engineering courses, but the later years are devoted to subjects germane to the science of surveying in all its aspects. DEGREES AT OTHER UNIVERSITIES Aeronautical Engineering. The degree course in Aeronautical Engineering is a four year course taken at the University of Sydney. Students who have completed the first two years of the Civil, Mechanical, or Electrical Engineering courses at this University may make application to transfer to the third year of the above course in Sydney. . POST-GRADUATE COURSES The following courses are available : Master of Engineering. Master of Surveying. Master of Engineering Science. Doctor of Philosophy. . Doctor of Engineering. For further details see Chapter g. ADMISSION TO FIRST YEAR COURSES 1963 ' LIMITATION OF ADMISSION The number of students who may be admitted to First Year courses in Engineering and zww. Surveying in igб; has been limited by the University Council to a total of SELECTІІN FOR ADMISSION Selection is made by the Professorial Board from applicants who have qualified to matriculate and is based primarily upon academic merit judged by reference to the results of Matriculation Examinations. An order-of-merit list is prepared by a Selection Committee in accordance with principles adopted by the Professorial Board, and is submitted to the Board for approval. ADMISSION TEST The faculty has decided that, for 1963 and subsequent years, all students seeking admission to the first year of the Engineering and Surveying courses will be required to sit for a special test to be held in January. All applicants will be notified early in January of the date of the test, and the place at which it will be held. METHOD OF SELECTION In preparing the order-of-merit list the following factors are first taken into account: (a) The number of attempts required by each candidate to pass the Matriculation Examination. (b) Honours obtained at the Matriculation Examination. (c) Passes obtained at the Matriculation Examination. (d) Failures suffered in the Matriculation Examination. (e) The effects on examination results of (i) the age of an applicant when examined (ii) any interruption to studies, or any other handicap suffered as a result of war service or other circumstance. (f) 'The results of any subsequent examinations attempted. . The Matriculation. Examination performance is carefully scrutinized and in addition to the factors above, attention is given to any improvement or deterioration in a student's second or subsequent attempts at the examination as a whole and at individual subjects. Comparisons are finally made on the basis of marks scored (totals, averages, and even marks in individual subjects): To determine the allocation of the later places on the order-of-merit list any other evidence which may be discovered as to the applicants' aptitudes for Engineering studies and Engineering practice may be considered in addition to examination results. The order-of-merit list, prepared in this way, is carefully re-checked, particular attention being given to the relative positions allotted to students who qualified to matriculate by one or other of the concessional methods permitted, and to those in the groups immediately above and below the 120th position on the list. Those students grouped about the dividing line are interviewed by the Selection Com- mittee before the final order-of-merit is established. The list is then submitted to the full Professorial Board for review and adoption if approved. Visiting students from overseas countries who have passed the Melbourne Matriculation Examination or who have been provisionally granted the necessary status under one of the concessional methods of Matriculation, are considered for selection together with, and on the same basis as all other applicants. However, the maximum number of visiting students from overseas countries who may be admitted may be limited. ENGLISH EXPRESSION The Faculty is of the opinion that future candidates for selection in Engineering should have obtained an outright pass in English Expression and has recommended accordingly to the Professorial Board. This recommendation is still under discussion and the whole position of English Expression is likely to come under review as a result. This will not directly affect selection for 1963 but the Faculty's selection committee will keep it in mind when making use of its powers under the principles of selection in deciding between candidates for positions 170 to 220 on the quota list. For these candidates the selection committee will give preference, other things being equal, to those who have passed English Expression (or English Literature, or a History or Language subject). The attention of candidates for the 1962 matriculation examination, who intend to seek selection for the Engineering course. is drawn to the following advice: should such a candidate pass the 1962 examination by compensation but not pass English Expression, he should, if he repeats the matriculation examination, repeat English Expression or take English Literature, or a history or a language. PROCEDURE TO BE FOLLOWED BY APPLICANTS All persons wishing to be considered for admission to First Year Engineering and Survey- ing courses in 1063, including those who have previously attempted First Year, are required to proceed as follows: (a) Enquiries: Applicants may make personal enquiries at interviews arranged by making art appointment at the office of the Technical Branch, Engineering School (34 0484, Ext. 445 and 781) during the first three weeks of January. (b) Lodgement of Application: Special application forms will be available at the Technical Branch of the Registrar's Office (Ground Floor, Engineering School) from 1 November 1962. Each applicant must lodge a completed form in the manner set out below: (i) All applications, including those of interstate students and students from overseas, must be lodged with the Secretary, Technical Branch, on or before Friday, зо November 1962. (ii) Friday, 18 January 1963, is the final date on which any amendment to an application for admission to the Engineering and Surveying courses will be accepted. (c) Enrolment: All students selected for admission to first year Engineering in 1963 must complete enrolment and payment of fees in accordance with the procedure set out under 'Enrolment' below, not later than Friday, 22 February 1963. (d) Late Enrolments: Late enrolments cannot be considered. Applicants for scholarships or other awards whose entry in 1963 is conditional upon the award of any type of scholarship, must NOT await the announcement of such award before lodging an application for admission. If necessary, an application may be withdrawn at a later date by letter addressed to the Registrar. INTERVIEWS BY SELECTION COMMITTEE Those applicants whom the Selection Committee wishes to interview will be advised of the time and place of interview by letter to the address indicated by the applicant on the 1о 'Application for Admission' form. It is anticipated that any such interviews will take place during the second or third week in February, and applicants are advised to be within reasonable reach of Melbourne during that period. It is expected that only a small number of applicants will be called for interview, and those not called should, therefore, await notification of the result of their application before taking any further action. RESULTS OF APPLICATIONS AND SUBSEQUENT PROCEDURE (a) Notification of Applicants During the latter part of February, before the course commences, each applicant will be individually informed by letter of the result of his application. (b) Acceptance of Offered Places An applicant who wishes to accept an offered place in the course must forward a written acceptance to reach the Secretary, Technical Branch, by a date specified in the offer. If the offer of a place is not accepted in writing by the due date, it will be automatically withdrawn and the application cancelled. The place may then be offered to the next applicant on the waiting list. (c) Cancellation of Applications or rejection of offered places Applicants who wish to cancel their applications, or reject offered places, are asked to notify the Secretary, Technical Branch, in writing, of their decisions at the earliest possible date, so that places in the course may be offered in good time to other applicants lower on the order-of-merit list. FACULTY PREREQUISITES In addition to matriculating, candidates must also have passed the prerequisite subjects (if any) for their course (see below). For the bachelors' course in Engineering and Surveying no prerequisite subjects at matriculation are prescribed. However, those wishing to enter Engineering courses are advised that the teaching of the First Year subjects is of a University standard and assumes that Mathematics I, lathe- maticś II, Physics and Chemistry have been taken at least to the Leaving level. ENGLISH EXPRESSION. See statement regarding English Expression under 'Method of Selection The first year mathematical subject, Engineering Mathematics part I, is predominantly a Pure Mathematics subject. Where students have definitely decided on the course they wish to undertake the following recommendations are made: Metallurgical Engineering and Chemical Engineering Courses Chemistry should be taken to the Matriculation level. Electrical Engineering Course Pure Mathematics and Physics should be taken to the Matriculation level. PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORD OF BTUDENTS All students admitted to the First Year of the Engineering course in 1963 may be required to be photographed for the purpose of records. Directions for having photographs taken at the Visual Aids Department(free of charge) will be given to students during the first week of the course.. SUSPENSION AND LIMITATION : FOR UNSATISFACTORY PROGRESS [(Regulation z.5) 1. Where a student fails in or is absent from. any annual examination (including any supplementary or special examination) and the appropriate faculty or board of studies is of the opinion, after investigating the circumstances and giving the student concerned an opportunity to be heard, that— (i) his attempt at the examination was so, unsatisfactory, or (ii) his absence was so inexcusable the subjects for which he may enrol in any subsequent year should be specified it shall notify the student accordingly and thereupon the subjects for which he may enrol shall be as specified. 2. Where a student fails in or is absent from any annual examination (including and supplementary or special examination) and the appropriate faculty or board of studies is of the opinion, after investigating, the circumstances and giving the student concerned an opportunity to be heard, that- 11 (i) his attempt at the examination was • so unsatisfactory, or (ii) his absence was so inexcusable he should be excluded from the course or subject concerned, it shall report its opinion to the Professorial Board. 3. (a) In considering a report pursuant to section a, after giving an opportunity to the student to be heard, the Professorial Board may determine that the student shall (i) be excluded from all courses or such course or courses as it shall specify, or (ii) be excluded from all subjects or such subject or subjects as it shall specify, or (iii) be limited in any year to such subject or subjects as it shall specify, or (iv) be permitted to continue his course subject to such conditions as the Board may determine and the determination of the Board shall be effective from the date thereofy (b) When acting under this section the Board may act by a committee of which at least five members shall be present and vote at any hearing. 4. Any student excluded from any course or courses or from any subject or subjects under section may apply for admission to any such course or subject. If the Professorial Board is satisfiedз that the condition or circumstances of any such student have so changed that there is a reasonable probability that he will make satisfactory progress in any such course or subject, it may, after the expiration of one calendar year from the date of the determination for exclusion, authorize the admission of that student to any such course or subject, and may impose such conditions as it may determine. 5. No student who has entered a course for a degree or diploma and who has been excluded from that course shall be permitted to enter for any other course for a degree or diploma without the permission of the faculty or board of studies controlling that other course: Provided that a student who has been refused such permission may appeal to the Professorial Board.]

RECOGNITION OF WORK DONE AT TECHNICAL COLLEGES CREDITS ON ENTRY INTO A COURSE Credits may be granted by the University to those candidates who are qualified to matriculate and who have completed the subjects of at least three (3) years of a diploma course at a Technical College recognized by the Technical Colleges Board for the purpose —(Tables I and IV). In general, candidates under 18 years of age on entry to the University, will not receive any exemption, and candidates between 18 and ig years of age will receive exemptions amounting to not more than one year of the course.

APPLICATIONS FOR EXEMPTIONS . These must be made on the prescribed form, which is obtainable at the Technical Branch, Registrar's Office: A certificate from the Principal stating the stage the applicant has reached in his diploma course must be submitted with the application, and this certificate must specify the subjects passed, the year of passing, and the marks awarded. The Technical Colleges Board may determine that exemptions given are for the purpose of a specified course at the University and in such cases candidates transferring to another course may not be given exemptions in that course without the permission of the Board.

METHODS OF OBTAINING CREDITS IN AN ENGINEERING COURSE There are two methods of obtaining credits: Method i-Exemption from single subjects Method a—Exemption from years.

METHOD I: EXEMPTIONS FROM SINGLE SUBJECTS This is the method that has been in force since exemptions were first granted and may be continued for candidates other than those specifically recommended (and accepted by the Board) for the two years exemption described under Method 2, below. • Exemption is given from subjects for which the necessary Technical College rerequisite subjects have been passed during the diploma course, and this exemption usually amounts to about one year of the University course for those who have completed a diploma course. Table I sets out the Technical Colleges recognized for this purpose and the subjects in which recognition is granted. Table II shows the University subjects which may be exempted opposite the prerequisite Technical College subjects. 1г METHOD 2: ЕХЕМРТ10N FROM YEARS Credits equivalent to two years of the University courses named below (Table III) may be given to candidates from Technical Colleges recognized for this purpose (Table IV). This is known as a 'bock' exemption. Candidates must be specifically recommended by the Principal of the recognized college at which an approved diploma course was completed. Such a recommendation will not necessarily ensure the entry of the candidate into a special third year of the degree course, and the Faculty of Engineering may stipulate that a certain number of credit passes, and/or near credit passes must be obtained in certain subjects of the diploma course as a prerequisite for admission by this method. At present the requirements of the Faculty of Engineering are as follows: Generally speaking, credits (75 per cent or better) or near credits (above o per cent) will be required in ten of the subjects listed below—not less than four of these being from Group a. (The extent to which near credits will be accepted will be governed by the accommoda- tiоп available.) Table 1-Technical Colleges recognized for Single Subject Exemptions t

Subjects in which recognition will be granted are indicated by an aeteriek in the appropriate column

н • N a I tics Аи os Соггввв g 8 te ' te thema ai ы . I

н Ma ing d Ø lie o vey ш S w W App Ballarat School of Mines .. .. • • • • • • • • Bendigo Technical College • в • • • • • • Castlemalne Technical School .. Caulfield Technical College • • • • Footecray Technical College • Gordon Institute of Technology, Geelong .. • • • • Maryborough Technical School .. ь • • Royal Melbourne Institute of • Technology • ь • • • • Swlnburne Technical College • • • • • • Yallotirn Technical School.. .. • • • r • • • `• Warrnambool Technical College .. • г • • • •

'Credit for surveying is subject to the performance of the required vacation work In surveying (see p. 15). tThe list of subjects in which recognition will be granted and which are approved equivalents are correct at the time of going to press. Alterations to the lists may be made subsequently on the recommendation of the Technical Colleges Board.

GROUP 1 Subjects common to Civil, Electrical, and Mechanical Diploma Courses (g subjects). Mathematics IIA Mathematics III Mathematics IV. Mathematics IIB • Physics II "Engineering Physics Applied Mechanics I Heat Eп ines 1 Electrical Engineering I 13 Z б

Mathematics IA, IB, IC, IIA, IIB, ш, IV Thermodynamics part I 14

a Chemistry partI а ca

Engineering part I Il н н Ø

15 Physics part I (Eng. Co.)

Pure Mathematics part I MathematicsI A, IB, IC, IIA, II

Surveying part I

Surveying IIA If passed at the KMIT Machine Shop Practice I GROUP 2 (a) Civil Engineering (7 subjects) Applied Mechanics IIA *Applied Mechanics IIIA Land Surveying Civil Engineering I Civil Engineering II Hydraulics I Hydraulics II (b) Electrical Engineering (7 subjects) Applied Mechanics IIB Applied Mechanics IIIB Heat Engines Electrical Eng. II Electrical Eng. III *Electronics I *Electronics II (c) Mechanical Engineering (7 subjects) Applied Mechanics IIB Applied Mechanics IIIB Heat Engines II Heat Engines III Electrical Eng. II Metallurgy IIIC *Electronics I * Note: The subjects Engineering Physics (group i) and Electronics I and II, and Applied Mechanics IIIA (group 2) were introduced in 1962.

For candidates completing diploma subjects in 1962 the following diploma subjects will be used instead: GROUP 1 Physics II GROUP 2 Civil Engineering Applied Mechanics IIIB if done . Electrical Engineering II Electrical Engineering , Electronics and Engineering Drawing IIIC part I or part II Mechanical Engineering Metallurgy IIC

' Table Ill—Requirements for Exemption by years

UГПVERSITY COURSE TECHNICAL COLLEGE QUALIFICATIONS ' (diploma and prerequisite subjects) Civil Engineering Approved diploma in Civil Engineering Electrical Engineering Approved diploma in Electrical Engineering Metallurgy IIC and Electronics (Education Dept. diplomas) *Mechanical Engineering Approved diploma in Mechanical Engineering Metallurgy IIC Metallurgical Engineering Approved diploma in Metallurgy or Metallurgical Engineering Mathematics III, Engineering Drawing IIA, Engineering Drawing and Design IIIA or IIIB or IIIC Applied Mechanics IIB ' (Mathematics IV is desirable) *Industrial Engineering Approved diploma in Mechanical Engineering, Metallurgy IIC Mining Engineering Approved diploma in Mining Engineering and qualified for exemption in Geology part I, Engineering Mathe- matics part I, and Physics part I. Approved diploma in Civil Engineering and qualified for exemption in Geology part I ' Chemical Engineering Fellowship diploma of Chemical Engineering (RMIT) Surveying Full-time Associateship diploma in Surveying (RMIT) Mathematics IV (Technical College), and Pure Mathematics part II and Principles of Geophysics (University) * Colleges which conduct a practical course of sufficient standard in Metallurgy IC, IIC and IIIC will be recognized for exemption in Properties of Metals in these two courses. 16 Table IV-Technical Colleges Recognized and Diplomas Approved for Two Years' Exemption (A cross indicates an approved diploma course at a recognized college)

Diylo»ma Course Civil Elec. Mech. Met.

*Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology X X Ballarat School of Mines .: .. .. X X .. Х Bendigo Technical College ...... Х Castlemaine Technical College .. X Caulfield Technical College ...... X X . Х Footscray Technical College ...... X .. . Х Gordon Institute of Technology x х Maryborough Technical College ...... X X Swinburne Technical College . . .. X X Øarrnambool Technical College . . . . x х Yallourn Technical College ...... X X

BLOCK EXEMPTION COURSES FOR 1963 The subjects of the special third year courses for Civil Engineering Electrical Engineering Mechanical Engineering Industrial Engineering Metallurgical Engineering will be found next to the normal third year course in the appropriate departmental time- table, In the following courses, viz: Mining Engineering Chemical Engineering a special third year of University study will be prescribed in each individual case. In the Surveying course the normal third year course is taken. REGULATIONS RELATING TO BLOCK EXEMPTION COURSES For entrants in 1963 a block exemption course will normally be completed by passing the special third year and the normal fourth year of a particular course. . The passing by years regulations will apply to these years. Block exemption candidates must have completed the five weeks vacation experience which precedes the normal third year except RMIT candidates for admission to the Metallurgical Engineering course. For Surveying and Mining Engineering candidates experience in Surveying is required; other candidates require experience appropriate to their course. The Faculty will be prepared to give special consideration to candidates with exceptional previous experience. The University Appointments Board will assist students to lind suitable employment. PRACTICAL WORK IN TECHNICAL COLLEGES The required practical work in the following University subjects may be carried out at the Technical Colleges named, provided that application is made to the Registrar for the . permission of the Faculty at the beginning of the Academic Year. Chemistry Part I. Ballarat and Bendigo Schools of Mines; Gordon Institute of Tech- nology, Geelong; Yallourn Technical College. Geology Part I.—Ballarat School of lines. Physics Part I (Eng. Co.)—Ballarat and Bendigo Schools of Mines; Gordon Institute of Technology, Geelong; Maryborough Technical College. Candidates who secure this permission must sit for the University Examinations in the subject, and will be required to pay an examination fee of £1. i is. бd. per subject to the University. Candidates will be required to submit an enrolment card for external studies, but will not be required to pay other than examination fees to the University. A certificate of the completion of the practical work must be submitted with the entry for examination, and the candidates' note-books must be made available for inspection to the head of the University department concerned. •Fcpowship and Day Associate Diplomas. PRACTICAL WORK The following rules apply for practical work in all subjects of the courses in the Faculty of Engineering. (a) Students are expected to attend all practical work sessions (laboratory, drawing office and field work, practice classes, seminars, and excursions) and to complete all the practical work assignments set by the lecturer in charge. Unless excused on account of special circumstances, a candidate who fails to complete the set assignments in any subject will be liable to disqualification in that subject for that year's Annual Examination. Candidates so disqualified will usually be notified in writing by the Faculty before the written examination, but the Faculty is not bound to give such notification. (b) Students must reach an adequate standard in practical work in order to pass the Annual Examination. It will be stated in the details, of the individual subjects whether the candidate's standard is to be assessed by means of a practical examination, and/or the work submitted by him during the year. Students must not expect to be notified before the written examination whether their practical work has been judged satisfactory or not. (c) Assignments (e.g., drawings, designs, laboratory and other reports, exercises, field books) not submitted to the lecturer or demonstrator in charge by the due dates may fail to count as practical work done. (d) All assignments in the practical work in any subject must be preserved for resubmission if called for by the lecturer or examiners. PRACTICAL EXPERIENCE 1. After the Annual Examination of each year and before entering upon the work of the following year, a candidate shall satisfy the Faculty that he has spent a period of not less than five consecutive weeks in obtaining approved practical experience, as follows: (a) Between First and Second Years all candidates shall— (i) attend an approved course of workshop training at a Technical College recognized for this purpose; or (ii) attend a course of workshop training under an approved engineer. (b) Between Second and Third Years Students undertaking the Mining Engineering course for B.E. or the course for B.Surv. shall obtain approved practical experience in Surveying. Students undertaking the Agricultural, Chemical, Civil, Electrical, Industrial, Mechanical, Metallurgical, or Mineral Engineering courses for B.E. shall obtain approved practical experience in the branch of Engineering appropriate to the course. (c) Between Third and Fourth Years— Students undertaking the Civil Engineering course for B.E. or the course for B.Surv. shall obtain approved practical experience in surveying. Students in all other courses shall obtain approved practical experience in the branch of Engineering appropriate to the course. z. In all cases the practical experience must be obtained under a competent engineer, surveyor, metallurgist, geologist, chemical engineer or agriculturalist. The Faculty may grant either partial or total exemption from these requirements to candidates who produce satisfactory evidence of suitable experience elsewhere, and in special cases may grant dispensation. BEFORE THE END OF FIRST TERM, candidates shall produce written evidence of their practical experience during the preceding vacation. It is the student's responsibility to ensure that the necessary certificate from the employer is lodged with the Secretary of the Technical Branch. Students should preserve duplicate copies of their certificates as evidence of their having performed approved vacation work. Before beginning a period of practical experience, candidates may ensure that it will satisfy the Faculty by consulting the Head of the Department concerned. In doubtful cases an application should be addressed to the Dean. ;. In the subjects of Engineering Mathematics, there is prescribed vacation reading. FIRST AID (MINING AND SURVEYING COURSES) Candidates for the degrees of B.E. in Mining Engineering and B.Surv. shall before graduation present evidence satisfactory to the Faculty that they hold a St John Ambulance First 18 Aid certificate or equivalent qualification. Candidates for в.в. in Mining Engineering are. strongly advised to obtain this qualification before the end of the Second Year of their courses. In order to be credited with the subject First Aid, a candidate for the degree of B.Surv. must present a certificate satisfactory to the Faculty of having acquired proficiency in First Aid to the injured. This may be done at any stage of the course, and not only in the Fourth Year as specified in the List of Subjects. VARIATIONS IN COURSES Candidates who wish to vary their courses must make a written application. The following variations may be approved: All Courses Engineering Mathematics Part IA may be prescribed instead of Engineering Mathematics Part I for students permitted to repeat. First Year. Applied Mathematics Part I (Honours) together with Pure Mathematics Part I (Honours) instead of Engineering Mathematics Part I. Applied Mathematics Part II (Honours) instead of Engineering Mathematics' Part III. Chemistry Part IB instead of Chemistry (Engineering Course). Pure Mathematics Part II (Honours) instead of Engineering Mathematics Part II.' Pure Mathematics Part III (Honours) or some other approved mathematical subject instead of Engineering Mathematics Part IV. Metallurgical Engineering Course Chemistry (Engineering Course) may be accepted instead of Chemistry Part IB on the recommendation of the Head of the Department of Metallurgy. COMBINED COURSES (a) Courses to qualify for В.Sc. or S.A. (Honours) after qualifying for B.E.: For students intending to qualify for a further degree, such as Bachelor of Science or Bachelor of Arts (Honours), by continuing studies immediately after completion of a course for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering, variation in a prescribed course for the latter to enable the student concerned to qualify for the further degree in a minimum time may,.. in special cases, be permitted. In no case may a student qualify for the degree of Bachelor in another faculty without completing at least a full academic year's work, approved by that Faculty, subsequent to completing a course for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering. (b) Courses to qualify in an additional branch of Engineering after qualifying for B.E. in one branch: The Faculty may prescribe a special course to enable a student to qualify in a second branch of Engineering after qualifying for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering in one branch. In no case may the qualification in an additional branch be obtained by completing less than the work of one full academic year. Successful completion of a prescribed course to qualify in an additional branch will be recognized by the issue of an appropriate certificate. " As the student concerned will have qualified for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering by virtue of completion of his original course, no further Bachelor's degree in Engineering will be conferred. PASSING BY YEARS The requirement that'a candidate shall have passed one year of the course before being allowed to proceed to any subject of the succeeding year will normally be waived only: 1. in the case of an ex-serviceman who passes in at least three-fifths of the work of a year of the course; z. in exceptional cases of illness during the course, or other such circumstances beyond the control of the candidate. The requirement that a candidate shall repeat the whole of a. year not successfully completed will normally be waived only in the case of : 1. a candidate who has completed part of the work of the'Fourth Year of the course. z. all ex-servicemen. The above concessions to an ex-serviceman expire at the beginning of his • fourth calendar year spent in the Engineering Course subsequent to 31 December 1945. In determining the courses of students allowed under the above regulations to proceed to subjects of a higher year before having completed the previous year, the Faculty will not allow the following subjects to be taken unless the corresponding prerequisites, have been passed: 19 SUBJECT PREREQUISITE Any Part II or IIA subject Corresponding Part I Any Part III or IIIA subject Corresponding Part II Engineering Design II f Engineering Design I and 1 Strength of Materials II Civil Engineering Engineering Design A and Earth Science

HONOUR WORK Except in subjects where special details are published, the Syllabus for Honours will be the same as that for Pass, but the examination for Honours will require candidates to attain a higher standard and to show more detailed knowledge.

EXAMINATIONS In addition to the examinations specified, other tests may be held during the year. The standards reached in examinations, tests, and practical and other work will be taken into account as specified in the details of individual subjects in determining whether a candidate has reached Pass standard.

FINAL HONOURS Final Honours may be awarded at the conclusion of a course for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering or Bachelor of Surveying, on the following basis: (a) In all courses except in Civil and Agricultural Engineering, the work of the Fourth Year is divided into Final Honours and Pass courses, and a candidate for Final Honours must enrol accordingly after obtaining the approval of the Head of his Department. In general, this approval is only granted to those who have passed the Second and Third Years of the course at the first attempt and obtained Honours in one or two subjects in each Year of the course. Students who have shown ability to proceed more rapidly than the average or to cope with more difficult work may, by taking the Final Honours course, benefit accordingly. In practical work, projects and designs, they will be expected to display greater initiative and originality. The work to be taken into account in assessing Final Honours in these courses will be as follows (i) Chemical Engineering-A11 the work of the Fourth Year. (ii) Industrial Engineering—All the work of the Fourth Year. (iii) Mechanical Engineering—All the work of the Fourth Year. (iv) Surveying—Аll the work of the Fourth Year. (v) Electrical Engineering—The work in the subject Electrical Engineering Part III. (vi) Mining Engineering—The work in the following group of subjects assessed as a whole: Mineral Industry Management Mining Part II Mining Design Mining Geology Ore Dressing (vii) Metallurgical Engineering—The work in the following group of subjects assessed as a whole: Metallurgy Part III Metallurgical Engineering Part III Final Honour Examinations may be held in the subjects tabulated above. The scope of the work and the arrangement of the papers will be found in the following pages under the heading of the individual subjects concerned. (b) In the Civil Engineering Course there is no separate course for Final Honours, the award of Final Honours being determined on the basis of work done in the subject Civil Engineering in the Fourth Year. The general performance in earlier years of the course may also be taken into account. (c) In the Agricultural Engineering Course there is no separate course for Final Honours, the award of Final Honours being determined mainly on the basis of work done in the subjects Agricultural Engineering A, B and C; nevertheless, general performance in other subjects of the Fourth Year and in earlier years of the course may also be taken into account. zo ENROLMENT All students must enrol as detailed below (а) Continuing Students Except for those applying for admission to First Year, i963, students enrolled in a previous Ρ5 year must lodge their enrolments and pay their fees by г January 1963. These enrolments will be accepted at the Students' Records Office from the time of publication of the results Ρ. of the Annual Examinations, 1g0г (b) Students from Recognized Technical Colleges A suitably qualified student from a recognized Technical College, who wishes to apply for admission in 196 to the Second or Third Year of a course for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering should, during January 1963, lodge with the Principal of the relevant Technical College an 'Application for Block Exemption'. No further action concerning enrolment should be taken by such applicant until he receives a letter from the University informing him of the result of his application and the further action required. (An applicant for entry to Third Year is required to produce, during First Term, evidence of at least five weeks continuous employment appropriate to his course, performed during the long vacation preceding his admission. In the case of Mining Engineering afd Surveying students, these five weeks must be spent gaining practical experience in surveying.) (c) Students applying for admission to First Year B.E. or B.Surv., 1963 (i) 'Application for Admission' forms must be lodged with the Secretary, Technical Branch, on or before 18 January 1963, as detailed in the section of the Handbook entitled 'Admission to First Year Engineering and Surveying Courses, 1963'. (ii) After selection has been notified enrolment and payment of fees must be made no later than Friday, 22 February.

The forms to be submitted for enrolment are as follows (a) Enrolment card for lectures This document, which is submitted each • year, must indicate clearly (amongst other things) the year and course for which the student wishes to enter and the subjects com- prising that year's work. Applicants for admission to First Year В.Е. should indicate clearly their intention of studying either Chemistry (Engineering course) [for those who do not wish to proceed with Chemical Engineering] or Chemistry part IA or B [for those who may wish to proceed with Chemical or Metallurgical Engineering]. N.B. Students wishing to proceed with any variation from a prescribed course must lodge with the Secretary, Technical Branch, at the time of enrolling, a written application for approval of the proposed variation. (b) Application to sign the Matriculation Roll This document is to be completed by all intending students for B.E. or B.Surv. who have not previously signed the Matriculation Roll. (c) Roll cards for each subject A roll card for each subject of the course must be submitted, and students taking Physics part I (Engineering course) and Chemistry part IA or B, or Chemistry (Engineering course), must also submit special roll cards for practical work. (d) Bank slip for the correct fees After completing the documents in (a), (b), and (c) above, the student must present his enrolment card for an assessment of fees to be made. The enrolment documents will be accepted when they are accompanied by a bank slip indicating that the assessed fees have been paid. Sppecial arrangements are made for those students whose fees are paid under the provision of a Commonwealth Scholarship or other approved agreement. LATE ENTRIES These may in special circumstances be accepted on payment of an additional fee, but no candidate will be admitted to the Annual Examination in any subject, except with the special permission of the Professorial Board, who has not enrolled for that subject within one month after the beginning of first term. Normally, late entries cannot be accepted for First Year of the Engineering courses. TERMINAL RE-ENROLMENT In order to increase the accuracy of the University's records, every student will be 21 required to fill in a special re-enrolment slip at the end of the first term, showing the subjects which he proposes to study for the remainder of the year. A student who does not wish to proceed with his course must notify Students' Records in writing immediately." FEES BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING, BACHELOR OF SURVEYING When enrolling students must consult the Fees Section of Students' Records before payment of fees. Lecture fees are paid yearly in advance, or in three terminal instalments, the first being paid on enrolment and the second and third on or before to May and 25 July. respectively. All fees must be paid into the University's account at a branch of the National Bank of Australasia. Branches of the bank will be found next to the Bookroom and in Union House. Special Laboratory and Apparatus Fees These fees are paid to the University Branch of the National Bank using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the department concerned; they must be paid and evidence of payment must be produced to the department or lecturer before practical classes begin. LABORATORY FEES FOR ENGINEERING SUBJECTS Applied Thermodynamics I . .. . • .. £1 o o Applied Thermodynamics II ...... 1 o o Applied Thermodynamics III .. .. i o o Chemical Engineering I ..... ...... . 4 o o Chemical Engineering II (new course) ...... 4 o o Process Chemistry .. ...... z o o Chemical Engineering Lab. . .. .. .. . , 5 o o Chemical Engineering III (new course) .. .. 8 o o Earth Science . .. 2. o o Electrical Engineering Part I з o o Electrical Engineering IA a o o Electrical Engineering Part II 5 o o Electrical Engineering Part III . _ .. 5 0 0 Engineering Part I . . . .. 1 o o Engineering Materials .. . . .. . a o o Fluid Mechanics A .. ...... • .. 1 o o Fluid Mechanics B and C to o Industrial Electronics and Control ...... .. .. з o o Industrial Engineering M ...... 1 o o Metallurgical Engineering Part I ...... a o o 3 o o *Меtallитgical Engineering Part II ...... . • Metallurgical Engineering Part III ...... 2 o o #Metallurgy Part I . .. .. .. 4 o o :Metallurgy Part II ...... 4 0 o :Metallurgy Part III ...... 4 o o Mining Part I ...... 1 o ' i Mining Part II 1 0 o Ore Dressing...... 1 o o y ...... *Photogrammetг ...... a o o *Properties of Metals .. .. 2 o o Strength of Materials .. .. .. a o o *Surveying Part I . . .. г o o *Surveying Part II .. .. . . .. z o o *Surveying Part II (Mining course) . . .. 2 o o *Surveying Part III ... .. 2. o o * ‚r may be refunded. Š £z may be refunded. LABORATORY FEES FOR CHEMISTRY AND PHYSICS SUBJECTS These fees are paid to the University Branch of the National Bank using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the Chemistry Laboratory of the Redmond Barry Buildingg or from the Chemistry Department. For particulars see respective subjects in Details of Subjects. 22 LECTURES AND TIME-TABLE OF LECTURES The syllabus for each course of lectures and for practical work is shown in details of courses and subjects. The rooms assigned to classes will be published on the Engineering School Notice Board before the beginning of First Term. The time-tables of lectures in the various courses are printed on pages зо-68. EVENING LECTURES Subject to sufficient enrolments being received, evening lectures will be delivered in ig63 in the following subjects: Applied Mathematics Parts I and III. Physics Part I (with laboratory work). Pure Mathematics Part I and II. . These lectures are for pass candidates only.

VACATION WORK Students are required to obtain suitable vacation work experience each year during the vacation which follows the Annual Examinations (see Regulations and details). Technical College students applying for admission to the Third Year of an Engineering course are required to have completed, during the immediately preceding vacation, a minimum of five weeks appropriate vacation work, as specified for all other students entering Third Year. It is a requirement of the Faculty that students present to the Secretary, Technical Branch, by the end of First Term, a certificate from their employer setting out briefly details of the period and type of employment. The University Appointments Board is usually able to assist students in finding suitable employment. VACATION READING Students are advised that they are expected to use a considerable part of the summer and spring vacations for reading purposes. In some cases specific references are made in the following details; in others a list of suitable books will be posted on the appropriate notice boards; in all cases the lecturers concerned should be consulted. UNIVERSITY SURVEY CAMP A University Survey Camp, of three weeks' duration, followed by plotting and computa- tations in the Drawing Office, may be arranged in the summer at a site selected by the Head of the Department of Surveying to enable students to conform with vacation experience requirements. Students who have not obtained the requisite experience in Surveyying under a competent surveyor must attend at least one University Survey Camp and do the con- sequent Office work. If a Survey Camp is held, students will defray their own travelling and camp expenses. The University provides the instruments and a limited number of tents. A meeting of intending members is called during the second term of the Second Year to elect a camp committee, which is responsible to the Head of the Department for details of arrangements. Each member must be approved by the Head of the Department before admission and must pay to the committee, at least seven days before the end of the third term, a contribution for transport and camp expenses, and also an amount to cover the cost of transport of instruments and repairs and renewal of equipment. Students from other Universities and recognized Technical Colleges may be admitted by the Head of the Department.

MATRICULATION All first year students must matriculate—i.e. make the prescribed declaration and sign the matriculation roll—at the Registrar's Office during the first term. The dates fixed for matriculation in 19б3 are 4 and 18 April and to June. Unless this is done no subjects passed can count towards a degree. Students should satisfy themselves that they are qualified to matriculate before applying for admission. Attention is drawn to the following points relevant to the obtaining of the matriculation qualifications: , In order to become qualified to matriculate, candidates must— (a) obtain the School Leaving Certificate and be credited therein with five subjects including 23 (i) English, (ii) a branch of Mathematics or of Science, (iii) one other subject chosen from the languages other than English, Greek and Roman History, Modern History, British History, Economics, Social Studies; (b) pass the Matriculation Examination by obtaining credit for four subjects, including English Expression; (c) attain the age of seventeen years by 3 i March in the year concerned. CONCESSIONAL MATRICULATION The Professorial Board has discretionary powers concerning matriculation, and certain matriculation concessions may be made to candidates in the following categories: (a) Persons who in their first University year turn 17 years of age after 3i March but before the start of the Annual Examinations may be admitted to matriculation if they have fulfilled one of the following conditions: (a) passed the Matriculation Examination twice, (b) passed the Matriculation Examination with a minimum of three honours, (c) passed the Matriculation Examination with fewer than three honours but with good passes in a broad range of subjects. In each case the Professorial Board will satisfy itself about the maturity of the candidate. (b) Adult candidates (i.e. persons who are at least twenty years of age and also have left school four full years on 3i March). Such candidates are normally required to pass a reduced number of matriculation subjects and pass either a special test in English or matriculation English Expression or English Literature. (c) Special cases (i.e., persons whose studies have been hampered by illness or by changes in requirements, or whose qualifications are deficient only in a very minor respect). Individual determinations are made in these cases. (d) Persons in employment. Candidates who are in full-time employment and have passed the necessary School Leaving subjects may qualify to matriculate by passing, while in full-time employment, in four Matriculation subjects including English Expression at any three sittings. (e) Technical College students. Candidates with approved technical college diplomas are qualified to matriculate if they have passed at the Matriculation Examination in English Expression. (f) Ad euпdеm statum applicants. Candidates who have qualified to matriculate in another recognized University may be admitted to matriculation. All candidates for special forms of matriculation should consult the Matriculation Officer in the Registrar's Office, who will advise them as to the form of application required.

EXAMINATIONS All candidates for the Annual Examination, whether enrolled as attending lectures or for external studies, must lodge an examination entry with the Registrar not later than 2g July. The entry must specify whether the candidate intends presenting for pass or honours in each subject, no candidate being permitted to enter for both pass and honours in the same subject. Candidates who take the honours papers in any subject but fail to reach honours standard are eligible to be granted a pass. A time-table of the Annual Examination will be available at the Registrar's Оffiсе some weeks before the examination. No additional examination fee is payable by those who have paid full lecture fees in the subjects for which they present themselves. Candidates sitting at country centres must pay, in addition, a supervision fee of £i. ios. per subject. Examination numbers for candidates presenting at the University will be available at Students' Records during the week before the examination begins, and must be applied for by candidates in person. Applications for special consideration with medical evidence must be lodged before the commencement of the Annual Examination period. Any student, moreover, in any Faculty who fails at the examinations may be reported to the Professorial Board, and may be excluded from such course or courses as the Professorial Board shall specify or may be limited in any year to subjects specified by the Faculty. 24 GRADUATION The dates for conferring degrees in 1963 are as follows: Wednesday, 6 March. Wednesday, zo March. Saturday, 30 March (Annual Commencement). Wednesday, io April. Wednesday, 7 August. Saturday, 14 December. Candidates for degrees and diplomas must lodge an application on the prescribed form, obtainable at the Registrar's Office, by the date set down in the list of Principal Dates. This application must be accompanied by a bank slip for the degree or diploma fee. The fees are as follows For the degree of Bachelor of Engineering and Bachelor of Surveying .. .. £i3 r3 o STUDENT COUNSELLORS The student counsellors' office is located at a68 Elgin Street, Carlton. The student counsellors (Mr R. Priestley, Miss Marjorie Ross and Mr G. A. Cally) are available to help students and intending students with problems such as choice of course or career, difficulties in settling down to study, adjustment to University life and financial and personal difficulties. They are available in the usual University hours, preferably with, but if necessary without, an appointment. Matriculation students and others not yet enrolled at the University should ring 34 0484 for an appointment. APPOINTMENTS BOARD The Appointments Board provides the following free services: 1. Advice on. Careers (Mr H. F. Downes) Long experience in matters relating to the employment and professional advancement of university men and women enables the officers of the Appointments Board to give reliable advice on professional careers. Careers handbooks may be obtained from the Appointments Board which also offers to students the use of a Careers library. This advisory service is carried on in close liaison with the student counsellors. 2.. Employment Service (a) Vacation Work, Part-time Work and Odd Jobs (Miss Margaret Campbell) Undergraduates requiring vacation work should register early to give the board time to make the necessary arrangements; those wishing to work during the long vacation should register before the end of August. (b) Professional Employment The Appointments Board maintains a comprehensive register of professional vacancies which the secretary and assistant secretaries are glad at all times to discuss with graduates. This assistance is available also to those students who, for one reason or another, fail to complete their courses, and in these cases special effort is made to enable undergraduates to use their university training in employment. STUDENT FACILITIES Information about the Union, the student health service, student housing, the book exchange and other facilities is given in the Orientation handbook which is distributed by the Students' Representative Council free of charge to new students before the beginning of first term. The handbook also contains information about clubs and societies, sporting activities and other aspects of student life at the University. During Orientation Week, 4-8 March, the Students' Representative Council arranges con- -ducted tours of the main University buildings and opportunities for students to meet members of the teaching staff. During this week, students receive a great deal of informa- hon about study at the University which may answer most of the practical questions which concern them before the beginning of term. UNIVERSITY LIBRARIES The Baillieu Library facing the open area south of the Arts Building, with branches in several of the Departments, is open to all students. Most books recommended for study or for reference are available for use in the Library, which also provides fully for the require- 25 ments of wider reading. Students may borrow from the Library, under various conditions. The Library Rules are displayed in the Library and are also distributed in leaflet form. The Branch Library in the Engineering School is open as follows : First Term 8.45 a.m.-6 p.m. First Term Vacation 8.45 a.m.-5 p.m. Second Term 8.45 a.m.-6 p.m. Second Term Vacation 8.45 a.m.-5 p.m. Third Term—end of examinations 8.45 a.m.—g.зо p.m. Rest of academic year and Long Vacation 8.45 a.m,-5 p.m. Saturday mornings 8.45 a.m.—i2 noon, except during First Term Vacation and Long Vacation Closed for the fortnight following Xmas. The staff is in constant attendance to help students avail themselves of its resources. Students seeking information should know that, apart from the Card Catalogue (which should always he first consulted), the Engineering Library contains certain general Indexes and Abstracts of Technical Literature, which they should find of great assistance, especially in the later part of their courses. These are, chiefly: The Engineering Index. Metallurgical Abstracts. (Inst. of Metals, Lind.) A.S.M. Review of Metal Literature (American Society for Metals.) Electrical Engineering Abstracts. (Science abstracts B.) Nuclear Science Abstracts. There is also a guide to current periodicals which include Abstracts and Indexes of Technical Literature of a more specialized nature.

THE COLLEGES OF THE UNIVERSITY There are seven residential colleges connected with the University, each of which provides additional teaching, mainly of a tutorial character. The resident colleges for men are: Trinity College (Church of England) Warden : Mr R. W. T. Cowan, Parkville N.z Queens College (Methodist) Master : Dr R. C. Johnson, Parkville N

Ormond College (Presbyterian) . Master: The Rev. Prof. J. D. McCaughey, The Avenue, Parkville N.2 Newman College (Roman Catholic) Rector : V. Rev. M. M. Scott, Parkville N The resident colleges for women are: Janet Clark Hall (Church of England) Principal : Miss M. A. Dewey, Parkville N.z St Mary's Hall (Roman Catholic) Principal: The Rev. Mother, The Avenue, Parkville Ns University Women's College (Undenominational) Principal Dr Angela Milne, Parkville N College teaching is available for non-resident as well as resident students. All the Colleges have liberal provision for resident scholarships and non-resident exhibitions. The University fees do not include College fees, which are payable to the Colleges themselves. For further information regarding the Colleges, students are referred to the sections printed in the University Calendar and to the Heads of Colleges.

UNIVERSITY HALLS OF RESIDENCE There are two University Halls of Residence, International House and Medley Hall. International House provides additional teaching, mainly of a tutorial character. International House Warden: S. G. 1cL. Dimmick, 241 Royal Parade, Parkville N.z Medley Hall Warden: G. N. Pearce, 48 Drummond Street, Carlton N.3 Residence is available for both Australian and overseas students. Tutorials are provided at International House for non-resident as well as resident students. International House makes provision for associate membership which enables students who reside in the vicinity to take meals and tutorials at the House and to take an active part in the other activities of the House. The University fees do not include fees for the Halls of Residence. For further information regarding Halls of Residence students are referred to the appropriate section of the University Calendar, and to the Wardens of these institutions. DIARY The Melbourne University Press publishes a pocket diary each- year. In addition to general information about the University, the diary contains information about the dates of examinations and lecture terms, of application for scholarships and of sporting fixtures; it also contains an indexed map of the University. The diary is on sale at the University Book Room.

г7 CHAPTER 2 Regulation for First Degrees REGULATION 3.45 DEGREES OF BACHELOR OF ENGINEERING AND BACHELOR OF SURVEYING t. A candidate for the degree of bachelor of Engineering or the degree of bachelor of Surveying shall, after matriculating, pursue his studies for four Years. 2. The subjects of the course for each of these degrees, and the Years to which they pertain, shall be as prescribed by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of faculty. 3. During each Year, and between Years of the course, a candidate shall perform laboratory, drawing office and field work, attend demonstrations and excursions, and undergo experience of such an extent and in such a manner as is prescribed from time to time by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty. Subject to dispensation by the faculty in special cases no candidate shall be admitted to examination in a subject in which he has not so conformed unless he satisfy the faculty that he has had appropriate training elsewhere. 4. The faculty may allow a candidate to substitute for any subject of his course another subject or subjects of a University course which in its opinion is of at least equal standard. A candidate may compete for the exhibition, scholarship or prize in any subject which he is allowed so to substitute. 5. (a) To pass a Year of a course a candidate shall comply with one of the following conditions— (i) he shall pass at an annual examination in or obtain credit for each subject of that Year; or (ii) he shall be passed by the faculty in the Year of the course as a whole. In awarding such pass the faculty shall take into account his performance in all subjects in accordance with principles determined by the faculty from time to time and approved by the Professorial Board. A candidate passed by the faculty in the Year as a whole who has not passed at the annual examination in or obtained credit for any particular subject shall not be recorded as having passed in that subject, but shall be allowed to proceed with subjects of a later Year of the course for which a pass in such subjects may be prerequisite. (b) Except where otherwise provided or where special permission is given by the faculty a student shall pass one Year of the course in accordance with the preceding sub- section before being allowed to proceed to any subject of the succeeding Year of the course. In no case shall he proceed to any subject of the Third Year unless he has passed the First Year, nor to any subject of the Fourth Year unless he has passed the Second Year. But the holder of a recognized Technical College diploma entering on the Second Year of the course may, without special permission, include with subjects of the Second Year not more than one First Year subject for which he has not obtained credit. (c) A candidate who before the beginning of any academic year has not passed a Year of the course in accordance with sub-section (a) hereof must take or repeat in that academic year or in a subsequent year the whole of that Year of the course which he has not completed, unless special permission to do otherwise is granted by the faculty. (d) When a candidate's course has been varied in accordance with the provisions of section 4, the faculty shall define what is the content of the student's Year for the purpose of this section. 6. A candidate who obtains honours in any subject of a Year may be awarded a prize, exhibition or scholarship in that subject only if at the examination concerned he has passed that Year in accordance with the provisions of section 5. 7. The following prizes, exhibitions and scholarships may be awarded at the honour examinations and shall be open for competition to candidates who comply with the requirements of section 6: Chemistry part I (Engineering course) . Exhibition of Ei 5 Engineering Mathematics part I .. .. . Exhibition of £i5 Physics part I (Engineering course) ...... Exhibition of £i5 Applied Thermodynamics part I ...... Wright prize of Eu Engineering Design part II (Mechanical Engineering course) ...... Wright prize of Ezo 23 Metallurgy part II (E.) , , Exhibition of £ao Surveying part I . , . .. . , . , H. B. Howard Smith Exhibition of £ao Surveying part II Exhibition of £20 Electrical Engineering part I . . . , , , .. . . Dixson scholarship of £i5 Mining part I .. , . , . George Lansell exhibition of £ao Engineering part I and part IA . , , , , , , H. B. Howard Smith exhibition of £ao Strength of Materials ...... Herbert Brookes exhibition of £ao Engineering Materials . , . , , , , Exhibition of £15 Fluid Mechanics A . . W. M. McPherson exhibition of £ao Electrical Engineering part II , , . , John Monash exhibition of f ao. Engineering Design (Civil Engineering course) „ „ „ „ A. T. Danks exhibition of Lao Applied Thermodynamics part II , „ „ Dixson scholarship of £1q Engineering Mathematics part III . , . , Dixson scholarship of £ao Candidates may also compete for the following prizes, exhibitions and scholarships: Open for competition in the course for the degree of bachelor of Arts: Pure Mathematics part I . . John Macfarland exhibition of £i5 Applied Mathematics part I , . , , , Dixson scholarship of £i Pure Mathematics part II . , , . . Dixson scholarship of £ao Open for competition in the course for the degree of bachelor of Science- Physics part IA , . , , , , , Dwight's prize of £г5 Physics part IIA : .: .. Dixson scholarshiph of Eao Chemistry part IA .. Dwight's prize of £г Chemistry part II . , , , Exhibition of £zo Geology part II ., Exhibition of fao Metallurgy part I Dixson scholarship of £i5 8. A candidate who has passed or obtained credit for each Year of the course, and completed the work prescribed pursuant to section 3, may be admitted to the appropriate degree. g. There shall be a final honour examination in each course. A candidate who has passed or obtained credit for the first three Years of the course and completed the work prescribed pursuant to section 3, and who has during his Fourth Year taken all the subjects required for the Fourth Year of his course and performed in each such subject the special work prescribed for final honour candidates may be examined in the final honour subjects designated for that purpose in the details of subjects. A candidate who is awarded final honours shall thereby complete the Fourth Year. A candidate for final honours who is not classed may, if the examiners so certify, be awarded a pass in any or all of the subjects of the final honour examination. io. At the final honour examinations the following scholarships shall be open for competition— Civil Engineering .. , , , ,. .. .. Argus scholarship of fz Mining Engineering . . George Lansell scholarship of £3о Mechanical Engineering . , , . .. .. Dixson scholarship of £ao Electrical Engineering . ., ., .. Dixson scholarship of Lao Metallurgical Engineering Dixson scholarship of Lao ii. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, candidates who have completed the course for and been admitted to the degree of bachelor of Engineering Science under conditions prescribed by alterations of the Engineering courses made pursuant to Special Regulation 1939-41 (National Emergency) may be admitted to the degree of bachelor of Engineering on completing such further work as the faculty may from time to time prescribe. No candidate shall be admitted to a degree under the provisions of this section unless he shall previously have surrendered the degree of bachelor of Engineering Science.. No fee other than a certificate fee of one guinea shall be payable for admission to a degree under the provisions of this section. 12. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary hereinbefore contained, any person who is enrolled, under the regulations in force on or before 31 May, 1958, as a candidate for one of the following degrees, namely, bachelor of Civil Engineering, bachelor of Mining Engineering, bachelor of Mechanical Engineering, bachelor of Electrical Engin- eering, bachelor of Metallurgical Engineering, bachelor of Chemical Engineering or bachelor of Agricultural Engineering, may, if he complies with the regulations which were in force on or before 31 May, 195 8, be admitted— (i) on or before 31 October, 1959, to the degree for which he enrolled, or (ii) after 31 October, 1959, to the degree of bachelor of Engineering. г9 СНАРТЕА З Details of Courses FIRST YEAR COURSES IN ENGINEERING AND SURVEYING The first year of the courses in Agricultural, Civil, Electrical, Industrial, Mechanical, Mineral and Mining Engineering, andin Surveying, consists of a common course comprised of the following four subjects : Chemistry (Engineering course) Engineering Mathematics part I Engineering part I Physics part I (Engineering course) The Chemical Engineering and Metallurgical Engineering courses have the same common first year, except that students are required to take Chemistry part IB in lieu of Chemistry (Engineering course). The reason for this is that the latter course is a terminal one, and is not designed to provide the background for the more advanced work in Chemistry involved

First Year: Surveying and all Engineering Courses (Except Chemical, Metallurgical and Mineral Engineering) Starting date for all subjects of First Year ti March (Except Preliminary Course in Engineering Iwhich begins on гб February)

Sававет M. Tu. w. Tu. Tsnis *Chemistry (Engineering course) 12-1 10-11 11-12 1, 2 `А' .. .. .. '2-5.30 1, 2, 3 `В' .. E2-6.30 1, 2, 3 *Engineering I 9-10 1, 2, 3 fil-11' 1, 2, 3 `A' • • iii-12 11-12 1,2, 3 1, 2, 3 'В, .. 9-10' 9-10 9-10 9-10 1,2,3 22-5 1,2,3 *Engineering 11-12 12-1 10-11 '9-10 1, 2, 3 Mathematics I '12-1 10-li 1,2,3 'Physies I (Engineering course) `А' .. .. .. 9-10 9-10 12-1 1, 2,'3 в * 1, 2, 3 *6.30-9.30 * 1, 2, 3 `B' 11-12 11-12 11-12 1,2,3 22-5* 1, 2, 3 * в6.30-9.30 1, 2, 3 *' бPhyвice IB .. Б.30-6.30 5-6 б.15-6.16 I, 2, 3 '9-12* 22_5* 1, 2, 3 '8.30-9.30 * 1, 2, 3

*Alternative times for practical classes. Students will be informed as to which class they must attend. 1 ogether with tutorial classes at times to be arranged. 2Tutorial,Т drawing office or laboratory class. 'All students enrolling ur Physics and Chemistry must complete Practical Roll Cards when enrolling at Students' Records Office. +Preliminary classes in Engineering Part I commence on Tuesday. 26 February 1963, at 9 a.m. б For students taking Pure Mathematics I (Ions.) and Applied Mathematics I (Hons.) in lieu of F.ngineering Mathematics I (for time tables for Pure and Applied Mathematica sea Arts Faculty Handbook). 30 First Year—Chemical, Metallurgical and Mineral Engineering Courses

íSIIBJECT M. Tu. W. Тн. ТЕвМ3 10-11 12-1 1,2,3 2Chamiвtry IB 10-11 a2-6.30 1, 2, 3 'Engineering Part I .. 9-102 9-10 9-10 . 9-10 1, 2, 3 22_5

10-11 29-10 1, 2,3 iЕпgiпееriпg .. 11-12 12-1 Mathematics I 212-1 10-11 11-12 1, 2, 3 2Рнувiов I .. . 11-12 (Engineering course) а2_5* 1, 2, 3 2630- 1, 2, 3 9.30*

аььрhy io IB .. 5. 0-6. 0 5- 5. 15-d. 15 1, 2, 3 в в з з 22-5*в 1, 2, 3 2630- 9.30 1, 2, 3

*Alternative times for practical classes. Students will be informed as to which class they must attend. 1Together with tutorial classes at times to be arranged. 2Tutorial, drawing office, or laboratory class. All students enrolling for Physics and Chemistry must complete Practical Roll Cards when enrolling at Students' Records Office. sPreliminary classes in Engineering Part I commence on Tuesday. 26 February 1963, at 9 a.m. SFor students taking Pure Mathematics I (Ions.) and Applied Mathematics I (Ions.) in lieu of Engineering Mathematics I (for time tables for Pure and Applied Mathematics see Arts Faculty Handbook).

AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING The degree course in Agricultural Engineering, the only such degree in Australia, began at third year in 1956. As with other engineering degrees it enjoys the recognition of The Institution of Engineers, Australia; i.e., graduates may be admitted to Corporate Membership without further examination. The theme of the course is 'Engineering Applied to Agriculture', in particular to the fieldwork of Agriculture, i.e. basically at farm level and in the design of equipment for use at farm level. Su h a course must introduce a sufficient agricultural background to enable the agriculturalć engineer to see that the applications are different from straight civil or mechanical engineering. As with the other engineering courses at Melbourne, Agricultural Engineering runs for four years, the first and second being the same as for Civil, Industrial, and Mechanical; any student passing second year in one of these three or Electrical may enter Third Year Agricultural. Third year takes in Earth Science, with the Civils, and Agriculture (Engineering course) taken partly with Third Year Agricultural Science; the remainder of Third Year is mainly taken from subjects in Third Year Mechanical. Fourth year offers more agricultural background (Agricultural Economics), a senior course in Design similar to the Fourth Year Mechanicals, and it offers three subjects in Agricultural Engineering. Agricultural Engineering A is devoted to power and machinery; B is buildings—both the functional planning and the structural design; C is a special treatment of soil and water— hydraulics and hydrology. Apart from its being a general engineering education, the degree in Agricultural Engineering leads to interesting and useful employment within this particular field: in the local tractor and farm machinery industry; in irrigation, drainage and water and soil conservation authorities (in all states); in electricity departments; in departments of Agriculture as investigation and advisory officers; as teachers in the colleges of Agriculture; and, for those so gifted, in research in the C.S.I.R.O. and universities (including our own department which runs two or three research projects, including the Tractor Testing Station at Werribee). 31 PROFESSIONAL ASSOCIATIONS (a) The Institution of Engineers Australia: in Third Year students may join as Student Members; (b) Australian Institute of Agricultural Science : students may join as students, or graduates as Members; (c) Agricultural Engineering Society-a non-professional group open to all interested persons. LOCATION OF THE DEPARTMENT By the time this handbook is published, it is expected that the department of Agricultural Engineering will be located on the ground floor, under the Library, to be entered from the road running between the Engineering and Metallurgy schools. Teaching Sta$ Reader in Charge: - G. H. Vasey, B.C.E., A1VI.I.E.Aust. Senior Lecturer: A. K. Turner, B.C.E., I.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. Tractor Testing Officer: Ø. F. Baillie, Dip.Mech.Eng., Dip.Elec.Eng. List of Subjects for Agricultural Engineering Course FIRST YEAR 551 Chemistry (Engineering course) 552 Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 55g 1Physics part II (Engineering course) 561 1Statistics for Engineers 644 Applied Thermodynamics part I 649 Dynamics of Machines part II 567 1Electrical Engineering part IA 556 1Engineering Design part I 560 Engineering Materials 666 Strength of Materials part II THIRD YEAR 62,3 Agricultural Science (Engineering course) 564 Earth Science 646 Applied Thermodynamics part II(A) 65о Dynamics of Machines part III 599 Engineering Design part II(A) 568 Fluid Mechanics A 594 Engineering Mathematics part III(B) 668 Strength of Materials part III(А) FOURTH YEAR 626 Agricultural Engineering A 62,7 Agricultural Engineering B 628 Agricultural Engineering C 625 Agricultural Economics (Engineering course 590 Engineering Design part III (Agr.) 651 Dynamics of Machines part IV 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only.

Second Year—Agricultural Engineering Course SIIBJECT M. Tn. W. Tn. F. S. Uxrтs Engineering Design I 2. 15& 151 1, 2 Applied Thermo- dynamics I 2.15-5.151 Dynamics of 9-10 Machines II . 2.15-5.151 Physics Part II 9-10 Б (Engineering course) 9-10 1 (+Part` of 2) &Engineering 10-11 1, 2 Materials .. 2-51 1, 2 Engineering Mathematics II . 12-11 12-1 12-11 10-11 1, 2

3.4Strength of 12-1 12-1 1, 2 Materials II 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Electrical 11-12 1, 2 Engineering IA 11-12 1 (+Part of 2) 2-51 2 , 'Tutorial, drawing offrce or laboratory class. 2During the year each student will at end 12 laboratory sessions in this subject. aTogether with a tutorial class at a time to be arranged. *During the year each student will attend 9 laboratory sessions In this subject. 5A11 students enrolling for any course in Physics Part II are required to fill in a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students' Records OØce, whether the course includes practical work or not. Third Year—Agricultural Engineering Course 1963 Starting Date: 4 March 1963 SUBJECT M. Tu. Тк. F. S. TEBMs Agricultural Science 9-1о 10-11 1,2,3 (Engineering course) 10-11 11-121 1, 2, 3 Earth Science .. 12-1 1, 2 9-10 2,3 10-11 1, 2, 3 10-11 2.15-5.151 1,2,3 Applied Thermo. dynamics IIA 2-5t.& 9-10 1, 2, 3 Dy/lamies of 10-11 11-12 1, 2 Machines III 2-51 1,2,3 Engineering Design 11-12 1,2,3 2-51.5 1,2,3 Fluid Mechanice A .. 12-1 9-101 1,2,3 2.15-5.15' 1,2,3 Engineering Mathematics IIIB 11-11 5.15-6.15 12-1 1, 2, 3 &Strength of Materials IIIA .. 9-10 1,2,3 1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. &Alternative times. 8Togethec with practical work at a time to be arranged. 33 Fourth Year—Agricultural Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

Tu. W. Ти. F. S. Taais Agricultural 12-1 10-11 9-10 1,2,3 Engineering `A' .. 12 15-5 15 1, 2, 3 Agricultural 9-10 10-11 1,2,3 Engineering `B' 12.16-5.15 1, 2, 3 Agricultural . 9-10 10-11 11-12 1,2,3 Engineering `C' .. 12.15-5.15 1, 2, 3 Engineering Design III (Agriculture) .. 12-5 1, 2 Dynamics of Machines IV 11-12 1,2,3 Agricultural 11-12 1 Economics 12-1 2, 3 (Engineering course)

1Practical work. Drawing office or laboratory.

CHEMICAL ENGINEERING The degree in Chemical Engineering in the University of Melbourne was first conferred in 1952. In January 1gbo, the department of Chemical Engineering came into being. At present the laboratory work of the course is carried out at Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology, by courtesy of the Council of that Institute. The Engineering Faculty has given first priority to the erection of a chemical engineering building. It is stated in the 1861 Annual Report of the Council of the University of Melbourne that 'In the near future we look to the appointment of a professor of chemical engineering who will control the detailed planning of a building on the University site which will be started early in the next triennium.' (i.e. 1964). The American Institute of Chemical. Engineers has defined chemical engineering as follows: Chemical Engineering is that branch of engineering concerned with the development and application of manufacturing processes in which chemical or certain physical changes of materials are involved. These processes may usually be resolved into a co- ordinated series of unit physical operations and chemical processes. The work of the chemical engineer is concerned primarily with the design, construction and operation of equipment and plants in which these unit operations are involved. Chemistry, physics and mathematics are the underlying sciences of chemical engineering, and economics its guide in practice. The unit operations mentioned here are techniques such as distillation, crystallization, evaporation, heat transfer, filtration, drying, crushing and grinding. Chemical processes are so numerous and well known as to need no description here. There is a steady and growing demand for chemical engineers in such fields as oil refining, general chemicals, plastics, the mineral and metallurgical industries, soap and detergent manufacture, food processing and nuclear energy. The course has been devised to enable students to secure an adequate grounding in the basic sciences in the earlier years and in the later years to acquire facility in that fundamental analysis of industrial operations which is required to secure products manufactured to specification with optimal economy and necessary regard for human health and safety. In the First Year course students wishing to proceed to a degree in Chemical Engineering must take Chemistry IB. The Chemical Engineering department gives considerable importance to the establishment of a flourishing research school and promising young graduates are encouraged to proceed to the research degrees of master of Engineering Science and doctor of Philosophy. 34 Teaching staff Reader in Charge: . Owen Edward Potter, M.Sc.App. (Q'ld), M.Sc. (Lind.), Ph.D. ( .), A.M.LChem.E., A.R.A.C.I. Мапс Senior Lecturer: William Reginald Bulmer Martin, M.Sc., A.M.I.Chem.E., A.M.I.Mech.E. Lecturers: Werner Strauss, B.Chem.E., M.Sc., М.Е. (Syd.), Ph.D. (She$.), A.R.A.C.I. John Broughton Agnew, B.E. (Syd.), A.M.I.Chem.E. Assistant Lecturer: Jack Changfoot, M.Sc. (Eng.), Ph.D. (WitwatersrandX Part-time Teaching O{j'icers: Gerard Werner Benkendorff, Ph.D., A.R.A.C.I. Brian Justin Byrne, B.Sc., Ph.D. (Land.), F.R.A.C.I. Robert Selwyn Yost, B.Sc.App. (Tas.), A.R.A.C.I.

List of Subjects for Chemical Engineering STFIR YEAR 353 Chemistry part IA or 420 Chemistry part IB 552, Engineering part I - - 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering Course) , SECOND YEAR 36z Chemistry part IIC 586 Engineering Design part IA 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 560 Engineering Materials 56z Strength of Materials part IIA 614 Chemical Engineering part I . 561 1Statistics for Engineers THIRD YEAR 657 Physical Chemistry 587 1Fluid Mechanics C 567 1Electrical Engineering part IA 566 1Engineering Mathematics part IIIA 658 Process Chemistry 613 Chemical Engineering part II FOURTH YEAR 622 Chemical Engineering part III 624 Design Project 634 Industrial Management part IA Discussion Sessions 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only.

Second Year—Chemical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

SивтЕСт M. Tu. W. Tu. F. S. UNITØ Chemistry IIC 11-12 11-12 2-5.151 11-12 1, 2 12-1 2-5.30 1, 2 Engineering Design IA 2.15-5.151 Part of 1+2 sEngineering 10-11 1, 2 Materials .. 2-51 1, 2 Engineering Mathematics II 12-11 12-1 10-11 1, 2 °Strength of 12-1 1 Materials IIA 12-1 1, 2 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Chemical Engineering I 9-10 9-10 8.45- 10.451,а 1, 2

1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 2At R.M.I.T. Э During the year each student will attend 12 laboratory sessions In this subject. 4 During the year each student will attend 9 laboratory sessions in this subject.

Third Year—Chemical Engineering Course 1963 Starting Date: 4 March 1963

Sпвтгет M. Tu. W. Тн. TERMS Physical Chemistry 2_51 2-51 2-51 2_51 1 12-1 10-11 1, 2, 3 Fluid Mechanics `C' .. 12-1 11-12 9-101 1, 2 2-51 1, 2 Electrical 11-12 1, 2, 3 Engineering IA . 1 (+ Part 2) 2-51 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics IIIA 12-1 1, 2, 3 Process Chemistry . 10-11 1,2,3 1 2, 3 Chemical Engineering 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 1, 2, З II .. .. 10-51 10-111 2, 3

1Tutorial, drawing otTice or laboratory class.

36 Fourth Year—Chemical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1863

SцвтЕет M. Tu. w. , Ти. F. TERMS Chemical 9-51 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-10 1, 2, 3 Engineering III . 10-121 10-121 1,2,3 12-1 12-1 12-1 12-1 , 1, 2, 3 2-5,a 1, 2, 3 Design Project 10-11 2-51 1, 2, 3 Industrial Management IA .. 5.15-6.15 5.15-6.15 1, 2, 3 Discussion Sessione .. 3-5 1,2 Statistics for Engineers . 2.15-4.151 2, З

1Tutorial, drawing like or laboratory class. CIVIL ENGINEERING , A school of Civil Engineering was set up in November 1860 and classes commenced in 1861: At first a certificate of Engineering was awarded, but in 1882 a chair of Engineering was established, and a degree course in Civil Engineering was introduced in 1883. This course was amended in 1893 to form the first B.C.E. course in which the foundations of today's curriculum can be traced. The teaching of Civil Engineering continued to be administered within the single department of Engineering until 1947, when the first chair of Civil Engineering was established and the first professor (Dr J. A. L. Matheson) appointed. , Civil Engineering teaching now includes both the undergraduate course of B.E. (Civil) and the graduate (M.Eng.Sc.) courses. The latter courses (in Structures, Soils and Hydraulics) began in 1gбo. At present between forty and fifty civil engineers graduate with the degree of B.E. ' (Civil) each year. There are between ten and twenty research students reading for the research degrees of M.Eng.Sc. and Ph.D. THE В.Е. (CIVIL) COURSE The first two years of this course have much in common with the Mechanical, Industrial, Electrical, Mining and Agricultural Engineering courses, the aims being to provide fundamental training in the basic sciences of Physics, Mathematics and Chemistry and in the elements of the structure and mechanics of materials, Thermodynamics, Dynamics of . Machines, Statistics, Electrical Engineering, and Engineering Design. The third and fourth years of the course are concerned mainly with the Theory and Design of Structures, Soil Mechanics, Fluid Mechanics, Hydraulics and Surveying. Mathe- maties and the writing of English are taken in third year while in fourth year lvlathe- maties is again available as an elective. A large part of the fourth year is devoted to structural and hydraulic design projects and selected research projects on which individual theses are submitted. A course in Town Planning is also given. ' Non-technical activities in fourth year include a course in Industrial Administration (elective), Discus ion Groups, Law and Economics lectures and three alternative short courses in Appreciation of Art, Music and Practice in Painting. Accepted B.E. (Civil) graduates may study for the higher degrees of M.Eng.Sc. and Ph.D. by study and research within the Department. For further details see University Calendar. THE M.ENG.SC. (CIVIL) COURSE In 196о full-time graduate courses leading to the degree of M.Eпg.Sc. were introduced in the department of Civil Engineering. The courses : Structural Engineering,. .Soil Engineer- ing and Hydraulics Engineering, extend over twelve months, about half an academic year being devoted to formal teaching and the remaining time to a selected research project. It is also possible to proceed to the M.Eng.Sc. degree by full-time research work on a selected project. 37 THE CIVIL ENGINEERING LABORATORIES These consist, of the following i 1.. Metals Testing Laboratory (Melbourne) z. Concrete Laboratories (Melbourne and Syndal) 3. Soil Mechanics Laboratories (Melbourne and Syndal) 4. Structures Laboratory (Syndal) 5. Hydraulic Laboratory (Melbourne) The departmental laboratories are not all located at Melbourne. Owing to shortage of space it has been found necessary to expand to an external site at Syndal about twelve miles east of Melbourne. A Soil Mechanics Laboratory has been operating for some years in collaboration with the C.S.I.R.O. Division of Soil Mechanics at Syndal and recently a Structural Testing Laboratory 7,goо square feet in area has been built nearby. Part of the latter area will be available for research and testing in the field of concrete structures. The Hydraulics Laboratory (9,000 square feet in area) was recently completed and large scale research and testing in this field will now be possible. These laboratories cover a total area of 22,000 square feet and contain much costly and specialized equipment with ancillary workshop and maintenance facilities. They are available for teaching, research and testing, and provide a valuable service to industry and state bodies when special testing and investigations are required. RECOGNITION The B.E. (Civil) degree at Melbourne is recognized by The Institution of Engineers, Australia The Institution of Civil Engineers, London The Institution of Structural Engineers (England) The American Society of Civil Engineers (U.S.A.) The Board of Examiners for Engineers of Water Supply, Victoria The Board of Examiners for Municipal Engineers, Victoria and carries exemptions from all or part of the written examinations of these bodies.

Teaching staff Professor of Civil Engineering: . A. J. Francis, M.Sc., Ph.D. (Birm.), M.C.E., M.I.C.E., M.I.Struct.E., M.I.E.Aust. Readers: D. H. Trollope; M.Sc. (Wales), Ph.D., A.M.I.E.Aust., M.A.S.C.E., A.M.I.H.E. L. K. Stevens, Ph.D. (Cantab.), B.C.E., M.Eng.Sc., A.M.I.C.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. Senior Lecturers: r. V. Wood, . . ., Dip.C.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. F. Laszlo, D.Ing.В С (Darmstadt),Е M.C.E., Dip.Ing. (Budapest). I. D. Lawson, B.E. (W.A.), Ph.D. (Aberdeen), A.M.I.E.Aust. B. B. Sharp, М.Е. (Adel.), F.S.A.S.M., A.M.I.E.Aust. D. H. Clyde, ]}.Sc. (Eng.) (Rand.), Ph.D. (Cantab.), A.M.S.A.I.C.E. I. K. Lee, Ph.D., M.Eng.Sc:, B.C.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. Lecturers: S. Aroni, B.C.E., A.M.I.E.Aust.. I. C. O'Neill, M.Eng.Sc., B.C.E., Dip.C.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. D. S. Mansell, Ph.D. (Wales), M.Eng.Sc. Temporary Assistant Lecturer: W. L. Grigg, B.C.E. Part-time Teaching Officers: Lecturer in Roads and Streets: F. West, B.C.E., M.I.E.Aust., C.E. Lecturer in Engineering Practices: J. S. Henzell, B.E. (W.A.), В.Sс. (Eng.) (Lond.), A.M.I.C.E., M.I.E.Aust. Lecturer in Soil Mechanics: G. D. Aitchison, М.Е. (Adel.), Ph.D., A.M.I.E.Aust. 38 List of Subjects for Civil Engineering Course FIRST YEAR 551 Chemistry (Engineering course) 552 Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 556 'Engineering Design part I 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 644 Applied Thermodynamics part I 649 Dynamics of Machines part II 559 'Physics part II (Engineering course) 560 Engineering Materials 561 'Statistics for Engineers 666 Strength of Materials part II 567 'Electrical Engineering part IA THIRD YEAR 564 Earth Science 565 Engineering Design A 566 'Engineering Mathematics part IIIA 568 Fluid Mechanics A 563 Surveying part I FOURTH YEAR 57o Civil Engineering 571 'Town Planning together with any one of the following subjects: 57z Geology part II (Mining course) 573 2Еnglvering Mathematics part IV aзa Industrial Administration 1 The examination in these subjects will be for pass only. 2 Subject to approval of previous mathematical performance. Students who wish to take Engineering lathe. maties part IV must have taken Engineering Mathematics part III in their Third Year.

List of Subjects for Block Exemption Course THIRD YEAR 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 559 Physics part II (Eng. course) 564 'Earth Science 565 Engineering Design A 566 Engineering Mathematics part IIIA 568 Fluid Mechanics A 56о Engineering Materials FOURTH YEAR (As for standard course)

1 Students are required to take only section C of Earth Science, but are advised to attend lectures of section В.

39 Second Year—Civil Engineering, Course Starting Date : 4 March 1963

SuВJЕcT М. Tu. W. TI. F. S. UNITB Engineering Design I 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Applied Thermo- dynamics I . 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Dynamics of 9-10 1, 2 Machines II . 2.15-5.151 1, 2 sPhyвicв II 9-10 1, 2 (Engineering course) 9-10 1 (+Part of 2) $Engineering 10-11 10-11 1, 2 Materials .. 2-51 1,2 Engineering Mathematics II . .. 12-11 12-1 12-11 10-11 s"Strength of 12-1 12-1 Materials II 2.15-5.151 Electrical Engineering IA 1 (±Part of 2) 2-61 2 1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 2During the year each student will attend 12 laboratory sessions in this subject. 5Together with a tutorial class at a time to be arranged. 4 During the year each student will attend 9 laboratory sessions in this subject. 5 A11 students enrolling for any course in Physics Part IL are required to fill in a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students' Records Othce, whether the course includes practical work or not. Third Year—Civil Engineering Course 1963 Starting Date: 4 March 1963

SIIBJECT M. Tu. W. Tu. F. S. ТEвмв Earth Science 10-11 1, 2 9-10 2, 3 10-11 1, 2, 3 2.15-5.151 2.15-3.15 2, 3 3.15-5.151 2, З Engineering 11-12 2 Design A' 9-111 1, 2, 3 12-1 1, 2, 3 2.15-3.15 1,2,3 3.15-6.151 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics IIIA 12-1 1, 2, 3 Fluid Mechanics 'A' .. 9-101 1,2, 3 12-1. 1, 2, 3 2:15-5.151 1, 2, 3 2.15-5.151 3 Surveying I .. 11-12 9-10 1,2,3 2.1Ø.151 2.15-5.151 1,2,3 [Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. Third Year-Civil Engineering (Block Exemption) Course 1963 Starting Date: 4 March 1963

Tu. W. Тн. ТEкмв Earth Science 11-121 1,2 10-11 2,3 2.15-5.161 1 2.15-3.15 2, 3 3.15-5.151 2,3 Engineering Design 'A' 11-12 2 10-121 1, 2, 3 12-1 1, 2, 3 2.1б-3.151 1,2,3 3.16-6.151 1, 2, 3

Engineering Materials 10-11 1, 2, 3` 2-51 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics II б.15-8.151 12-1 5.15-6.151 10-11 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics IIIA 12-1 1,2,3

Fluid Mechanics `A' .. 12-1 0-101 1, 2, 3 2.16-5.151 1, 2, 3 Physics II 9-10 1, 2, 3 (Engineering course) 9-10 1, 2

1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. Fourth Year-Civil Engineering Course Starting Date : 4 March 1963 SIIBJECT M. Tu. W. Тн. F. S. TERMS Civil Engineering .. 9-10 10-11 9-10 10-11 9-10 1,2,3 10-11 11-12 10-11 11-121 11-12 11-12 12-1 110-1 1, 2, 3 22.15-6.15 22.15-5.15 22.15-5.15 1, 2, 3 °Engineering Mathematics IV .. 9-10 1, 2, 3 112-1 112-1 9-10 1, 2, 3 2Geology II 12-1. 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 (Mining course) .. 22-5 2-5

2lnduвtrial Administration 9-10 9-10 1, 2, 3 Town Planning 5.15-6.15 1,2,3 11-12 3

1Tutorial or practice class. 2irawing 00cc or laboratory class. °The following subjects are alternatives:- (a) Engineering Mathematics IV. (b) Geology II (Mining Course). (c) Industrial Administration. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING The degree of Electrical Engineering in the University of Melbourne was first conferred in 1915. Until 1947 the teaching of Electrical Engineering was administered within the single department of Engineering by Associate Professor E. B. Brown. The course was primarily directed towards the traditional heavy current Power subjects. In 1947 a department of Electrical Engineering was formed and the first professor appointed in 1948. The scope of the department was enlarged to include the field of Electronics as well as that of Power. The immediate post-war period was a difficult time for expanding the department facilities and it was not until 1955 that permanent Electronics laboratories could be occupied. In 1959 the establishment of a Control System Laboratory reflected the recognition of this subject as appropriate to a department of Electrical Engineering. These three main groups reflect the department's interests, courses and research activities. The laboratories cover a total area of some iб,00о sq. ft. and have specialized workshop and maintenance facilities with staff for constructing new equipment, together with facilities for instrument calibration. The main undergraduate laboratories are: (a) D.C. Machines (b) A.C. Machines Located in the old Engineering School (c) Circuits and Measurements Building (d) Control Systems (e) Electronics Located on the and floor of the Mining and (f) Radio Frequency Electronics Building together with laboratories for graduate research work and for special equipment such as the large general purpose analogue computer which was purchased by the Faculty in 1962 with a special grant from the Australian Universities Commission. Within the past decade the number of undergraduates in the department has risen steeply until it is now one of the largest departments within the Faculty and there has been a steady increase in the number of graduate research workers. The Electrical Engineering course is basically common with several other courses in the Faculty up to the end of second year. The first and second years lay a foundation of Chemistry, Physics and Mathematics together with subjects in the fields of Mechanical, Civil and Electrical Engineering and of Engineering Materials. The third and fourth years are designed around the core subjects of Electrical Engineer- ing and, for students who show the ability, Mathematics can be taken in both years. In the fourth year, after a first term of common lectures, students have a wide selection of units to prepare them for the basic professional fields of power, electronics, radio and control. Laboratory, thesis and project work in the final year is organized on a flexible basis to satisfy the diverse demands of these fields. Some of the more specialized units available in the final year are given by visiting lecturers who bring up-to-date professional experience to bear on their particular subjects. Integral parts of the later years, though not formally examined, are the courses in the writing of English, the study of modern literature largely conducted by members of the University staff outside the Faculty of Engineering, and the opportunity for final year students to participate in non-technical sessions in which the appreciation of art, music or practice in painting may be chosen. This is made possible by the co-operation of organizations such as the National Gallery, the Conservatorium of Music and the R.M.I.T. Art School. After obtaining the bachelor's degree, suitably qualified students may proceed to the higher degrees of M.Eng.Sc. and Ph.D. within the department by engaging in research in the field of Power, Electronics or Control. The Electrical course is recognized by The Institution of Engineers, Australia, The Institution of Electrical Engineers, London and the Institution of Radio Engineers (Australia), so that possession of the degree exempts students wishing to join any of these from further examination. Students are recommended to apply for student membership of at least one of these institutions during their courses. Teaching Staff Professor of Electrical Engineering: C. E. Moorhouse, D.Eng., M.I.E.Aust., Mem.A.I.E.E., M.I.E.E., F.A.C.E. Reader in Electronics: A. E. Ferguson, M.E.E., A.M,1,E.Аust., A.M.I.E.E., S.M.I.R.E.Aust. 42 Senior Lecturers:. T. Brownleе, В.Sc. (Elec.Eng.) (Glas.), M.E.E.; A.M.I.E.E. E. . King-Smith, B.E.E., M.Eng.Sc., A.M.I.E.Aust. • J. C.А McCutchan, B.E.E., M.Eng.Sc., A.M.I.E.E., A.M.I.E.Aust., Lecturers: D. E. Hooper, M.E., Grad.I.E.E., A.M.I.R.E.Aust. W. L Bonwick, M.E., A.M.I.E.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. D. F. Hewitt, B.Sc., A,M.I.R.E.Aust.

Lecturer in Power System Analysis: • D. P. Davies, M.Sc. (Rangoon), M.I.E.E., A.M.I.Mech.E., M.I.E.Aust. Part-time Teaching O6ićers: Lecturer in English: H. Dow, A.B. (Harv.) Lecturer in Illumination and Photometry: j. C. Lowson, B.E. (Q'land), A.М.I.E.E., F.I.E.S. (Lind.), F.I.E.S.Aust. Lecturer in Radio Communication: J. F. Ward, B.A., В.Sc., D.I.C., Ph.D. (Lind.), M.I.E.E., A.M.I.E,Aust. Lecturer in Acoustics: W. Lippert, D.Rer.Nat. (Berlin), M.D.Ph.G. List of Subjects for Electrical Engineering Course (Matriculation entry) FIRST YEAR 551 Chemistry (Engineering course) 552 Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 560 Engineering Materials 561 'Statistics for Engineers 556 'Engineering Design part I 644 Applied Thermodynamics part I 649 Dynamics of. Machines part II 559 $Physics part II (Engineering course) 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 562 Strength of Materials part IIA 596 Electrical Engineering part I THIRD YEAR 598 Electrical Engineering part II 656. Electrical Engineering Design 585 . $Engineering Mathematics part III or 566 'Engineering Mathematics part IIIA and boo Engineering Practices 646 'Applied Thermodynamics part IIA 560 *Engineering Materials 561 'Statistics for Engineers 587. Fluid Mechanics C FOURTH YEAR Discussion Sessions 6о2 Electrical Engineering part III Candidates for pass will be required to take either (a) a a Industrial Administration or (b) 58gз Industrial Management part I 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only. a For students wishing totoceed to bachelor of Science degree, credit is given for the practical work in Electrical Engineering parts [and II, which for this purpose is regarded as equivalent to two units of Physics part II laboratory work. a Subject to approval of previous mathematical performance. 'For 193 only. 43

Candidates for honours will be required to take (a) 573 Engineering Mathematics part IV or (b) 589 Industrial Management part I . together with two units of 39г Physics part IV or one additional unit of 6o2 Electrical Engineering part III or (c) aзa Industrial Administration together with two units of 3gz Physics part III or one additional unit of бог Electrical Engineering part III

List of Subjects for Block Exemption Course (Technical College Diploma entry) . THIRD YEAR . 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 559 « Physics part II (Engineering course) boo Engineering Practices and 566 Engineering Mathematics part IIIA or 585 Engineering Mathematics part IIIt 656 Electrical Engineering Design . 587 Fluid Mechanics C 598 Electrical Engineering part II (Electronics only) 561 Statistics for Engineers FOURTH YEAR course as for ordinary course. t Subject to approval of previous mathematical performance.

Second Year—Electrical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

SUBJECT M. TU. W. Тн. F. S. UNITB Engineering Design I 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Applied Thermo- dynamics I 2.15-6.151 1, 2 Dynamics of 9-10 1, 2 Machines II 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Physics II . 9-10 1, 2 (Engineering course) 9-10 1 (+Paæt of 2) Engineering Mathematics II .. 12-1 ' 10-11 1, 2 ''Strength of 12-1 Materials IIA 12-1 2.15-5.151 Electrical Engineering I 2-5 1, 2 Engineering Materials 10-11 1, 2 1, 2

I Tutorial, drawing ofilce or laboratory class. 2Together with a tutorial class at a time to be arranged. 3During the year each student will attend 9 laboratory sessions in this subject. • All students enrolling for any course in Physics Part II are required to tIil in a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students' Records Office, whether the course includes practical work or not.

44 Third Year—Electrical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

TERMS SuвaEст M. Tu. W. Tn. F. S. Electrical 9-101 9-101 10-11 11-12 1, 2, 3 Engineering II .. 2.15-5.15$ 11-12 1, 2, 3 1, 2 3 1, 2, 3 Electrical Engineering 10-11 2.15- 1,2,3 Design .. .. 5.152,2 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics III .. 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 Engineering 12-1 1, 2, 3 Mathematics IIIA Engineering Practices 9-10 1,2, 3 5.15-6.15 2, 3

Applied Thermo- 9-10 9-101 1, 2, 3 . dynamics IIA Engineering Materials 10-11 10-11 1, 2, 3 2.15- 5.152.8 1, 2, 3 Statistics for Engineers 2.15-4.151 11-12 3,, 3 Fluid Mechanics ' C' .. 12-1 11-12 2.15-5.152 10-111 1, 2

1 Practice class or tutorial, 2 Practical work. Laboratory or drawing office class. sPractical class on alternate weeks, 4Pгаcticе class on alternate weeks.

Third Year-Electrical Engineering (Bloch Exemption) Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

SuBJECT M. Tu. W. Tu. Electrical 2.15-6.158 11-12 11-12 1, 2,3 Engineering ц 1, 2 (Electronics only).. 3 • Electrical Engineering 10-11 Design .. .. 2.15-5.158 1, 2,3 Engineering . .. 12-1 10-11 1, 2, 3 Mathematics II .. 6.15-6.151 5.15-6.151 1,2,3 Engineering 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 Mathematics 0 .. Engineering Mathematics IIIA 11-1ьв 12-1 1, 2, 3 Engineering 11-11,8 9-10 1,2, 3 Practices . 5.15-6.15 2, 3 Fluid Mechanics ' C' ... 11-12 2.15-5.158

'Physics 9-10 (Engineeringц course) Statistics for Engineers . . 2.154.151 11-12 2, 3

1Practical class or tutorial. 2 t work. Drawing offi or laboratory class. SPracticeРґас ісаІ class on alternate weeks.се 4Á11 students enrolling for any course of Physics Part II are required to fill in a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students' Records Office, whether their course involves practical work or not. Fourth Year-Electrical Engineering Course Starting Date : 4 March 1963 Suктвст M. Tu. W. Tu. S. Тнкма 'Electrical. 9-10 2, 3 Engineering III 10-11 10-11 10-11 1, 2, 3 11-12 . 11-12 1, 2, 3 12-1 89-5 1, 2, 3 2-3 1, 2, 3 2-3 3

Diвcuяaion Seввionв .. 3-5 .. 1, 2 BEngineeтing 9-10 9-10 1, 2, 3 Mathematics IV .. 112-1 12-11 1, 2, 3 Industrial Management 6.15-6.15 5.15-6.15 1, 2, 3 Industrial Administration 9-10 9-10 1, 2,3 1Tutorial or practice class. 'LabOratOry or drawing office class. sSee details of electrical course for alternative combinations of subjects available to Pass and иonoura students. 4 Unit scheme. Some of the lecture times shown are alternative. 46 INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING 'Industrial engineering is the application of engineering methods and the principles of scientific management to production. It is concerned with the design, improvement and installation of integrated systems of men, materials and equipment. It draws upon specialised knowledge and skills in the mathematical, physical and social sciences, together with the principles and methods of engineering analysis and design to specify, predict, and evaluate the results to be obtained from such systems.'—American Institute of Industrial Engineers. Industrial Engineering is the application of basic scientific and engineering knowledge and certain analytical techniques to the methods of operating an organisation in industry and other appropriate fields. It requires investigation into the economic advantages of one policy as against another and implementation of the most suitable procedure for raising productive efficiency. To achieve this end, performance and costs need to be checked constantly. 'Industrial Engineering is concerned with decisions on what to produce, the design of the product, standardisation, the influence of cost analysis on methods of production, the investigation of these methods, planning and control of production, calculation of what is the most efficient machinery for the job, layout of plant and handling of materials, design of tools, maintenance of plant, time study, motion study, incentives, method of calculation of wages, suggestion schemes and industrial relations.'—Industrial Engineering, Anglo-American Council on Productivity, 1953• Industrial Engineering has been for many years a fully accredited undergraduate degree course at about forty universities in the U.S.A. The Industrial Engineering degree course at the University of Melbourne is of fairly recent origin, the first graduates receiving their degrees in 196о. The Industrial Engineering degree course has been designed to provide the basic academic training required for an Industrial Engineer. Because of the importance of the mathematical and physical sciences, the first two years are identical with the established course in Mechanical Engineering. In the Third and Fourth years of the course, the fundamental mathematical, physical and social sciences are further developed and applied to the study of Product Design, Plant Layout, Metal Cutting, Metal Forming, Metrology, Industrial Electronics, Operational Research, Work Study, Industrial Management, Automatic Control, etc. PROFESSIONAL RECOGNITION Graduates from the degree course in Industrial Engineering at the University of Mel- bourne are granted full exemption from the examination requirements of The Institution of Mechanical Engineers, London, for acceptance as Chartered Mechanical Engineers, hence the Industrial Engineer achieves the dual recognition as an Industrial Engineer and also as a Chartered Mechanical Engineer, subject to the necessary experience. The Melbourne degree in Industrial Engineering exempts from the full examination requirements of the Institution of Engineers, Australia. THE IMPORTANCE OF INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERS TO AUSTRALIA The great challenge for Australia today is for greater productivity in primary and secondary industry, if we are to lower our costs, develop our country and our exports, with an improved standard of living for all Australia needs many industrial Engineers to assist in this development.

Teaching Staff See Department of Mechanical Engineering. List of Subjects for Industrial Engineering Course FIRST YEAR 551 Chemistry (Engineering course) 552 Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 556 1Eпgineering Design part I 644 Applied Thermodynamics part I 649 Dynamics of Machines part II 559 1Physics part II (Engineering course) 47 596 Electrical Engineering part 1 56о Engineering Materials 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 666 Strength of Materials part II THIRD YEAR 65о Dynamics of Machines part III 599 Engineering Design part II(A) 566 'Engineering Mathematics partIilA 583 Industrial Electronics and Control бзо Industrial Engineering part I 6;1 Industrial Management part I 592 'Properties of Metals 463 'Statistical Techniques 667 Strength' of Materials part III FOURTH YEAR 648 2Automatic Control* 651 2Dynamics of Machines part IV 653 2Engineering Design part III (Industrial course) 63т 2lndustrial Engineering part II 660 Industrial Engineering Laboratory 661 Industrial Engineering Project б33 2lndustrial Management part II 20perational Research 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only. 2 Honours are not awarded for these individual subjects, as they belong to a group of subjects for which Final Honours are awarded. * With the approval of the Head of Department the subject Data Processing and Computers may be taken as an alternative to this subject. List of Subjects for Block Exemption Course (Technical College Diploma Entry) THIRD YEAR 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 650 Dynamics of Machines part III 599 Engineering Design part IIA 566 Engineering Mathematics part IIIA 583 Industrial Electronics and Control бзо Industrial Engineering part I б31 Industrial Management part I 463 Statistical Techniques 667 Strength of Materials part III 592 Properties of Metals FOURTH YEAR course as for ordinary course

48 Second Year-Industrial Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963 . SUBJECт : M. Tu. W. Тн F. S. UNITS Engineering Design I 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Applied Thermo- dynamics I . 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Dynamics of 9-10 1 Machines II 2.15-5.151

вPhyeice II 9-10 1, 2 (Engineering course) 9-10 2Part 1 f 2) aEngineering 10-11 10-11 1, 2 Materials .. 2-51 1, 2 Engineering Mathematics II .. 12-1 12-11 10-11 1, 2 a'4Strength of 12-1 12-1 1, 2 Materials II 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Electrical Engineering I .. 11-12 2-51 11-12 1,2 1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 'During the year each student will attend 12 laboratory sessions in this subject. ЭTogether with a tutorial class at a time to be arranged. 4 During the year each student will attend 9 laboratory sessions in this subject. 5 11 students enrolling for any course in Physics Part 11 are required to fill in a Practical Roll CardА when enrolling at Students' Records Office, whether the course includes practical work or not. Third Year-Industrial Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963 SUBJECT M. Tu. W. Тн. S. TERMS Dynamics of .. 1, 2 Machines III .. 10-11 2-5a 1, 2, 3 Engineering Design 11-121 1, 2, 3 IIA 2-5a 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics IIIA 12-1 Industrial Electronics 9-10 9-10 and Control .. 2-5а Industrial _52 Engineering I 2 12-1 1, 2, 3 Industrial Management I 5.15-6.15 Properties of Metals .. 9-10

Statistical Techniques 4.15-6.15 1, 2, 3 Strength of 10-11 10-11 1, 2, 3 Materials III .. 1, 2, 3 1Tutorial. •2Practical work. Drawing office or laboratory class. 49 Third Year—Industrial Engineering (Block Exemption) Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963 S M. ивтнет Tu. W. Tu. F. S. Т1лмв Dynamics of 11-12 1, 2 Machines III 2-59 1, 2,3 Engineering 1, 2,3 Design IIA 2-58 1, 2, 3 Engineering 12-1 1,2,3 Mathematics IIIA Industrial Electronics 9-10 9-10 1, 2,3 and Control .. 2-58 1, 2,3 Induвtrial Engineering I 25 12-1 1,2,3 Industrial Management I 5.15-6.15 5.15-6.15 1, 2, 3 Properties of Metals 9-10 1,2,3 2-5s 1, 2 Statistical Techniques 4.15-6.15 1, 2, 3 Strength of 10-11 10-11 1, 2, 3 Materials III 11-121 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics II 5.15-6.151 12-1 5.15-6.151 10-11 1,2,3 1Practice class or tutorial -Practical work. Drawing ofce or laboratory class. Fourth Year—Industrial Engineering Course Starting Date : 4 March 1g6 з Suвгкст M. Tu. W. TERMS Induвtrial Management II .. 9-10 9-10 1, 2, 3 Industrial 10-11 1,2,3 Engineering II 11-12 1, 2, 3 124 1,2,3

Operational Research 4-б 4-Б 1, 2, 3 б-6 5-6 1, 2, 3 Industrial Engineering Laboratory .. 1, 2 Dynamics of Machines IV 10-11 10-11 1, 2. 3 Automatic Control 12-1 12-1 1,2,3 Data Processing and Computers .. 4.15-6.15 Engineering Design III (Industrial course) 11-4 2, 3 Ind strial Engineering Projectп .. .. 'TutOri,! class. Drawing oIlce ог laboratory class. 50 MECHANICAL ENGINEERING Mechanical Engineering is concerned with a wide range of engineering activities covering power generation, transportation and many aspects of the manufacturing industries. The mechanical engineer originated in the early part of the last century, with the important development of the steam engine and steam locomotion. Mechanical Engineering became known as a separate branch of Engineering with the foundation of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers in London in 1847, the first President being George Stephenson. _ . The specialized fields of Mechanical Engineering are: (a) Power: steam, water and gas turbines; internal combustion engines; rockets and jet propulsion; nuclear engineering; solar energy, etc. (b) Heating, ventilating and air conditioning; combustion; and refrigeration; etc. (c) Transport: railways, automobiles and aircraft. (d) Industry: machine tools, machine design, transfer machines, automation equipment, earth moving equipment, mechanical handling, etc. Because the realm of Mechanical Engineering is so extensive and because it is the centre from which many new engineering developments proceed, training must be broad and basic, providing a thorough grounding in the fundamental studies of mathematics, physics, chemistry, together with courses in thermodynamics, dynamics of machines, fluid ' mechanics, statistics, electrical engineering, and industrial electronics. In the final year, a student may select subjects from applied thermodynamics, engineering mathematics, automatic control, fluid mechanics, industrial engineering, industrial management, dynamics of machines and strength of materials: In 1963 the Mechanical Engineering department will be accommodated in a new five storey building equipped with special laboratories for automatic control, stress. analysis. metal cutting, mechanisms, applied thermodynamics, including work on solar energy, and other new developments such as hovercraft and radio-active tracer techniques. The department also has a large wind tunnel, and a smaller supersonic tunnel.. After obtaining the bachelor's degree, adequate facilities exist for students to proceed by research to the higher degrees of М.Eng.Sc. and Ph.D. The bachelor's degree in Mechanical Engineering gives full exemption from the corporate membership examination of the Institution of Engineers, Australia, and parts I and II of the examination of the Institution of Mechanical Engineers, London, these being equivalent to the recognition afforded other universities such as Oxford, Cambridge, Birmingham, etc. Mechanical Engineering graduates are employed in government departments and industries. Opportunities exist in research, development, design, production and manufacturing, leading in many cases to important executive positions. Teaching Staff Professor of Mechanical Engineering: P. L. Henderson, М.Е. (Syd.), Ph.D. (Cantab.), M.Mech.E., M.I.Mech.E., M.I.C.E., M.I.Chem.E., M.I.E.Aust., Barrister-at-Law (Inner Temple, London). Reader: J. Patterson, B.Sc. (Belfast), D.G.S. (Birm.), Ph.D. (Birm.), A,M.LMech.E. Senior Lecturers: N. L. Svensson, M.Mech.E., G.I.Mech.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. C. J. Pengilley, B.E. (N.S.W.), Ph.D. (Birm.), A.M.LE.Aust. P. N. Joubert, В.Е. (Syd.), A.F.R.Ae.S., A.M.I.E.Aust. S. J. Clifton, B.E. (Syd.)

Lecturers: . R. St. C. Pitt, B.Sc., В.Е. (Syd.), A.M.LE.Aust. R. H. Brown, B.Mech.E., S.M. (M.I.T.) T. B. Ritchie, B.Mech.E., Dip.Mech.E., Dip.Ed., A.M.I.E.Aust.. W. Lewis, B.Mech.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. , Lecturer in Industrial Engineering: E. M. Mansoor, B.Mech.E., M.Eng.Sc., A.M.I.E.Aust. ' Assistant Lecturers: R. S. Searls, B.Mech.E., A.M.I.E.Aust. Grad.I.E.Aust. .. А. Rotenberg, Grad.Eng. (Tashkent), E. E. Milkins, B.Mech.E:, Dip.Mech.E., Dip.Elec.E. E. J: Armarego, B,Sc. (Eng.) (Lond.), M.Eng.Sc.; A.B.C.T. W. G. Teague, B.E. (lech.) (Mech.), Grad.LE.Aust., Grad.I.Mech.E. A. Е. Samuel, B.E. I. D. Ingram, B.Mech.E. V. R. Megler, D.Mech.Eng. (Milan) . 51 Drawing О¢iс Supervisor: L. J. Jones, Dip.Mech. and E1ec.Eng. (Q'land) Demonstrator in 'Machine Tools: D. W. Campbell PART-TIME TEACHING OFFICERS Lecturers in Industrial Management: . C. Carroll, LL.B. j.Т Casson, 0.B.E., R.N. H. F. Craig, D.C.S. (Harv.), B.A. (W.A.), F.A.S.A., A.C.I.S., A.C.A,A. R. L. De Garis, A.R.A.C.I. J. D. Doyle, B.Met.E. О. de R. Foenander, LL.M., Litt.D. G. Т. Gardner, B.A., Ph.D. (Lind.), М.А., A.B.Ps.S. E. P. Ke1sa11, Ph.D., В.А. H. T. Rogers, B.Com. I. S. Smith, В.М.Е. H. G. Thomas, A.R.S.M., A.M.A.I.M., F.S.E.S.A. E. D. Тидот, B.E. P. L. Waller, B.C.L. (Oxon.), М.А. W. H. Weekes, B.Com., A.C.A.A., A.C.1.S., A.A.S.A.

List of Subjects for Mechanical Engineering Course FIRST YEAR 551 Chemistry (Engineering course) 552 Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 644 Applied Thermodynamics part I 649 Dynamics of Machines part II 596 Electrical Engineering part I 556 1Engineering Design part I 560 Engineering Materials 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 559 1hhysics part II (Engineering course) 666 Strength of Materials part II THIRD YEAR 645 Applied Thermodynamics part II 65o Dynamics of Machines part III 584 Engineering Design part II (Mechanical) 585 Engineering Mathematics part III or 566 1Engineering Mathematics part IIIA and Introduction to Operational Research 654 Fluid Mechanics part I 583 Industrial Electronics and Control • 592 1Properties of Metals 667 Strength of Materials part III FOURTH YEAR 65z Engineering Design part III (Mechanical) 663 Mechanical Engineering Laboratory 664 Mechanical Engineering Project—together with six of the following subjects: 647 Applied Thermodynamics part III 648 Automatic Control 651 Dynamics of Machines part IV 573 Engineering Mathematics part IV* 655 Fluid Mechanics part II 659 Industrial Engineering (M) 631 Industňal Management part I 593 Strength of Materials part IV 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only. * N.B. Students desirous of doing Engineering Mathematics part IV in the Fourth Year should consult the Professor of Mechanical Еngiпeeтiпg, 5г

List of Subjects for Block Exemption Course (Technical College Diploma Entry) THIRD YEAR 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 581 Industrial Electronics and Control 584 Engineering Design part II (Mechanical) 654 Fluid Mechanics part I 667 Strength of Materials part III 566 Engineering Mathematics part IIIA 65o Dynamics of Machines part III 645 Applied Thermodynamics part II 591 Properties of Metals FOURTH YEAR course as for ordinary course

Second Year—Mechanical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963.

Sивтжет M. Tu. W. Tu. F. S цхlтв Engineering Design I 2.15-б.15' 1, 2 Applied Thermo. dynamics I 11-12 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Dynamics of 9-10 1 Machines II 2.15-6.151

5Phyaice II 9-10 1, 2 (Engineering course) 9-10 1 (±Part of 2) aEngineering Materials 10-11 10-11 1, 2 2-51 1, 2 Engineering Mathematics II 12-11 12-1 12-11 10-11 1, 2 aлStrength of . 12-1 12-1 1, 2 Materials II 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Electrical Engineering I. .. 11-12 2-51 11-12 1, 2

1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 'During the year each student will attend 12 laboratory sessions in this subject. 'Together with a tutorial class at a time to be arranged. 4 During the year each student will attend 9 laboratory sessions in this subject. sAll students enrolling for any course in Physics Part II are required to fill in a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students' Records Office, whether the course includes practical work or not..

53 Third Year—Mechanical Engineering Course •- Starting Date: 4 March ig63

S пвткст T'L Tu. Твнмs Applied Thermo- 9-10 1, 2, 3 dynamics II 2-52,2 11-12 2, 3 Dynamics of 10-11 ; 11-12 1, 2 Machines III 2-5вл 1, 2,. 3 Engineering Design II 11-121 1,2,3 (Mechanical) .. 2-51 . 1,2,3 Engineering Mathematics III . 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics IIIA 12-1 1, 2, 3 Fluid Mechanics I 12-1 10-111 1, 2, 3 2-5sø 1, 2, 3 Industrial Electronics 9-10 9-10 1, 2, 3 and Control .. 2-б2 1, 2, 3 Properties of Metals .. 9-10 1, 2, 3 2-б8 * 1, 2, 3 Strength of 10-11 1, 2, 3 Materials III 11-121 1, 2, 3 Introduction to 5.15-6.15 1, 2 Operational Research

1 ut rial class. . 'PracticalТ о work, drawing office or laboratory class. 1Practical classes on alternate weeks. 4 Practical class in Properties of Metals in two weeks out of three. Practical class In Dynamics of Machines Part III one week out of three.

54 Third Year—Mechanical Engineering (Block Exemption) Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

S[гвавет M. Tu. W. F. Твп.мв Engineering 12-1 1, 2, 3 Mathematics II 5.15-0.151 1, 2, 3 Engineering Mathematics IIIA .. 1,2,3 Fluid Mechanice 12-1 11-12 1, 2, 3 Part I .. 2-52.5 9-101 1, 2, 3 Industrial Electronics 9-10 9-10 1, 2, 3 and Control . 2-51 1, 2, 3 Applied Thermo- 9-10 1, 2, 3 2-5"5 . dynamics II 2, 3 Dynamics of 10-11 11-12 1,2 Machines III 2-52 2, 3 Engineering Design II 11-121 1, 2, 3 (Mechanical) 2-5g 1,2,3 Properties of Metals .. 9-10 1, 2, 3 2-5g 1, 2 Strength of 10-11 1, 2, 3 Materials III 11-121 1, 2, 3

1Tutorial class. 2Practical work, drawing office or laboratory class. $Practical classes on alternate weeks.

Fourth Year-Mechanical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March ig6з

SIIBJECT M. Tu. W. F. S. Т>вамв Applied Thermo- dynamics III 10-11 1,2,3 Fluid Mechanice II 11-12 1, 2, 3 Strength of Materials IV 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 Mechanical 9-61 1, 2 Engineering 2-51 1, 2, 3 (Laboratory) 2-51 1 Industrial Engineering 1' .. 10-11 1,2,3 Dynamics of Machines IV 11-12 11-12 1, 2, 3 Automatic Control . . 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 Engineering Design III (Mechanical) .. 251 1, 2 E ani l МесЬEngineeringса Project Industrial Manage- ment I .. 5.15-6.15 5.15-6.15 1,2,3

'Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 2Times to be arranged.

56 METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING The Metallurgy department, in association with the Mining department, provides the major subjects in the Metallurgical Engineering degree course which is a means of entering a professional career in either the primary production of metals, the engineering utilization of metals and alloys, or research and developmental projects in metal production, fabrica- tian and application. For many years the Australian demand for graduates in Metallurgical Engineering has exceeded the supply, and there is ample evidence that this situation is likely to continue for an extended period, especially in view of the rapidly growing importance of metals in regard to the nation's industrial development and future prospects for export markets. In 1882 studies in Metallurgy as associated with Mining were introduced as part of an option in the fourth year of the newly created degree course in Civil Engineering. This arrangement continued until 19o1 when the Mining Engineering degree course was introduced; from this date until 19гз, Metallurgy was included in the Mining Engineering course. Iń 1924 the Metallurgical Engineering degree course was introduced and the first chair in Metallurgy in an Australian university was established. The course has been in existence continuously since 1914. The Baillieu Laboratory, a post-graduate section of the Metallurgy school, was established in 1946. In the same year the Physical Metallurgy section of the C.S.I R.O. was created as an integral part of the Baillieu Laboratory. Since 1952 an Industrial Research Section has been built up in the Metallurgy department, and since 1g55 the Brown Coal Research Laboratory, originally started in the department of Mechanical Engineering, has been associated with the department. The staff of the Metallurgy department comprises twelve full-time teaching officers and eight full-time research officers. In addition there are five full-time members of C.S.I.R.O. in the Baillieu Laboratory. The department's laboratories and offices are in a separate building adjacent to the Engineering school. The teaching and research activities of the department are classified under two main headings of Materials Science and Materials Processing. There are, of course, numerous instances where overlap occurs, and this ensures coherence in the department's contribu- - tions to the work of not only the Engineering Faculty, but also the Faculties of Science, Applied Science, Dental Science, and Architecture. Both the undergraduate and post-graduate activities in Materials Science include a treatment of non-metallic substances along with the study of metals and alloys. In this way both the students and the staff gain a deeper understanding of metals while at the same time acquiring breadth in their appreciation of other materials such as ceramics, furnace linings, and plastics. Emphasis is placed on the importance of interatomic bond type and crystal structure as affecting the physical and mechanical properties of all materials, with particular reference to metals and composite materials which incorporate metals. In the field of Materials Processing the Metallurgy department deals with chemical processes such as roasting, smelting, electrolytic extraction and refining, ion exchange systems, and distillation methods. The physical operations of crushing, grinding and mineral separations are studied in the Mining department. The chemical or extraction metallurgy section of the Metallurgy department's work ' includes both the physical chemistry of processes and the chemical engineering aspects of the commercial production of metals. The Metallurgical Engineering degree course lays emphasis on mathematics and basic scientific studies in the first two years. During the third and fourth years the emphasis shifts towards the applications of scientific principles and the examination of the main technological features of materials and their processing. The Metallurgy department also offers major subjects in Metallurgy courses conducted under the auspices of the Faculties of Science and Applied Science. Post-graduate studies, with emphasis on experimental research, are features of the department's activities. Graduate students may be enrolled as candidates for the degrees of master of Engineering Science, master of Science, or doctor of Philosophy. Persons with considerable experience in metallurgical research and development may present as candidates for the more senior degrees of master of Engineering, doctor of Science or doctor of Engineering. The Metallurgical Engineering course is recognized by The Australasian Institute of Mining and Metallurgy, and The Institution of Engineers, Australia. It also has appreciable standing in connection with the professional requirements for membership of The Institu- tioп of Metallurgists, London. 57 Teaching Sta¢ . Professor of М tallurgy: H. W. Wirier, D.Sc., F.I.M.; M.Aus.I.M.M., F.R.A.C.I.. Reader in Chemical Metallurgy: G. M. Willis, M.Sc., A.М:Aus.I.M.M., A.R.A.C.I.. A.I.M. Reader in Metal Physics: W. A. Wood, D.Sc. (Mane.); M.Sc., F.Inst.P. Senior Lecturer in Metallurgical Engineering: K. J. Cannon, B.E. (Syd.), Ph.D. (Cantab.), A.M.I.Chem.E., A.M.Aus.I.M.M. Senior Lecturer in Mechanical Metallurgy: J. S. Hoggart, B.Met.B. Senior Lecturer in Engineering Materials: C. I. Osborn, Ph.D. (Lehigh), B.Меt.E. Senior Lecturer in Physical Metallurgy: . Vacant Senior Lecturer in Metallurgical Analysis: B. D. Guerin, M.Sc., A.R.A.C.I., A.M.Aus.I.M.M. Lecturer in Metallography: D. W. Borland, B.Met.E. Assistant Lecturer in Chemical Metallurgy: C. A. Angell, Ph.D. (Lind.), D.I.C., М.Sc. Senior Demonstrator in Physical Metallurgy: P. F. Thomson, М.Епg.Ѕc. Assistant Lecturer in Engineering Materials: Sophia Maj, Grad.I.E.Aust., Dip.Eng. (Warsaw) PART-TIME TEACHING OFFICERS Lecturers: R. C. Gifkins, B.Sc. (Lind.), D.Sc., F.I.M. : W. Suite'', Ph.D. D.Т R. Miller, Ph.D. (Cantab. and leib.) Demonstrators: H. F. Ryan, .S . J. A. Corbett,В A.M.Aus.I.M.M.с List of Subjects for Metallurgical Engineering Course FIRST YEAR 420 Chemistry part IB 55z Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 604 3Geology part I (Metallurgy) or 557 Engineering Mathematics part II 6o5 1Metallurgical Chemistry 606 Metallurgical Engineering part I 607 Metallurgy part I 55g Physics part II (Engineering course) 561 'Statistics for Engineers THIRD YEAR 608 Metallurgy part IIE 556 1Engiпeeтing Design part I . 60g Metallurgical Engineering part II , . 587 1Fluid Mechanics C 567 'Electrical Engineering part IA 58

FOURTH YEAR 611 'Metallurgy part III бlz 'Metallurgical Engineering part IП бzz 1Chemical Engineering part III (g) 581 Mineral Industry Management or 631 Industrial Management I 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for Hass only. 2 Honours are not awarded for these individual subjects, as . they belong to a group of subjects for which Final Honours are awarded. a The selection must be approved by the head of the department of Metallurgy. List of Subjects for Block Exemption Course THIRD YEAR 587 Fluid Mechanics C 608 Metallurgy part II (E)* 6о5 . Metallurgical Chemistry 606 Metallurgical Engineering part I (Part only) 609 Metallurgical Engineeringart I 559 Physics part II (Eng. course) YEAR (as for standard course) * Exemption from part of the work: may be given in this subject. This applies particularly to candidates from Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology.

Second Year--Metallurgical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

SűBJECT M . Tu. W. ' Tn. F S. UniTs *Geology I .. 12-1 11-12 11-12 9-121 1, 2,

*Engineering 12-11 , Mathematics II .. 11-121 12-1 , 10-11 1, 2

Metallurgical Chemistry 11-12 12-1 . 1, 2 ' 'Metallurgical Engineering I 2—Ы ,. 9-10 Metallurgy I 10-11 10-11 9-10 2-61 12-11 10-111 2-Ы 'Physics II 9-10 1, 2 (Engineering course) 9-10 1 (-FPart of 2)

• Alternative subjects. The selection must be approved by the head of the Department of Metallurgy. 1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. -During the year each student will attend 12 laboratorтyy sessions in this subject. 'All students enrolling for any course in Physics Part II are required to fill in a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students' Records Ofl% e, whether the course includes practical work or not.

Third Year-Metallurgical Engineering Course 1963 Starting Date: 4 March 1963

Sивтвет M. Ти. F. S. TERMS Metallurgy II' E' 9-111 1, 2 12-11 1,2 10-11 2, 3 2-51 1, 2 2-51 2,3 11-12 10-11 1,2,3 2-51 11-12 1,2,3 12-1 1, 2,3 9-10 2, 3 9-111 1, 2 12-11 1, 2 2_51 1, 2 Engineering Design I 2.15-5.151 1, 2, 3 Metallurgical 10-11, 1,2, 3 Engineering II 10-11 9-111 2, 3 12-11 2, 3 2-51 2, 3

Fluid Mechanicu' C' .. 12-1 11-12 1, 2 9-101 1, 2 2.15-5.151 1 Electrical 11-12 1, 2, Engineering IA . 11-12 1, 2 З 2-51 2,3

1Tutorial, drawing oiňce or laboratory class.

Fourth Year-Metallurgical Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

SIIBJECT М. Tu. W. Тн. , F. S. TERMS Metallurgy III 12-1 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 110-5 125 1, 2, 3 Metallurgical 11-12 12-1 1, 2,3 Engineering III .. 12-5► 12-55 1,2,3 2Cьеmiсal Engineering III (g) .. .. 9-10 1, 2 Industrial Manage- ment I .. 5.15-6.15 5.15-6.15 1,2,3 Mineral Industry 9-10 1, 2, 3 Management 9-10 2

Alternative times. 'Practical class. 2 For Ore Dressing major option only. (Note: Candidates taking Ore DressIng as a minor option will carry out less than nine hours practical work per week.) STogether with practical work at times to be arranged. 60 MINING ENGINEERING AND MINERAL ENGINEERING The Mining department, in association with the Metallurgy department, offers a range of courses which lead to operating or research positions within the mining, mineral and metallurgical industries, or in teaching, research or government establishments associated with these industries. The number of students taking these courses is small, and is in fact inadequate to supply the Australian demand for graduates in these fields of work. This is unfortunate, because many openings exist for satisfying, constructive and well-rewarded employment in the mining, mineral and metallurgical industries. The mineral industries of Australia must progress because the development of the country depends to a great extent on an expanding production and use of mineral raw materials of all kinds. The smallness of the number of students enrolling for these courses can only be due to lack of knowledge of the excellent opportunities for graduates in the fields of mining, mineral processing and metallurgy. At the University of Melbourne in 1874-5 an option was introduced in the third year of the course leading to the certificate of Civil Engineer, which allowed students to specialize in either civil or mining engineering. This represented the first instruction in mining to be given in any Australian university. When a degree course in Civil Engineering was introduced in 1882, a similar option was retained in the fourth year. In 19o1 a separate degree (B.M.E.) in Mining Engineering was introduced. Until 1924 teaching of mining was administered within a single department of Engineer- ing, and from 1924 to 1949, within the department of Metallurgy. In 1949 a separate department of Mining was established. A new building for this department erected in 1854 was occupied in 1955. Since 1934 an Ore Dressing Section of C.S.I.R.O. has been associated with the department, conducting research on the treatment of Australian ores. Currently the staff of this section numbers seventeen. The Mining department has two major fields of interest and responsibility which are closely related to each other. 1. The science and engineering practice of mining by underground, open cut and alluvial methods. This includes such topics as prospecting, exploration and development of mineral resources; drilling, blasting and rock breaking; ore and coal winning; transport, haulage, ventilation and drainage in mines; rock mechanics and mine design; mining equipment; mine sampling and valuation; mineral economics and mine management. A major research interest is rock drilling and the allied field of rock mechanics. 2. The science and engineering practice of mineral processing, and in particular of mineral dressing. This includes such topics as crushing and grinding; sampling; screening and classifying; concentrating minerals byravity, centrifugal, magnetic, electrostatic, flotation and other methods. Also included are solid-liquid separation processes; chemical leaching of ores; high temperature reactions; treatment plant design; operational control, mineral economics and management. Research interests cover many of these fields, with particular emphasis on the surface chemistry of mineral-water systems involved in flotation concentration and solid-liquid separation processes, and on electrostatic methods of concentration. The Mining department offers courses leading to the degree of Bachelor of Engineering in Mining Engineering, and in Mineral Engineering. In the Mining Engineering course, the first two years lay a foundation of chemistry, physics, mathematics, geology and general engineering subjects including surveying. The later years include additional general engineering, statistics, mine surveying, mining geology, mining, mining design, mineral processing, mineral economics and mine management. Graduates find employment in underground mining and open cutting and in civil tunnelling and excavation projects. The roads to management or to technical specialization lie open to them. The mining degree gives partial exemption from examinations for Mine Manager's certificates and similar certificates in most States of Australia. In the Mineral Engineering course the emphasis is on the processing of all types of mineral raw materials by a variety of physical and chemical processes. Graduates can find employment in the field of metallic mineral beneficiation or in the non-metallic industries producing lime, cement, asbestos, plaster, clay and ceramic products. The first two years lay a foundation of physics, chemistry, mathematics, geology, general engineering and materials science, and are almost identical with the first two years of the Metallurgical Engineering course. Later years stress the science and technology of the chemical and physical processing of metals, with additional general engineering, statistics, mineralogy, geochemistry, mining, mineral economics and mineral industry management. This course should appeal to students with an interest in minerals who desire to become engineers rather than field geologists, and to those having an interest in the applications of physics or 61 chemistry to the engineering processing of mineral raw materials. Opportunities exist both in operation-management and in research. The Mining department also provides an introductory course in lining for Science students majoring in Geology, and is responsible for courses in Ore Dressing included in the subjects Metallurgy Parts I, II and III, which are studied by students of Metallurgical Engineering, Science or Applied Science. Post Graduate training and research within the department, in mining or in mineral processing, can lead to the higher degrees of master of Engineering Science, or master of Science, and doctor of Philosophy. There is also available the professional degree of master of Engineering in Mining Engineering. Teaching staff Associate Professor of Mining: H. H. Dunkin, B.Met.E., M.Aus.I.M.M. Senior Lecturer in Mining Engineering: H. F. C. Nevi11, A.O.S.M., A.M.Aus.I.M.M., A.M.I.M.M. Senior Lecturer in Ore Dressing: J. S. Carr, В.Sc_, B.E. (N.Z.), М.Ѕ. (Missouri), S.M. (M.I.T.), M.Sc., A.M.Aus.I.M.M., A.M.A.I.M.Е. PART-TIME TEACHING OFFICERS Lecturers: I. T. Woodcock, B.Met.E., M.Eng.Sc., M.Aus.I.M.M. S. B. Hudson, B.Sc. (W.A.), M.Sc., A.M.Aus.I.M.M., A.M.A.I.M.E. K. S. Blaskett, B.E. (Adel.), M.Aus.I.M.M. Demonstrators: W. J. Trahar, B.Sc. J. S. Henkel, B.Met.E. List of Subjects for Mining Engineering Course FIRST YEAR 551 Chemistry (Engineering course) 552 Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 556 1Engineering Design part I 670 Engineering Mathematics part IIA 649 Dynamics of Machines part II 549 1Physics part II (Engineering course) . 560 Engineering Materials 561 1Statistics for Engineers 562 Strength of Materials part IIA 563 Surveying part I з 56 Geology part I THIRD YEAR 574 1Engineering Design (Mining course) 575 1Fluid Mechanics B 572, Geology part II (Mining course) 576 Mining part I 569 Surveying part II (Mining course) 644 3АррІiеd Thermodynamics part I 567 1Еlеctriсal Engineering part IA 665 °Pure Mathematics part. II (Mining course) FOURTH YEAR 567 1°Electrical Engineering part IA 577 2Mining part II 578 2Mining Design 579 2Mining Geology 58о 20re Dressing 581 2Mjnerai Industry Management 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only. 2 Honours are not awarded for these individual subjects, as they belong to a group of subjects for which Final Honours are awarded. 3 Not to be taken by students entering Third Year in l Ø3 after passing Second Year in 2962. For I963 only. 62 List of Subjects for Mineral Engineering Course FIRST YEAR 4Z0 Chemistry part IB 552 Engineering part I 553Engineering. Mathematics part I . 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 604 Geology part I (Metallurgy) 605 1Metallurgicsl Chemistry 606 Metallurgical Engineering part I . бо7 Metallurgy part I 559 1Physics part II (Engineering course) 561 1Statistics for Engineers THIRD YEAR 556 1Engineering Design part I 575 1Fluid Mechanics B 572 Geology part II (Mining) 672 Mineral Engineering part I 567 1Electrical Engineering part IA 2FOURTH YEAR 673 Mineral Engineering part II 581 Mineral Industry Management 422 Geochemistry 674 Mining part IA 448 ' Economics (Applied Science) or 462 ' Social and Economic History 557 Engineering Mathematics part II or sAn approved elective subject 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only. - - ' 2 Additional work in the Final Year will be prescribed for Final Honours candidates. a The elective subject must be approved by the head of the department of Mining. Second Year—Mining Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963 SuвJхст M. Tu. W. Ти: цхiтs Engineering Design I 2.15-Ь.151 1, 2 Engineering 5.15-6.151 12-1' 12-11 10-11 1 f' 2а rt Mathematics IIA .. Dynamics of 9-10 1, 2 Machines II 2.15-5.151 1, 2 ePhvøic II 9-10 1,2 (Engineeringв course) 9-10 1 (-}-Part of 2)

2Engineering Materials 10-11 1, 2 2-51

5 'Ѕtrength of 12-1 1 Materials IIA 2.15-5.151 1, 2 12-1 1, 2 Surveying I .. .. 11-12 9-10 1, 2 2.15-5.l5 2.15-5.151 1, 2

Geology I .. .. 12-1 11-12 11-12 9-121 1, 2 ' 1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 2During the year each student will at end 12 laboratory sessions in this subject. sTogether with a tutorial class at a time to be arranged. 4 During the year each student will at end 9 laboratory sessions in this subject. sА1l students enrolling for any course in Physics Part 1I are required to fill in -a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students' Records Office, whether the course Includes practical work or not. 63 Third Year—Mining Engineering Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

Tu. Ti. F. S. ТEкмв Engineering Design 11-12 1, 2 (Mining course) 12-1 1, 2 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Fluid Mechanics `B' 12-1 11-12 1,2,3 2.15-5.151 Geology II 12-1 12-1 12-1 1, 2, 3 (Mining course) .. 2_51 2-51 1, 2, 3 Mining I 10-11 1, 2, 3 2-51 1, 2, 3 Surveying II 10-11 1, 2 (Mining course) 2.15-5.151 1, 2 Electrical 11-12 1,2,3 Engineering IA . . 11-12 1, 2 (Part) 2-51 2,з Pure Mathematics II (Mining course) .. 5.15--6.15 5.15-6.15 5.15-6.15

1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class.

Fourth Year-Mining Engineering Course 1963 Starting Date : 4 March 1963

SUBJECT M. Tu. Tн. F. S. ТEкмs Electrical 11-12 1, 2, 3 Engineering IA .. 11-12 1 (+Part of 2) 2-51 Part of 2,3 Mining II .. 9-10 12-1 10-11 10-121 1,2,3 Mining Design 12-1 2-51 1,2,3 Mining Geology 9-10 so-lo 1, 2, 3 2-51 1, 2, 3

Ore Dressing 12-1 2-51 12-1 1,2,3 Mineral Industry 9-10 1,2,3 Management .. 412-1 2

1Tutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 2Six weeks of first term only. sEхcерt for seven weeks during second term. 4 Seven weeks of second term only.

`64 Second Year—Mineral Engineering Course Starting Date: . q March 1963 ..

• Sивткст M. Tu. • w. Тн. . S: UNIT$ Geology I (Metallurgy) 12-1 11-12 11-12 9-121 1, 2 Metallurgical Chemistry 11-12 12-1 1, 2 Metallurgy I .. 10-11 10-11 9-10 1, 2 2 bt 12-11 10-111 2–Б1 1,2 • aPhyвice II 9-10 1, 2 (Engineering course) 9-10 1 (-{-Part of 2) aMetallurgical Engineering I 2-51 9-10 1,2

ITutorial, drawing office or laboratory class. 2During the year each student will attend 12 labотагоry sessions in this subject. sAll students enrolling for any course in Physics Part II are required to fill in a Practical Roll Card when enrolling at Students Records Office, whether the course includes practical work or not.

SURVEYING The department of Surveying was established in 1949. Its function is to impart knowledge of the methods and instruments used in making measurements of natural and artificial features so that their absolute or relative positions can be accurately determined and if necessary shown on a plan or map. As such, the department continues and furthers the work commenced within the University when the first lecturer ' in Surveying was appointed in 1861. The department has three full-time and two part-time lecturers on its staff and provides instruction for students pursuing degree courses designed to fit them for careers in which a knowledge of Surveying is one of the essentials. The course leading to the degree of bachelor of Surveying is of four years duration. The first year is common to most Engineering courses and consists of a basic training in Mathematics, Physics, Engineering and Chemistry. Studies in the second and subsequent years become progressively more specialized in the fields of Mathematics, Natural Sciences and of course, Surveying. The fourth year is devoted almost exclusively to the study of Surveying including Astronomy, Geodesy and Photogrammetry, and includes short courses in the legal aspects of Surveying as well as Town Planning. The degree of bachelor of Surveying was conferred for the first time in 1953, and that of master of Surveying in 1960. Graduates in Surveying who wish to obtain a Licence to practise as cadastral surveyors on title definition in Victoria are exempted from nearly all the examinations of the Surveyors' Board of Victoria, but are obliged to serve between twelve and eighteen months under articles of apprenticeship with a licensed surveyor on land boundary definition. The Surveyors' Board gives some credit for cadastral work performed under a licensed surveyor during University vacations. A degree in Surveying qualifies the graduate for Associate Membership of the Institution of Surveyors, Australia, and, after two years professional experience such an Associate can progress to Corporate Membership. Undergraduates are eligible for Student Membership. Graduates are encouraged to continue their studies and present themselves as candidates for the degree of master of Surveying or the degree of doctor of Philosophy. Australia is a large and relatively unmapped continent and urgently requires educated young men with spirit and integrity to enter the Surveying profession arid carry on the work which is the basis of a significant portion of Engineering and Legal Practice, and is a prerequisite of national development. Teaching. Staff • . Associate Professor of Surveying: G. J. Thornton-Smith, В.Е., В.Sиrv. (W.A.), M.C.E., L.S., F.I.S.Aust. 65

Senior Lecturer: В. Т. Murphy, M.Surv., L.S., M.I.S.Aust. Lecturer: S. G. Bervoets, Ir. Geod. (Delft), Assoc.M.A.I.C. PART-TIME TEACHING OFFICERS Lecturer in Hydrology: G. N. Alexander, M.C.E., A.M.I.E.Aust., Assoc.M.A.S.C.E. List of Subjects for Surveying Course FIRST YEAR 551 Chemistry (Engineering course) 552 Engineering part I 553 Engineering Mathematics part I 555 Physics part I (Engineering course) SECOND YEAR 356 Geology part I 369 1Рriпciplеs of Geophysics 86 Pure Mathematics part II 563 Surveying part I THIRD YEAR 680 Building Construction part I (Section A only) 636 Elementary Ecology 637 1Hydrology 638 Pure Mathematics part III (Surveying course) 639 Surveying part II FOURTH YEAR First Aid 641 Law of Property in Land 642 Photogrammetry , 643 Surveying part III 571 Town Planning 1 The examinations in these subjects will be for pass only.

Second Year-Surveying Course Starting Date: 4 March 1863

Sиванет М. Tu. Tu. F. S. UNITS Geology I 12-1 11-12 ' 11-12 9-121 1, 2 Principles of Geo- 2-51.s 2-61.п 2 physics .. 12-1 1, 2 Pure Mathematics II 10-11 10-11 10-111 1, 2 12-11 1, 2 9-10 1

SØeying I .. 9-10 1, 2 2.15-6.151 2.15- 5 ј51,' 1, 2

IPractical work. FIeld, laboratory, or drawing office class. IAltemative tinses.

6б' Third Year-Surveying Course Starting Date: 4 March 1963

SUBIECT M. Tu. w: Тн: F. Taais Building Construction I (Seo. A) .. 9-10 'Elementary Ecology 9-10 1, 2, 3 11-11 1, 2, 3 Hydrology .. 12-1 1, 2, 3 Pure Mathematics III (Surveying course) 10-11 9-10s 1,2,3 Surveying II .. 11-12 10-11 10-11 1,2,3 2.15-5.15k 2.15-5.151 1,2.3

'Practical work. Field or laboratory class. 'Together with occasional field excursions. 3Together with a total of 2 hours per week. Practice class at times to be arranged. Fourth Year—Surveying. Course Starting Date: 4 March 1863

M. Tu. Тн. S. Тlввмв . Law of Property in Land .. 2.15-3.15 Photogrammetry .. 12-1 12-1 12-1 2.15-5.151 2.15-5.15 Surveying III 9-10 10-11 10-11 1, 2, 3 2.15-6.151 2.15-5.151 1, 2, 3 Town Planning .. 5.15-6.15

I Practical class in laboratory, drawing office, or field.

67 DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT The Council on the recommendation of the Faculty of Engineering has approved the introduction in 1963 of a diploma course in Engineering Management. The course will be open to graduates in any branch of engineering, science, or applied science, and will extend over two years, with lectures and practice classes being held in the late afternoons and evenings. Graduates with the degree of B.E. (Mechanical) would find this course useful in enabling them to complete the Part III (Industrial Administration) section of the examination for corporate membership of the Institution of Mechanical Engineering, London. Graduates in Industrial Engineering are precluded from taking the course for the Diploma in Engineering Management, as the Industrial Engineering course will cover nearly all the material of the diploma course. REGULATION 3.69—DIPLOMA IN ENGINEERING MANAGEMENT 1. A person may be a candidate for the Diploma in Engineering Management if— (a) he has qualified, whether within the University or elsewhere, for a degree in Engineering (obtained by a course other than Industrial Engineering), Surveying, Science or Applied Science, approved for this purpose by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the Faculty of Engineering (hereinafter called the faculty) or (b) he has an equivalent qualification accepted by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty. 2. A candidate for the Diploma in Engineering Management shall pursue his studies for at least two years, attend such lectures and classes, and perform such practical work, as may be prescribed by the faculty, and pass the prescribed examinations. 3. The subjects of the course shall be: (a) First Year (i) Industrial Management part I (ii) Operational Research (b) Second Year (i) Industrial Management part II (ii) Data Processing and Computers (iii) Methods Engineering 4. The examinations in the several subjects shall be for both pass and honours, and shall include written work and practical work as prescribed by the faculty. 5. (1) No candidate may be admitted to the Second Year of the course until he has passed in, or obtained credit for, all the subjects of the First Year. (z) Subject to the provisions of sub-section (1) hereof, a candidate who passes in any subject or subjects shall be entitled to credit therefor. 6. A candidate who has fulfilled the requirements of this regulation and passed in or obtained credit for all the subjects of the course may be granted the Diploma in Engineering Management. Those requiring further information rе arding the course for the Diploma in Engineer- ing Management should consult the Professor of Mechanical Engineering. First Year—Diploma in Engineering Management Starting Date: 4 March 1963

M. Tu. W. Тн. F. S. TERMS Industrial Management Part I 5.15-6.15 5.15-6.15 1, 2, 3

Operational Research 4-5 1, 2, 3 5-6

68 CHAPTER 4 Details of Subjects and Books for 1963 * The books marked with an asterisk are essential and students should possess their own copies. 625. AGRICULTURAL ECONOMICS (ENGINEERING COURSE) (Mr A. G. Lloyd) A course of one lecture per week throughout the year, together with some seminar discussion, and mainly concerned with the problems of the individual farm firm. SYLLABUS I. Introductory lectures on the scope and nature of economics and agricultural economics. The farm as a business, agriculture as an industry. 2. Agricultural production economics and farm management. Factor-product relationships— response curves as production functions; factor substitution—in choosing the optimum combination of farm resources; principles of enterprise combination in mixed farming; production costs in agriculture; budgeting and linear programming; farm size and economies of scale; adjustments to risk and uncertainty; credit management; labour management, farm machinery decisions, farm buildings, irrigation. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book : Bishop, C. E. and Toussaint, W. D., Introduction to Agricultural Economic Analysis. (b) Recommended for reference i Heady, E. 0., Economics of Agricultural Production and Resource Use.* Heady, E. O. and Jensen, H. R., Farm Management Economics * Heady, E. 0. and Dillon, J. L., Agricultural Production Functions. Samuelson, P. A., Economics. Bradford, L. A. and Johnston, G. L., Farm Management Analysis. U.K. Ministry of Agriculture, Fisheries and Food, The Farm as a Business. Hopkins, J. A. and Heady, E. 0., Farm Records and Accounting. • Strongly recommended. EXAMINATION One ;-hour written paper.

626. AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING A (Mr G. H. Vasey) A course of three lectures and three hours' practice per week, in the Fourth Year, on the general subject of Farm Power and Machinery. SYLLABUS Unit processes and machines in agricultural production. Requirements of machinery, basic design, industrial design, performance testing. Soil reactions in tillage: mechanics of traction. Interactions between mechanical processes and plant material. Curing, drying and storing of crops. Mechanical handling of crops and mineral materials. Work study: mechanization and farm management. Tractors and engines : performance, testing, traction, stability. PRACTICE Seminars, laboratory work and computations on the above subjects. EXCURSIONS May be arranged to farms, factories, field trials, the Tractor Testing Station, the Royal Agricultural Show. 69 Books (a) Preliminary reading: Fussell, G. E., The Farmer's Tools A.D. 15оо-1gоо. (Melrose, i95г•) (b) Prescribed text-books *Bainer, R., Kepner, R. A. and Barger, E. L., Principles of Farm Machinery, (Wiley, 1955•) *Barger, Carleton, McKibben and Bainer, Tractors and their Power Units. (Wiley, 1951.) Culpin, C., Farm Machinery. (Crosby Lockwood.) *Henderson, S. M. and Perry, R. L., Agricultural Process Engineering. (Wiley, 1955.) (c) Recommended for reference: Bekker, M. G., Theory of Land Locomotion. (Michigan, 1956.) Southwell, P. H., The Agricultural Tractor. (Temple, 1953•) Electricity Supply Association, Aust., Farm ElectriГication Handbook. Gregory, C. E., Explosives for En ineers. (Q'ld. U.P., 196o.) Rickey, C. В. and others, Agricultural Engineers Handbook. (McGraw-Hill, 1961.) Fraser, A. K. and Lugg, G. W., Work Study in Agriculture. (Land Books, 1962.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers and a satisfactory standard must be reached in laboratory and drawing office work.

627. AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING В (Mr G. H. Vasey, Mr A. K. Turner) A course of three lectures and three hours' practice a week in the Fourth Year, oa the subject of Farm Buildings and Structures. SYLLABUS Structural design, with special emphasis on buildings; building construction, earthworks, contracts. Functional requirements of farm buildings, work study of buildings; heating, cooling, ventilating, lighting. Building materials and design.

PRACTICE . Design, planning and work study of buildings, and formal structural design. BООKS (a) Prescribed text-book : *Neubauer, L. W. and Walker, H. B., Farm Building Design. (Prentice-Hall, 1961.) (b) Recommended for reference: Barre, H. J. and Sammet, L. L., Farm Structures. (Wiley, 1g5o.) Fry, Roger, Vision and Design. (Penguin.) O.P. Boyd, R., Australia's Home. (М U.P., 1961.) Dunham, C. W., Theory and Practice of Reinforced Concrete. (McGraw-Hill, 1953•) Matheson, J. A. L. and Francis, A. J., Hyperstatic Structures, Vols. I. and II. (Butterworth.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, and a satisfactory standard in drawing office work. 628. AGRICULTURAL ENGINEERING C (Mr A. K. Turner) A course of three lectures and three hours' practice a week in the Fourth Year on the general subject Hydrology and Water Engineering. SYLLABUS Hydrology: Determination of flow in relation to rainfall, infiltration, evaporation, run-off (both peak arid long-term yield), and groundwater, for small and large catchments. Irrigation: Soil, water and plant relationships, methods of application, systems economics. Drainage: Surface, sub-surface and deep-well systems for agricultural lands, waste water and sewerage. Conduits and Structures: Flow theory for pipes, channels and special sections, controls, sediment transport, pumps and models. Water Supply: Water for agricultural purposes, earth dams and regulation of storages. Erosion Control: Land utilization and classification, control measures for water and wind erosion, flood reduction and river improvement. 7о PRACTICE Laboratory experiments, computations and designs in the above subjects. EXCURSIONS Excursions to water, irrigation, drainage, soil erosion works, and research centres may be arranged. Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading Addison, H., Land, Water and Food. (Chapman and Hall.) Calder, Ritchie, Men Against the Desert. (Allen & Unwin, 195o.) Leopold, L. B. and Maddocks, T., The Flood Control Controversy. (Ronald, 1954.) (b) Prescribed text-books: Marshall, T. J., Relations between Water and Soil. (Comm. Ag. Bur., 1g5g.) 4фFrevert, Schwab, Edminster and Barnes, Soil and Water Conservation Engineering (Wiley, 1955•) (c) Recommended for reference Addison, H., A Treatise on Applied Hydraulics. (Chapman and Hall, 1954.) Baver, L. D., Soil Physics. (Wiley, 1956.) Linsley, R. K., Kohler, M. A. andyPaulhus, J. L. H., Hydrology for Engineers. (McGraw-Hill, 1958.) Todd, D. k., Ground Water Hydrology. (Wiley, 1959.) Israelson, O. W., Irrigation Principles and Practices. (Wiley, 195o.) Thorne, D. W. and Peterson, H. B., Irrigated Soils. (Blakiston, 1954.) Luthin, J. N. and others, Monograph of Land Drainage. (Amer. Soc. of Agronomy, 1957.) Dougherty, R. L. and Ingersoll, A. C., Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill, 1954.) U.S.D.A. Yearbook, 1 955, Water. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers, and a satisfactory standard in laboratory and drawing о &се work. 623. AGRICULTURAL SCIENCE (ENGINEERING COURSE) A course of four hours of instruction per week throughout the Third Year, including practice classes and demonstrations. SYLLABUS Climate and its influence on Australian farming. Crops and pastures and their cultivation. History of land development; land tenure and sources of finance; cost surveys and factors affecting farming. Types of agriculture in Victoria. Elements of the theory of statistics with special reference to agriculture. Elementary biology—the broad principles of plant and animal structure, and growth and intake of nutrients. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books Wadham, S. M., Wilson, R. R. and Wood, J., Land Utilization in Australia. (3rd ed., M.U.P., 1957.) Symposium: The Australian Environment. (3rd ed., C.S.I.R.O., 196о.) Мoroney, M. J., Facts from Figures. (Pelican Books.) Aitken, Y. et al., Agricultural Science—An Introduction for Australian Students and Farmers. (Cheshire, 1g6z,) (b) Recommended for reference: Holt, A., Wheat Farms of Victoria. (Me1b. Univ. Agr. School.) Collins, H. G., Rural Economics. (Commonwealth Inst. Valuers.) Molnar, I. (ed.), A Manual of Australian Agriculture. (Heinemann, 1861.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours.

71 Applied Mathematics Subjects (See under Bachelor of Arts) 644. APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS PART I (Dr Patterson, Mr Pitt, Mr Ritchie) A course of one lecture per week and 45 hours' laboratory work. SYLLABUS Power, indicator diagrams, work and heat. Combustion of fuels. Laws of thermodynamics. Non-flow and steady flow equations. The perfect gas. Ideal cycles. History and develop. ment of the internal combustion engine. RECOMMENDED TEХТ-BOOKS Rogers, G. F. C. and Mayhew, Y. R., Engineering Thermodynamics, Work and Heat Transfer. (Longmans.) Spalding, D. В. and Cole, E. H., Engineering Thermodynamics. (Arnold.) Note: Alternative books may be approved by the lecturer and numerous others will be referred to throughout the course. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours combined. In order to pass the subject, students must reach a satisfactory standard both in the practical work and in the written paper.

645. APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS PART II

(Dr Patterson, Mr Pitt, Mr Ritchie) • A course of about 40 lectures and 52 hours' practical work. SYLLABUS I. The air compressor, the reciprocating internal combustion engine and the gas turbine. Refrigeration, air-conditioning and the heat pump. z. Thermal radiation, convection, and conduction under steady conditions of heat transfer. 3. Steam as a working fluid. The Carnot and Rankine cycles. Temperature-entropy and Mollier charts. The steam turbine. Efficiencies and Vector diagrams. RECOMMENDED TEХТ-ВОOKS Rogers, G. F. C. and Mayhew, Y. R., Engineering Thermodynamics, Work and Heat Transfer. (Longmans.) Lee, J. F. and Sears, F. W., Thermodynamics. (Addison-Wesley.) Kay, J. M., Fluid Mechanics and Heat Transfer. (Cambridge.) Note: Alternative books may be approved by the lecturer and numerous others will be referred to throughout the course. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours combined. In order to pass the subject, students must reach a satisfactory standard both in the practical work and in the written paper.

646. APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS PART II (A) A course of one lecture and one hour practice/tutorial per week throughout the year. SYLLAВUs Sections i and 2 of Applied Thermodynamics Part II. BOOKS As in Applied Thermodynamics Part IL EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper for Pass only. 72 647. APPLIED THERMODYNAMICS PART III (Dr Patterson, Mr Pitt, Mr Ritchie) A course of two lectures per week together with practical work. One tutorial per week will be arranged, but attendance is voluntary. SYLLABUS The subject matter is included in the following general topics: General thermodynamics applied to actual fluids. Analysis of unsteady flow. Transient conditions in heat conduction. Advanced theories applied to reciprocating engines, gas . and steam turbines, and methods of improvement of efficiency. Use of steam for heating and for process work. Mixtures of gases and • vapours. Air conditioning. Aspects of nuclear reactors and nuclear power generation. PRACTICAL WORK Laboratory work totalling about thirty-six hours given in the first half of the year set under Mechanical. Engineering Laboratory, plus some further tutorials. A number of projects from this subject will then be set in Mechanical Engineering Project. RECOMMENDED TEXT-BOOKS Rogers, G. F. C. and Mayhew, Y. R., Engineering Thermodynamics, Work and Heat Transfer. (Longmans.) Lee,. J. F. and Sears, F. W., Thermodynamics. (Addison-Wesley.) Hall, N. A. and Ibele, W. E., Engineering Thermodynamics. (Prentice-Hall.) Rohsenow, W. M. and Choi, H. Y., Heat Mass and Momentum Transfer. (Prentice-Hall.) Taylor, C. F., The Internal Combustion Engine in Theory and Practice. (Tech. Press and Wiley.) Note: Alternative books may be approved by the lecturer and numerous others will be referred to throughout the course. In addition, stencilled notes will be available where text-books are unsuitable. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Final Honours. Some further questions on more advanced aspects of the course will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours in conjunction with questions from other subjects. In order to pass the subject candidates must reach a satisfactory standard in both the practical work and the written papers. 648. AUTOMATIC CONTROL (Dr Pengilley) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year with laboratory work. Tutorial classes will be arranged, but attendance at these is voluntary. SYLLABUS A continuation of the study of Automatic Control Systems from third year. Topics include: the root locus and frequency response methods with applications to analysis and synthesis; an introduction to the theory of random processes and optimization of control systems; and an introduction to non-linear control systems using the describing functions . method. LABORATORY WORK Experimental work will be conducted at appropriate times during the course. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text books D'Azzo, John J. and Houpis, Constantine, H., Feedback Control System Analysis and Synthesis. (McGraw-Hill.) Solodovnikov, V. V., Introduction to the Statistical Dynamics of Automatic Control Systems. (Dover.) Graham, Dunstan and McRuer, Duane, Analysis of Non-linear Control. Systems. (John or West, John C., Analytical Techniques for Non-linear Control Systems. (E.U.P.) (b) Recommended for reference: Truxal, John G., Automatic Feedback Control System Synthesis. (McGraw-Hill.) 73 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Final Pass and Honours. Some further questions on more advanced aspects of the course will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours in conjunction with questions from other subjects. In order to pass the subject candidates must reach a satisfactory standard in both the practical work and the written papers.

614. CHEMICAL ENGINEERING PART. I (i) A course of one lecture-tutorial per week for three terms. SYLLABUS Industrial stoichiometry; material balance calculations on selected chemical processes. Energy balances, flow-sheets. Introduction to economic optimization. (z) A course of one lecture per week and two hours practical work per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Introduction to the unit operations of chemical engineering. Newtonian and non-Newtonian fluids; fluid flow; viscous flaw; turbulent flow; measurement of flow; transportation of fluids. Elementary heat transfer; conduction; convection; radiation; mean temperature difference. . Diffusion and mass transfer, e.g., gas absorption and distillation. Measurement of process variables. Conveying of solids; size separation; methods of determining particle size distribution; crushing and grinding.. , . BOOKS Part I (i): (a) Prescribed text-book: Hougen, O. A., Watson, K. M. and Ragatz, R. A., Chemical Process Principles. Part I. (Wiley.) Part I (z) : (a) Prescribed text book Badger, W. L. and Banehero, J. T., Introduction to Chemical Engineering. (McGraw-Hill) EXAMINATION Part I (i) : One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. . Part I (z): One ;hour paper for Pass and Honours.

613. CHEMICAL ENGINEERING PART' II A course of four lectures per week throughout the year and about 80 hours' practical work. SYLLABUS Transport properties of fluids-viscosity, thermal conductivity, mass diffusivity. Equations of continuity, motion and energy for isothermal, for non-isothermal and for multi-component systems. Momentum, heat and mass-transfer in laminar and turbulent flow. Momentum, heat and mass-transfer between two phases. Steady-state continuous and stage-wise contacting of phases in process equipment for heat transfer and for mass-transfer; phase equilibria. Heat-transfer and mass-transfer coefficients; transfer units; mean temperature difference or concentration difference' in co-current and counter-current operation; use of reflux, side-streams. Applications of process instrumentation and control. BOOKS Part II Prescribed text-books: Bird. R B., Stewart, W. E. and Lightfoot, E. N., Transport Phenomena. (Wiley, 196о.) Foust, A. S., Wenzel, L. A., Clump, C. W., Maus, L. and Anderson, L. B., Principles of Unit Operations. (Wiley, WWWe.) EXAMINATION Part I Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. 74 622. CHEMICAL ENGINEERING ° PART III

A course of about eight lectures per week, with laboratory and drawing-оffiсе work throughout the year. Students are expected to attend all courses in Group i, and to select, in conjunction with the Head of. Department, five units of Groups z, 3 and 4 in addition. Certain of these units may be prescribed for Final Honours students. GROUP 1. COMPULSORY (a) Fluid and Particle Mechanics. (b) Heat and Mass Transfer. (c) Process Dynamics and Control. (d) Thermodynamics A.. (e) Thermodynamics B. (f) Technical Kinetics. (g) Process Equipment Design. . (h) Metallurgy for Chemical Engineers. GROUP 2 Advanced topics selected from Group i, together with : (a) Design of Experiments. (b) Systems Engineering and Computing. (c) Corrosion. (d) Rheology. GROUP 3. EXTREME CONDITIONS • (a) Low Pressure. (b) Low Temperature. (c) High Pressure.. (d) High Temperature. GROUP 4. PROCESS CHEMISTRY (a) Electrochemical Processes. (b) Biochemical Engineering. (е) Minerals Processing. (d) Nuclear Chemical Engineering. (e) Petroleum Processes. (f) Polymerization Processes. (g) Dyestuffs. (h) Pharmaceuticals. (i) Food Technology. . (j) Catalytic Processes and Catalysis. (k) Ceramics. (1) Combustion and Fuel Technology. (m) Extractive Metallurgy. GROUP 1 (a) Fluid and Particle Mechanics. Fluid mechanics of two-phase and other chemical engineering systems. Aerodynamics of small particles. Elutriation, sedimentation and filtration. Cyclones, electrostatic precipi- tators and other types of gas-cleaning plant. Sampling and particle size analysis. Flow through packed beds. Pneumatic conveying. (b) Heat and Mass Transfer. Unsteady-state conduction. Heat exchangers. Condensation. Natural convection. Boiling and evaporation. Heat transfer in packed beds, matrices, regenerators, jackets and coils, evaporative coolers, cooler-condensers. Radiation and consideration of furnace design. . Operating characteristics of mass transfer equipment. Multi-component distillation. Isotope separation, ideal cascades. Humidification, cooling towers and drying. Crystallization. (c) Process Dynamics and Control. Derivation of equations for control-loop components. Calculation of response of simple systems. Transfer functions and block-diagram algebra. Transient response and frequency response. Control of distillation columns and heat exchangers. (d) Thermodynamics A. Engineering aspects of the 1 75 gaseous and condensing systems. Internal combustion-engines, gas-turbines, jets and rockets. Compressors and regenerators. Steam power systems. Condensing turbines, pass- out turbines and back pressure turbines and the economics of their application to industrial process steam and power distribution. Refrigeration. Air-conditioning and other heat-pump applications. Manufacture of liquid oxygen. Economics of oxygen purity. (e) Thermodynamics В. Detailed treatment of the laws of thermodynamics applied to flow and non-flow processes. Entropy flow and irreversible processes including applications such as heat transfer. Pressure, volume and temperature relations in real fluids including virial coefficients and their physical significance. Thermodynamic properties of fluids and phase equilibria. Reaction equilibria. Thermodynamics of processes at high pressure. (f) Technical Kinetics. Strategy and tactics of chemical reactions for profit. Ideal reactors—tubular and well-mixed stirred tank. Departures from ideal behaviour, residence-time distribution, piston-flow with longitudinal diffusion. Optimization of yield. Optimization of throughput. Non- isothermal reactors. Stationary states of exothermic reactions. Stability of chemical reactors. Mass transfer as a factor in reactor design. External diffusion to catalyst and internal diffusion in catalyst pores. Problems of gas absorption and liquid-liquid extraction with chemical reaction. Flames. Catalysis. Determination of rate equations. (g) Process equipment design. Non-metallic materials of construction. Corrosion. Design of chemical process plant, e.g. distillation columns, heat-exchangers, reactors. General design considerations for pressure vessels. Valves, fittings and closures for high pressure operation. . (h) Metallurgy for Chemical Engineers. Characteristics of chemical engineering materials. Structure of ferrous and non-ferrous metals. Effect of alloying elements on the properties of metals. Heat treatment of steels and non-ferrous metals. Plastic behaviour. Brittle rupture and factors affecting transition temperature. Creep and high temperature effects. Caustic and hydrogen embrittlement. GROUP 2 (a) Design of Experiments. Design of industrial experiments. Treatment of data. (b) Systems Engineering and Computing. Process optimization in design stage. Optimization of plant operations. Use of analogue and digital computers. (c) Corrosion. A more advanced treatment of material given in process equipment design. (d) Rheology. Chemical engineering applications of the behaviour, including heat transfer of non- Newtonian fluids. GROUP Extreme Conditions. In the four cases, methods of attaining the extreme condition, materials for containing the extreme condition and ways of measuring the extreme condition will be considered, together with the effects of the condition on transfer processes, kinetics and equilibria. GROUP 4 Process Chemistry. In each case the lectures will survey the chemistry and chemical engineering of some of the processes within the general field named, particularly from the points of view of thermodynamics, kinetics, transport phenomena and materials. The Provision of units in Groups a to 4 in a particular year will depend on the demand for them and also on the staff available. BOOKS Part III (a) Prescribed text-books. As for Chemical Engineering Part lI together with Group i. 76 (a) Strauss, W., Industrial Gas Cleaning. (Pergamon.) (b) МcAdams, W. H., Heat Transmission. (McGraw-Hí11.) or Kern, D. Q., Process Heat Transfer. (McGraw-Hill.) Norman, W. S., Absorption, Distillation and Cooling Towers. (Longmans.) (c) Ceagslke, N. H., Automatic Process Control for Chemical Engineers. (Wiley.) (d) Dillio, C. C. and Nye, E. P., Thermal Engineering. (International Text Book Co.) (e) Hingen, O. A» Watson, K. M. and Ragatz, R. A., Chemical Process Principles, Part II: Thermodynamics. (Wiley.) Weber, H. C. and Meissner, H. P., Thermodynamics for Chemical Engineers. (Wiley.) or Smith, J. M. and van Ness, H. C., Introduction to Chemical Engineering Thermo- dynamics. (McGraw-Hill.) (f) Smith, J. M., Chemical Engineering Kinetics. (McGraw-Hill.) (g) Brownell, L. E. and Young, E. H., Process Equipment Design (Vessel Design). (Wiley.) B.S. Code 1500 (1958), Fusion Welded Pressure Vessels for use in the Chemical and Allied Industries. (British Standards Institution.) (h) Guy, A. G., Elements of Physical Metallurgy (2nd Ed., Addison-Wesley.) . EXAMINATION Part III Examinations will be held during the year at the end of the optional unit courses. One 3-hour paper in each of sections i (d) and (h) of the compulsory syllabus will be given. at the end of these courses. Five 3-hour papers will be given in the other compulsory sections of the course at the end of the year.

551. CHEMISTRY (ENGINEERING COURSE) (Mr Olver) A course of two lectures per week, with laboratory work, throughout the year. Pre-requisite Standard. While there is no pre-requisite, it is strongly recommended that the students beginning the course should have a background of descriptive chemistry and basic chemical theory equivalent to Matriculation Chemistry. A knowledge of the subject up to this standard will be assumed as a basis for the course. SYLLABUS The course will consist of a treatment of basic physical, inorganic and organic chemistry, emphasizing aspects of the subject of importance in engineering investigations and practice. The following syllabus provides a general guide to the topics to be discussed. t. Physical Chemistry. Chemical Kinetics and Chemical Equilibrium. Factors influencing the rates of chemical reactions; collision theory of reaction. Catalysis—homogeneous and heterogeneous, with applications. The equilibrium law and le Chatelier's principle. Ionic equilibria in aqueous solution; the Lowry-Brönsted theory of acids and bases; pH, indicators, buffer solutions, titration curves. Precipitation equilibria. The Properties of Gases, Liquids and Solids. The Kinetic theory of matter. The ideal gas equation; real gases and deviations from ideality; van der Waals' equation; liquefaction of gases and critical phenomena. The liquid state. Crystalline solids—metals, ionic solids, valence and molecular crystals. Solid-liquid-gas equilibria for one-component systems; the Phase Rule. Solutions. Two-component systems; solutions; the properties of gas-liquid, liquid-liquid and liquid-solid systems. Colligative properties of dilute solutions. Thermochemistry. The first law of thermodynamics; internal energy and enthalpy; heat of reaction; calorimetry; heat of formation; heat of combustion; heat of solution; heat of neutralization; the laws of Hess and Kirchhoff. Combustion of fuels. Electrochemistry. Conductance of electrolyte solutions and the ionic theory. Redox equilibria; electrode potentials and redox potentials, electrolytic cells; measurement of hydrogen ion concentration. Electrolysis. Overvoltage. Electrodeposition of metals. Cor- rosion and methods of controlling it. . Surface Chemistry and the Colloidal State. Surface phenomena. The colloidal state: lyophobic and lyophilic sols. Theory of Chemical Analysis. The theory and procedure involved in gravimetric and volumetric analysis such as is given in the recommended manual of practical chemistry. Conductometric titrations; potentiometric titrations. z. Descriptive Chemistry. Comparative chemistry of the elements and the periodic classification. Atomic structure and the theory of valency. 77 3. Organic Chemistry. The properties of homologous series. Aliphatic hydrocarbons and their simpler derivatives. The main functional groups. Benzene and its simple derivatives. Naphthalene, Lubricants. Fuels. Plastics. LABORATORY WORK Three and a half hours per week throughout the year, covering exercises in gravimetric and volumetric analysis, and general inorganic chemistry, and experiments in physical chemistry, the experiments being chosen to illustrate and amplify the theory course. The practical lasses for this subject are taken in the Biological and Engineering Chemistry Laboratory of the Redmond Barry Building. The department supplies all the apparatus for which a fee of £5 must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank, using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the Laboratory. Evidence of payment must be produced to the Laboratory before practical classes begin. The full fee is retained as no charge will be made for reasonable wear arid breakage. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Pauling, L., General Chemistry. (ind ed., Freeman.) Diamant, R. M. E., Applied Chemistry for Engineers. (Pitman.) (b) Prescribed text-books "Sisley, H. H., Van. der Werf, C. A. and Davidson, A. W., Generai Chemistry: A Syste- matic Approach, (гnд ed., Macmillan.) or "Simko, M. J. and Plane, R. A., Chemistry. (2nd ed., McGraw-Hill.) or *Andrews, D. H. and Kokes, R. J., Fundamental Chemistry. (Wiley.) Glasstone, S. and Lewis, D., Elements of Physical Chemistry. (Macmillan.) Brown, R. D. and O'Donnell, T. A., Manual of Elementary Practical Chemistry. (ind ed., M.U.P.) *Departmental Publications (duplicated): Experiments in Inorganic Chemistry. Experiments in Physical Chemistry. (These laboratory handbooks are available. from the Biological and Engineering Chemistry Laboratory, Redmond Barry Building.) (c) Recommended for reference Glasstone, S., Textbook of Physical Chemistry. (ind ed., Macmillan.) Daniels, F. and Alberty, R. A., Physical Chemistry. (ind ed., Wiley.) . Findlay, A., Introduction to Physical Chemistry. (3rd ed., Longmans.) Brown, G. I., Simple Guide to Modern Valency Theory. (Longmans.) Carman, P. C., Chemical Constitution and Properties of Engineering Materials. (Arnold.) Van Vlack, L. H., Elements of Materials Science. (Addison-Wesley.) Kolthoff, L M. and Sandell, E. B., Textbook of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis. (3rd ed., Macmillan.) Vogel, A. I., A Text-book of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis including Elementary Instrumental Analyses. (3rd ed., Longmans.) Findlay, A. and Kitchener, J. A., Practical Physical Chemistry. (8th ed., Longmans.) Daniels, F., Mathews, J. H., Williams, J. W., Bender, P. and Alberty, R. A., Experi- mental Physical Chemistry. (5th ed., McGraw-Hill.) . EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper, for Pass and Honours combined. There will be no practical examination, but the standard of the student's laboratory work will be assessed continually throughout the year, and is taken into account in determining the success of the candidates at the Annual Examination. .

420. CHEMISTRY PART I B A course of three lectures, one tutorial per week and laboratory work throughout the year. A preliminary standard equivalent to Matriculation Chemistry will be assumed. The syllabus is basically similar to that of the Chemistry IA course with the restriction that certain subjects are not developed so fully. Membership of the Chemistry Part IA class is restricted to students having a good result in Matriculation Chemistry. The syllabus is basically similar to that of Chemistry IB. For further details see Faculty of Science Handbook. . 78 SYLLABUS 1. General Chemistry. Atomic Structure and the Theory of Valency: electrovalent, covalent,. dative, hydrogen, metallic and van der Waals' bonding. Structure of Solids: relation between bond type, properties and structure. Kinetic Theory of Matter: solids, liquids, gases, ideal gas equation, ideal behaviour and deviations from it, distribution of molecular velocities. Solid-Liquid-Gas Equilibria : one component systems, vapour pressure, liquefaction of gases and critical phenomena. Distribution Equilibria: Henry's Law and the distribution of a solute between two immis- cible solvents. Energetics of Chemical Reactions: heat of reaction, internal energy, éпthalpy, activation energy, Hess's Law. Kinetics and Mechanism of Chemical Reactions : factors influencing rate of reactions, rate controlling step, catalysis. . Chemical Equilibrium : the equilibrium law, Le Chatelier's principle, homogeneous and heterogeneous systems. Ionic Equilibria in Solution : precipitation equilibria, competing equilibria, complex formation, Lowry-Вrönsted theory of acids and bases, pi, . buffer solutions, conductance of electrolyte solutions, electrode potentials, redox equilibria and electrolysis. Periodic Table : comparative chemistry of selected groups and periods, introduction to co- ordination chemistry. 1. Organic Chemistry. The scope of organic chemistry. Principles of purification, qualitative and quantitative analysis of organic compounds. Functional, structural, optical and geometric isomerism, Structure of benzene. . The preparation and reactions of the following classes of compounds : paraffins, olefins, acetylenes, benzene, alcohols, phenols, halides, ethers, aldehydes, ketones, carboxylić acids and amines. LABORATORY WORK Three and a half hours per week, throughout the year, illustrating the principles of inorganic, physical and organic chemistry together with exercises in quantitative and qualitative analysis. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry Building. The department supplies all the apparatus for which a fee of £5 must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank, using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the department. Evidence of payment must be produced to the department before practical classes begin. The full fee is retained as no charge will be made for reasonable wear and breakage. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading Pauling, L., General Chemistry. (Freeman.) (b) Prescribed text-books: Baxter, J. F. and Steiner, L. E. Modern Chemistry, Vol. II. (Prentice-Hall.) or Glasstone, S. arid Lewis, D., Elements of Physical Chemistry. (Van Nostrand.)t . or Daniels, F. and Alberty, R. A., Physical Chemistry. (Wiley.) Sisley, H. H., Van der Werf, C. A. and Davidson, A. W., College Chemistry: A Syste- matic Approach. (xnd ed., Macmillan.) Andrews, D. H. and Kokes, R. J., Fundamental Chemistry. (Wiley.) or Sienko, M. J. and Plane, R. A., Chemistry. (McGraw-Hill.) or Hiller, L. A. and Herber, R. H., Principles of Chemistry. (McGraw.Hill.) . Morrison, R. T. and Boyd, R. N., Organic Chemistry. (Allyn & Bacon.)t or English, J. and Cassidy, I-L G., Principles of Organic Chemistry. (McGraw-Hill.) Brown, R. D. and O'Donnell, T. A., Manual of Elementary Practical Chemistry. (and ed.,. M.U.P.) Brown, G. I., Simple Guide to Modern Valency Theory: (Longmans.) ' . (c) Recommended for reference: Gilreath, E. S., Fundamental Concepts of Inorganic Chemistry. (McGraw-Hill.) Gould, E. S., Inorganic Reactions and Structure. (Holt.)t Books marked t are used by students proceeding to Chemistry II and Chemistry III. EXAMINATION Two a-hour written papers in General Chemistry, one i%-hour written paper in Organic Chemistry. The practical work of each student is assessed continually throughout the year, and is taken into account in determining the success of candidates at the Annual Examination. 79 . 362. CHEMISTRY PART II C A course of approximately 45 lectures in physical chemistry, 25 lectures in inorganic chemistry and 25 lectures in organic chemistry, with demonstrations and practical work throughout the year. The course provides a survey of the subject for those not intending to become professional chemists, but proceeding to a degree with a physical science as major subject. SYLLABUS Physical chemistry and inorganic chemistry. The scope of the course is substantially as for Chemistry Part II A. (See Science Handbook.) Organic chemistry. A study of mono-functional and poly-functional aliphatic and aromatic compounds, providing a short survey of the subject. LABORATORY WORK A record of efficiency in performance and understanding of experiments will be kept and short tests may be given. This information will have a bearing on the final result of the student in the subject. The practical classes for this subject are taken in the Chemistry Building. The department supplies all the apparatus for which a fee of Lro must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank, using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the department. Evidence of payment must be produced to the department before practical classes begin. The full fee is retained as no charge will be made for reasonable wear and breakage. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Wells, A. F., The Third Dimension in Chemistry. (O.U.P.) Kauzmann, W., Quantum Chemistry, Ch. i only. (Academic Press.) (b) Prescribed text-books: (i) For those not proceeding to Chemistry Part III: Sanderson, Chemical Periodicity. *Moore, W. J., Physical Chemistry. (Prentice-Hall.) *Glasstone, S., Elements of Physical Chemistry. (Van Nostrand.) or *Daniels, F. and Alberty, R. A., Physical Chemistry. (2nd ed., Wiley.) *English, J. and Cassidy, H. G» Principles of Organic Chemistry. (McGraw-Hill. *Morrison, R. T. and Boyd, R. N., Organic Chemistry. (Allyn & Bacon.) (i) For those proceeding to Chemistry III: *Glasstone, S., Textbook of Physical Chemistry. (Van Nostrand.) *Morrison, R. T. and Boyd, R. N., Organic Chemistry. (Allyn & Bacon.) *Cartmell, E. and Fowles, G. W. A., Valency and Molecular Structure. (Butterworth.) Sykes, P., A Guidebook to Mechanism in Organic Chemistry. (Longmans.) *Kolthoff, I. M. and Sandell, E. B., Textbook of Quantitative Inorganic Analysis. (Macmillan.) (3) For all students Moeller, T., Inorganic Chemistry. (Wiley.) or Gould, E. S., Inorganic Reactions and Structure. (Holt.) Emeléus, H. J. arid Anderson, J. S., Modern Aspects of Inorganic Chemistry. (ind ed., Routledge.) (c) Recommended for general reading and reference: Coulson, C. A., Valence. (0.1.?.) Wells, A. F., Structural Inorganic Chemistry. (ind ed., O.U.P.) Latimer, W. M., The Oxidation States of the Elements. (Prentice-Hall.) Sidgwick, N. V., The Chemical Elements and their Compounds, z vols. (O.U.Р.) Moelwyn-Hughes, E. A., Physical Chemistry. Steiner, L. E., Introduction to Chemical Thermodynamics. (ind ed., McGraw-Hill.) Glasstone, S., Introduction to Electrochemistry. (Van Nostrand.) Findlay, A., Campbell, A. N. and Smith, N. A., The Phase Rule and its Applications. (9th ed., Dover.) Findlay, A. and Kitchener, J. A., Practical Physical Chemistry. (8th ed., Longmans.) Remy, H., Treatise on Inorganic Chemistry, i vols. (Elsevier.) Ketelaar, J. A. A., Chemical Constitution. (ind ed., Elsevier.) EXAMINATION For Pass and Honours—one 3-hour paper in physical chemistry, and one 3-hour pa er in organic and inorganic chemistry. Students who have not maintained a satisfctorya standard in the laboratory course throughout the year will be required to take a practical examination. 570. CIVIL ENGINEERING (Professor Francis, Dr Trollope, Dr Laszlo, Mr Wood, Dr Lawson, Mr Sharp, Dr Lee, Dr Stevens, Dr Clyde, Mr Aroni, Mr O'Neill and visiting lecturers) A course of about 8 lectures per week, with about 1q hours per week of laboratory,. drawing office and practice classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS 1. Structural En ineering and Elasticity. Analysis and design of statically indeterminate structures such as trusses, rigid frames; arches and shells. Inelastic behaviour. Concrete mix design. Concrete quality control. Reinforced and prestressed concrete structures. Stability of structures and components. Vibrations of beams, frames and the like. Elemen- tary plate and shell theory. Laboratory techniques—measurement of strain, methods of testing structures and statistical design of experiments. a. Hydraulic Engineering. Topics in the following fields Hydrology : Precipitation, run-off, infiltration, ground water, floods. Sewerage and Drainage: Sewerage and drainage schemes. Sewage disposal. Water Supply: Water supply schemes. Purification. Irrigation: Water requirements and losses, irrigation methods, control and distribution structures. Conduits: Channels, pipes. Variable flow in channels. Waves. Flow measurement. Dams and Storages : Types, outlet and diversion works, spillways, gates, energy dissipators. River regulation, weirs, sediment transport. Water Power : Performance, cavitation, speed regulation, testing of turbines. Surge tanks. Water power schemes. Coastal Engineering. Flow nets. Hydraulic similitude. 3.Soil Engineering. Behaviour of engineering soils. Principles and applications of soil mechanics to foundations, embankments, cuttings and retaining structures. 4. Highway and Airport Engineering. Geometric design of roads, streets and airports. Pave- ment design and construction. Drainage. Introduction to traffic engineering. 5.Engineering Practices. (a) Engineering Construction. Topics such as the following: foundation methods, timber- ing, de-watering, under-pinning, etc. Structural steel fabrication. Methods of reinforced concrete construction, form-work, precasting. Erection methods. (b) Engineering Organization and Economics. Topics such as the followings organization of civil engineering works, contracts and specifications, financing of engineering projects, costing, legal aspects. LABORATORY, DRAWING OFFICE AND CLASSROOM WORK This will usually include the following (i) original designs of structures in part or whole; (i) a scheme of water supply, irrigation, power, sewerage, etc.; (3) laboratory work including projects; (4) discussion groups, visits to works in progress and special lectures by visiting speakers; (5) essays and reports. No student will be admitted to the Final Examination without evidence of satisfactory laboratory and drawing office work, which will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. Records of laboratory and drawing orce work must be submitted periodically as required. Additional tests may be set during the year; the results of these may be taken into account in assessing examination results. BOlkS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Tòrroja, E., Philosophy of Structures. (Univ. of California Press.) Rouse, H. and Ince, S., History of Hydraulics. (State U. of Iowa, 1957.) Birkhoff, G., Hydro-dynamics. (Dover.) (b) Prescribed text-books: *Matheson, J. A. L. and Francis, A. J., Hyperstatic Structures, Vols. 1 and z. (Butterworth Scientific Publications.) 81 Timoshenko, S. and Youn D. H., Theory of Structures. (McGraw-111.) Timoshenko, S., Тheory of Elastic Stability. (McGraw-Hill.) Timoshenko, S., Theоr of Plates and Shells. (McGraw-Hill.) *Ferguson, P. M., Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals. (Wiley.) Lin, T. Y., Prestressed Concrete Structures. (Wiley.) Albertson, M. L., Barton, J. R. and Simons, D. B., Fluid Mechanics for Engineers. (Prentice- Hall, rgбo. Davis, C. V., Handbook of Applied Hydraulics. (McGraw-Hill.) *Capper, P. L. and Cassie, W. F., The Mechanics of Engineering Soils. (2nd ed., Spon.) (c) Recommended for reference (t) Structural Engineering and Elasticity. Wilbur, J. B. and Norris, C. H., Elementary Structural Analysis. (McGraw-Hill.) Probst, E. H. afd Comrie, J., Civil Engineering Reference Book. (Butterworth.) Baker, J. F., Horne, M. R. and Heyman, J., The Steel Skeleton, Vol. II. (C.U.P.) Beedle, L. S., Plastic Design of Steel Frames. (Wiley.) Cross, H. and Morgan, N. D., Continuous Frames of Reinforced Concrete. (Wiley.) Parcel, J. I. and Moorman, R. B. B., Analysis of Statically Indeterminate Structures. (Wiley.) Stewart, D. A., High Quality Concrete. (Spon. Guyon, Y., Prestressed Concrete. (Contractors Record.) Dunham, C. W., Theory and. Practice of Reinforced Concrete. (3rd ed., McGraw-Hill.) Murdock, L. J., Concrete Materials and Practice. (Arnold.) Wortham, A. W. and Smith, T. E., Practical Statistics in Experimental Design. (Merrill.) (z) Hydraulic Engineering. Hydraulics Streeter, V. L., Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Streeter, V. L., Handbook of Fluid Dynamics. (McGraw-Hill.) Chow, V. te, Open Channel Hydraulics. (McGraw-Hill.) Jaeger, C., Engineering Fluid Mechanics. (Blackie.) Rouse, H., Engineering Hydraulics. (Wiley.) Lamb, H., Hydraulics. (Dover.) Vallentine, H. R., Applied Hydrodynamics. (Butterworth.) Leliaysky, S., An Introduction to Fluvial Hydraulics. (Constable.) Hydraulic Models—A.S.C.E. Manual of Engineering Practice, No. і (1942). Allen, J., Scale Models in Hydraulic Engineering. (Longmans.) Structures Schoklitsch, A., Hydraulic Structures, Vols. I, II. (Amer. Soc. Mech. Eng.) Elevatorski, E. A., Hydraulic Energy Dissipators. (McGraw-Hill.) Water Supply Babbitt, H. E. and Deland, J. J.,.Water Supply Engineering. (4th ed., McGraw-Hill.) Sewerage and Stormwater Drainage Babbitt, H. E. and Baumann, E. R., Sewerage and Sewage Treatment. (8th ed., Wiley.) Fair, G. M. and Geyer, J. C, Water Supply and Waste Water Disposal. (Wiley.) Imhoff, K. and Fair, G. M., Sewage Treatment. (znd ed., Wiley.) Irrigation Etcheverry, B. A., Irrigation Practice and Engineering,' 3 vols. (McGraw-Hill.) Houk, I. E., Irrigation Engineering, Vols. I and II. (Wiley.) Leliaysky, S., Irrigation and Hydraulic Design, Vol. I. (Chapman and Hall.) Hydro-electric Engineering Spannhake, W., Centrifugal Pumps, Turbines and Propellers. (Mass. Inst. Tech.) Wislicenus, G. E., Fluid Mechanics of Turbomachinery. (McGraw-Hill.) Brown, J. G., Hydro-electnic Engineering Practice, Vols. I, II and III. (Blackie. Hydrology Linsley, R. K., Kohler, M. A. and Paulhus, J. L. H., Hydrology for Engineers. (McGraw- Hill.) Todd, D. K., Ground Water Hydrology. (Wiley.) Wisler, C. O. and Brater, E. F., Hydrology. (Wiley.) (3) Soil Engineering. Tschebotarioff, G. P., Soil Mechanics, Foundations and Earth Structures. (McGraw-Hill. Taylor, D. W., Fundamentals of Soil Mechanics. (Wiley.) 82 Terzaghi, K. V., Theoretical Soil Mechanics. (Wiley.) Terzaghi, K. V. and Peck, R. B., Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice. (Wiley.) Bishop, A. W. and Henkel, D. J., The Measurement of Soil Properties in the Triaxial Test. (Edward Arnold.) Henry, F. D. C., The Design and Construction of Engineering Foundations. (Spon.) Peck, R. B., Hanson, W. E. and Thornburn, T. H., Foundation. Engineering. (Wiley.) Dept. of Scientific and Industrial Research, Soil Mechanics for Road Engineers. (H.M.S.O.) (4) Highway and Airport Engineering. Lectures in Highway Engineering. (Country Roads Board of Victoria.) Hewes, L. I. and Oglesby, C. H., Highway Engineering. (Wiley.) Public Roads Administration, U.S.A., Highway Practice in the U.S.A. (Public Roads Administration.) Sharp, H. O., Shaw, G. R. and Dunlop, J. A., Airport Engineering. (Wiley.) Gliddon, H. C., Law, H. F. and Cowles, J. E., Airports. Design, Construction and Manage- ment. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION Five 3-hour papers. DATA PROCESSING AND COMPUTERS (Dr Hirst, Mr Palfreyman, Mr Ferguson and Dr Pengilley) A course of one lecture per week throughout the year with laboratory and tutorial classes as arranged. SYLLABUS Lectures to be selected from the following : Digital computer operation, computer logic, Binary arithmetic, Boolean algebra, computer circuitry (gates, flip-flops, etc.), codes, error checking and correction, computer organization and management, types of computers and peripherals, data processing systems, flow charts, systems analysis, report generation, information theory, higher programming languages (Cobol, Algol, etc.), analogue computers, automatic control of industrial processing, analogue/digital conversion, application of digital computers to process control and engineering computations. LABORATORY WORK Laboratory work in the use of digital and analogue computers and punched card systems will be conducted at appropriate times during the course. BOОKS (a) Prescribed text-books r Siegel, P., Understanding Digital Computers. (John Wiley and Sons.) Johnston, C. L., Analog Computer Techniques. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference Huskey, H. D. and Korn, G. A., Computer Handbook. (McGraw-Hill.) Grabbe, E. M., Ramo, S. and Wooldridge, D. E., Handbook of Automation, Computation and Control. (John Wiley and Sons.) McCraken, D. D., Digital Computer Programming. (John Wiley and Sons.) Lance, G. N., Numerical Methods for High Speed Computers. (Iliffe and Sons.) Phister, M., Logical Design of Digital Computers. (John Wiley and Sons.) Alt, Franz L., Electronic Digital Computers—Their Use in Science and Engineering. (Academic. Press.) Korn, G. A. and Korn, T. M., Electronic Analog Computers. (McGraw-Hill.) Jackson, A. S., Analog Computation. (McGraw-Hill.) DESIGN PROJECT A course consisting mainly of practical work with about 2g lectures. SYLLABUS The economic design of a chemical plant to meet a specified production requirement; commercial considerations including costing and accounts; raw materials and stock control; factory laws and regulations; safety; the preparation of flow-sheets, the specification of 83 equipment, the selection of appropriate materials of construction and the methods of fabrication, the preparation of drawings of individual plant units and of the general arrangement of the plant. BOOKS Prescribed text-book: Vilbrandt, F. C. and Dryden, C. E., Chemical Engineering Plant Design. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION Students will be assessed on the design project completed during the course.

DISCUSSION SESSIONS (Various lecturers from other faculties) A course of some three hours a week throughout the year generally on literary or historical and artistic topics in a limited field. Some reading and essay or project work will be included and candidates will be assessed on the work performed.

649. DYNAMICS OF MACHINES II (Mr Ritchie) A course of one lecture per week throughout the year with r8 hours' tutorial and practice classes. SYLLABUS Torque speed and power characteristics of engines and other machines. Mechanical transmission of power in shafts, couplings, belts, gear trains, clutches, brakes, etc. Flywheels; Balancing of rotating masses. Undamped and damped vibrations of systems with one degree of freedom. Transmissibility. Force and motion isolation. Commercial isolators. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book Bevan, T., Theory of Machines. (Longmans.) (b) Recommended for reference: Green, W. G., Theory of Machines. (Blackie.) Church, A. H., Mechanical Vibrations. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. In order to pass the subject, students must reach a satisfactory standard both in the practical work and the written paper.

650. DYNAMICS OF MACHINES III (Dr Laszlo, Dr Pengilley) lectures and practical classes. Tutorial classes will be arranged, but A course of зг attendance at these is voluntary. SYLLABUS (a) Kinematics: kinematic pairs. kinematic chains. Mechanisms. Inversion. Relative plane motion, moving axes, relative velocity and acceleration. Instant centres. Centrodes. Applications to cams, gears and other plane mechanisms. (b) Lubrication: Hydrodynamic and boundary lubrication of sliding pads and journal bearings. (c) Kinetics: D'Alembert's principle. Energy methods for vibration analysis. Vibration of lumped systems with more than one degree of freedom. Normal elastic curve. Dunkerley, Rayleigh, Stodola, Ritz and Holzer methods for obtaining natural frequencies. Equivalent moments of inertia and elasticities of crankshafts, connecting rods, gears, etc. Vibration of continuous systems. Derivation of the governing equations and their solution for simple cases of vibration of beams, plates and shells. Whirling of shafts. Gyroscopes. The gyro-compass. Gyroscopic vibration absorbers. 84 Books (a) Prescribed ; text-books Timoshenko, S. and Young, D. R, Vibration Problems in Engineering. (Van Nostrand.) Hunt, K. H., Mechanisms and Motion. (E.U.P.) (b) Recommended for reference: Den Hartog, J. P., Mechanical Vibrations. (McGraw-Hill.) Church, A. H., Mechanical Vibrations. (Wiley.) Inglis, C., Applied Mechanics for Engineers. (C.U.P.) Rosenauer, N. and Willis, A. H., Kinematics of Mechanisms. (Associated General Publications.) Bevan, T., Theory of Machines. (Longmans.) Hunsaker, J. C. and Rightmire, B. G., Engineering Applications of Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Bagwell, F. T., Lubrication of Bearings. (Butterworth.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. In order to pass the subject, students must reach a satisfactory standard both in the practical work and the written paper.

651. DYNAMICS OF MACHINES IV (Mr Clifton, Dr Pengilley) A course of two lectures per week with laboratory and practical classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS (a) kinematics: Further plane kinematics. Synthesis of plane mechanisms. Three dimensional motion. Space mechanisms. Kutzbach's criterion: . (b) Lubrication: Hydrodynamic and boundary lubrication of journal bearings. Lubricants. Wear. Dynamically loaded bearings. (c) kinetics: Balancing of rotating and reciprocating masses. Harmonic analysis of engine torque curves. Torsional critical speeds, phase diagrams. Further work on the vibration' of lumped systems. Mechanical impedance, mobility and receptance. Transfer function, transfer matrix. Interconnected dynamic elements and machines. Mechanical transients, phase plane method. Elastic wave propagation. Noise, noise control. Self excited vibrations, stability. Non-linear vibrations. Generalized co-ordinates and forces. Lagrange's equations. General vibration equations. Matrix solution of vibration problems. BOOKS' Recommended for reference: Hunt, K. H., Mechanism and Motion. (E.U.P.) Rosenauer, N. and Willis, A. H., Kinematics of Mechanisms. (Associated General Publications.) Shaw, M. C. and Macks, E. F., Analysis and Lubrication of Bearings. (McGraw-Hill.) Wilcock, D. F. and Boiser, E. R., Bearing Design and Application. (McGraw-Hill.) Bowden, F. P. and Tabor, D., Friction and Lubrication of Solids. (Oxford University Press.) Crafton, P. A., Shock and Vibration in Linear Systems. (Harper.) Holowenko, A. R., Dynamics of Machinery. (Wiley.) Tong, K. N., Theory of Mechanical Vibration. (Wiley.) Macduff, J. N. and Curreri, J. R., Vibration Control. (McGraw-Hill.) Jacobsen, L. S. and Ayre, R. S., Engineering Vibrations. (McGraw-Hill.) Cole, E. B., The Theory of Vibrations for Engineers. (Crosby Lockwood.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for final Pass and Honours. Some further questions o more advanced aspects of the course, together with questions from other subjects, will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours. In order toass the subject, candidates must reach a satisfactory standard in both practical work andpwritten papers. 564. EARTH SCIENCE (Dr Trollope, Dr Lee, Dr Griner, Dr Beavis) A course of approximately 8g lectures; three hours' laboratory and practical work per week throughout the year and five field excursions. 85 SYLLABUS (a) GEOLOGY (Engineering Course) Part I—г4 lectures. Mineralogy. Petrology, including a study of concrete and road aggre- gates, and the formation of engineering soils. Elementary structural geology and physiography. Ground water hydrology. Earthquakes. Geological aspects of landslides. Methods of subsurface geological investigations, including boring, drilling and geophysical techniques. Part II-9 lectures on special aspects of Engineering Geology. Laboratory Work. Three hours per week during first term. Field Work. Two half-day field excursions. (b) SOIL CHEMISTRY 2s lectures. introduction to colloid chemistry applied to soils. Crystal structure of clay minerals. Elementary soil chemistry. Soil texture and structure. Soil types and profile formation. Erosion. Soil-Water relationships. Laboratory Work. Six 3-hour periods during third term. Field Work. One half-day and two whole-day field excursions. These excursions are compulsory and will cost approximately £z. , . (c) SOIL MECHANICS AND PHYSICS . as lectures. Soil classification and identification. Compaction. Consolidation. Shear strength of soils. Elementary stability theory—earth pressures, stability of slopes, bearing capacity. Laboratory Work. Eight 3-hour periods during second and third terms. Books Section (a). (i) Recommended for preliminary reading: Read, H. H., Geology. (H.U.L.) Raistrick, Teach Yourself Geology. (E.U.P.) (z) Prescribed text-book: *Hills, E. S., The Physiography of Victoria. (Whitcombe and Tombs.) . (3) Recommended for reference Legget, R. F., Geology and Engineering. (McGraw-Hill.) • or Krynine, D. P. and Judd, W. R., Principles of Engineering Geology and Geotechnics. (McGraw-Hill.) Page, S. (ed.), Application of Geology to Engineering Practice. (Geol. Soc. America.) Trask, P. D. (ed.), Engineering Geology Case Histories, Nos. i- . (Geol. Soc. America.) Dapples, E. C., Basic Geology for Science and Engineering. (Wiley.) Section (b) (i) Prescribed text-book: *Leeper, G. W, An Introduction to Soil Science. (2) Recommended for reference: Baver, L. D., Soil Physics. (Wiley.)

Section (c) • . (i) Prescribed text-books: *Capper, P. L. and Cassie, W. F., The Mechanics of Engineering Soils. (2nd ed., Spon.) *Soil Mechanics for Road Engineers. (H.M.S.O.) (z) Recommended for reference: Terzaghi, K. V. and Peck, R. B., Soil Mechanics in Engineering Practice. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION Section (a) One 3-hour written paper at the end of second term. Laboratory work will be assessed and a practical examination may be held if this work is unsatisfactory. Section (b) One a-hour written paper. Section (c) One a-hour written paper. 86 596. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PART I A course of 48 lectures with laboratory work and practice classes. It will be assumed that students are concurrently attending Engineering Mathematics II (or its equivalent). SYLLABUS Electrostatics and electrodynamics. Circuit theory—AC and DC. Electrical instruments and measurements. Introduction to energy conversion and machines. Conduction in solids and gases. Introduction to electronic devices, amplifiers and rectifiers. Industrial applications of electrical power. LABORATORY AND PRACTICAL CLASSES 3 hours per week throughout the year. BOORS (a) Prescribed textbook: Foeche, H. A., Introduction to Electrical Engineering Science. (Prentice-Hall.) (b) Recommended for reference Carter, G. W., The Electromagnetic Field in its Engineering Aspects. (Longmans.) Stout, M. B., Basic Electrical Measurements. (ind ed., Prentice-Hall.) ... Ryder, J. D., Electronic Engineering Principles. (3rd ed., Prentice-Hall.) Draper, A., Electrical Machines. (Longmans,) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. 567. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PART I A A course of 3б lectures with laboratory work and practice classes. SYLLABUS Electrostatics and electrodynamics. Circuit theory—AC and DC. Electrical instruments and measurements. Introduction to energy conversion and machines. Conduction in solids and gases. Introduction to electronic devices, amplifiers and rectifiers. Industrial applications of electrical power. LABORATORY AND PRACTICAL CLASSES 3 hours per week for i2 weeks, relating to the above course. ВООКs (a) Prescribed text-book Fitzgerald, A. E. and Higginbotham, D. E., Basic Electrical Engineering. (znd ed., McGraw- Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference: Foeche, H. A, Introduction to Electrical Engineering Science. (Prentice-Hall.) Stout, M. B., Basic Electrical Measurements. (ind ed., Prentice-Hall.) Ryder, J. D., Electronic Engineering Principles. (3rd ed., Prentice-Hall.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass only. 598. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PART II (Professor Moorhouse, Mr Brownlee, Mr Ferguson, Mr King-Smith, Mr Hewitt) (Networks, Power and Electronics) A course of about i i g lectures with laboratory work and practice classes throughout the year. SYLLABUS General Network Theory. Time afd frequency domain analysis. Electrical machines. Measuring equipment. Magnetic circuits. Illumination. Vacuum, gas and semi-conductor electron devices. Graphical and equivalent circuit models. Small and large signal amplifiers. Rectifiers. Pulse circuits. Introduction to closed-loop control systems. LABORATORY AND CLASS WORK Eight hours per week on experiments and examples relating to the above course. No student will be admitted to the Final Examination without evidence of satisfactory laboratory work which will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. A practical examination will be held in doubtful cases. Records of laboratory work must be submitted periodically as required by demonstrators. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading Carter, G. W., The Electromagnetic Field in its Engineering Aspects. (Longmans.) Newstead, G., General Circuit Theory. (Methuen.) (b) Presčribed text-books: Foeche, H. A., Introduction to Electrical Engineering Science. (Prentice-Hall.) *Say, M. G., Electrical Engineering Design Manual. (Chapman and Hall.) Dale, J. B., Five Figure Tables of Mathematical Functions. (Arnold.) Angelo, E. J., Electronic Circuits. (McGraw-Hill.) Balabanian, N., Fundamentals of Circuit Theory (Allyn & Bacon.) (c) Recommended for reference: Draper, A., Electrical Machines. (Longmans.) Stout, M. B., Basic Electrical Measurements. (Prentice-Hall.) Joyce, M. V. and Clarke, K. K., Transistor Circuit Analysis. (Addison-Wesley.) Scott, R. E., Linear Circuits. (Wiley.) Dewitt, D. and Rossoff, A. L., Transistor Electronics. (McGraw-Hill.) Ryder, J. D., Engineering Electronics. (McGraw-Hill.) Terman, F. E. and Pettit, J. M., Electronic Measurements. (McGraw-Hill.) Harris, L. D., Introduction to Feedback Systems. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. 602. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING PART III (Professor Moorhouse, Mr Ferguson, Mr Brownlee, Mr Кing-Smith, Mr Catravas, Mr Hewitt, Mr McCutchan, Mr Bonwick and visiting Iectчгers) A course of about seven lectures per week, with laboratory and drawing-office work throughout the year. For Final Honours students there may be special advanced lectures in place of portions of the syllabus shown. A higher standard of laboratory afd practice class work will be required. Students are expected to attend all units of Group Y and to select any six units of Groups z and 3 in addition. One extra unit may be permitted. GROUP 1. Compulsory (a) Network Analysis (b) Transformations (Honours only) (c) Waveform Techniques (d) Modulation Theory and Circuits (e) Measurements and Analogue Computers (f) Closed-loop Systems I ' (g) Standard Machines and Equipment GROUP 2. Power and General (a) Commutator Machines and Rectifiers (b) Electrical Machine Design (c) Power Transmission and Distribution (d) Power System Analysis (e) Closed-loop Systems II (f) Illumination and Photometry (g) High Voltage Engineering (h) Mechanical Machine Design GROUP 3. Electronics and Communications (a) Advanced Electronic Circuits (b) Microwave Techniques (c) Advanced Electronic Devices 88 (d) Network Synthesis (e) Communication Theory (f) Communication Circuits (i Radio Communication (h) Acoustics (j) Advanced Waveform Techniques (k) Switching Circuits GROUP 1 (a) Network Analysis The time and frequency response of networks. The two terminal and four terminal networks. Distributed networks and transmission lines. (b) Transformations Complex Transformations. Tensor Analysis of Networks and Machines. Special Topics.. (c) Waveform Techniques Active and passive pulse circuits. Introduction to oscillators and trigger circuits. (d) Modulation Theory and Circuits . Introduction to communication systems. Principles of amplitude and frequency modula- tun. Modulators and Demodulators. (e) Measurements and Analogue Computers Precision D.C. measurements. A.C. measurements over a wide range of frequencies, with particular reference to bridge methods. Analogue Computers, theory and applications. (f) Closed-loop Systems I Transfer functions of physical systems. Transient and sinusoidal frequency response. Closed-loop systems. Error constants. Stability criteria. Introduction to root-locus techniques. Multiple-loop systems. Output loads and disturbances. Compensation. (g) Standard Machines and Equipment Transformer, synchronous machine, induction machine. GROUP 2 (a) Commutator Machines and Rectifiers Various topics in A.C. Commutator Machines. Rectifiers. (b) Electrical Machine Design Various topics related to the electrical design of transformers and rotating machines. (c) Power Transmission and Distribution Transmission and distribution problems. Switchgear. Protection. Supply economics. (d) Power System Analysis System reduction and short circuit calculations. Symmetrical components. General system equations. Stability—steady state and transient. (e) Closed-loop Systems II Extended frequency response analysis. Extension and application of root-locus techniques. S-plane synthesis for transient and frequency response. Dynamic errors. Non-linear systems. Describing function analysis. Stability criteria for non-linear systems. (f) Illumination Concepts and units used in illumination and measurement of quantities' involved. Construction and characteristics of tungsten lamps and various discharge lamps. Various illumination problems including topics in the design of lighting installations. (g) High Voltage Equipment Design and testing. The Impulse Generator. Corona Phenomena. (h) Mechanical Machine Design Mechanical design of rotating machines used in Power Engineering with some regard to natural vibration. GROUP 3 (a) Advanced Electronic Circuits Equivalent circuit of 'n' electrode valve. Design of feedback amplifiers. The. frequency and time response of low pass and band pass amplifiers. 89 (b) Microwave Techniques Theory of waveguide and cavity. Propagation in waveguides. Microwave measurements. Ferromagnetic resonance. (c) Advanced Electronic Devices Theory of special electronic devices such as high-frequency transistors, semi-conducting switching elements, magnetic switching elements, magnetrons, travelling wave tubes, masers and light amplifiers. (d) Network Synthesis Properties of driving point and transfer functions, synthesis methods for realizing prescribed driving point and transfer functions. (e) Communication Theory Angular and pulse modulation. Applications to communications. Noise. Information theory. (f) Communication Circuits Line transmission of communication signals. Radio frequency lines. The filter, attenuator and equalizer. (g) Radio Communication Antennae. The propagation of electromagnetic waves. The ionosphere. (h) Acoustics Principles of Acoustics, propagation, reflection and absorption of sound. Applied Acoustics. (j) Advanced Waveform Techniques Frequency and amplitude stability of oscillators. Factors 'affecting switching speed. Applications of negative resistance devices. (k) Switching Circuits Switching Algebra. The functional and logical design of combinational and sequential switching circuits. Techniques for digital applications. The provision of units in 2 and 3 in a particular year will depend on the demand for them and also on the staff available, but it may be possible to provide alternatives in their stead. LABORATORY, DRAWING OFFICE AND CLASSROOM WORK Approximately eighteen hours per week, including (a) participation in discussion sessions, (b) the performance of experiments relating to the course, (c) the execution of original designs and drawings, (d) the preparation and delivery of a thesis on an aspect of electrical engineering, (e) the performance of electrical computations, (f) attendance at excursions. No student will be admitted to the Final Examination without evidence of satisfactory laboratory and drawing office work, which will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. A practical examination may be held in doubtful cases. Records of laboratory and drawing office work must be submitted periodically as required. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books and equipment: Draper, A., Electrical Machines. (Longman,) . Seshu, S. and Balabanian, N., Linear Network Analysis. (Wiley.) Murphy, G. J., Control Engineering. (Van Nostrand.) Students taking Unit i (e) will also be required to procure a 'Spirule' calculator, or equivalent. (b) Recommended for reference : ' ' GROUP 1. (a) Stewart, J. L., Circuit Analysis of Transmission Lines. (Wiley) (b) kron, G., Tensor Analysis of Networks. (Wiley.) Gibbs, W. I., Conformal Transformations in Electrical Engineering. (c) Edson, W. A., Vacuum Tube Oscillators. (Wiley.) Strauss, L., Wave Generation and Shaping. (McGraw-Hill.) (d) Seely, S., Radio Electronics. (McGraw-Hill.) . Schwartz, M., Information Transmission Modulation and Noise. (McGraw-Hill.) 90 (e) Stout, M. B., Basic Electrical Measurements. (Prentice-Hall.) Terrai, F. E. and Pettit, J. M., Electronic Measurements. (McGraw-Hill.) Grabbe, E. M., Ramo, S. and Wooldridge, D. E., Handbook of Automation, Computation and Control, Vol. II. (Wiley.) Smith, G. W. and Wood, R. C., Principles of Analog Computation. . Jackson, A. S., Analog Computation. (McGraw-Hill.) Rogers, A. E. and Connelly, T. W., Analog Computation in Engineering Design. (McGraw-Hill.) (f) Bower, J. L. and Schultheiss, P. M., Introduction to the Design of Servomechanisms. (Wiley.) Savant,. C., Basic Feedback Control. System Design. (McGraw-Hill.) Chestnut, H. and Mayer, R. W., Servomechanisms and Regulating System Design, Vol. I. (and ed., Wiley.) ..

GROUP Z General Knowlton, A. E., Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers. (McGraw-Hin.) or Molloy, E., Say, M. G., Walker, R. C. and Windred, G., Electrical Engineers' Reference Book. (Newnes.) (a) Taylor, E. 0., The Performance and Design of A.C.. Ćommutator Motors. (Pitman.) Rissik, H., Mercury Arc Current Converters. (Pitman.) (b)*Say, M. G., Electrical Engineering Design Manual., Ord `ed., Chapman and Hall.) Say, M. G., Performance Design of Alternating Current Machines. (Pitman.) (c) Westinghouse Engineers, Electrical Transmission Data and Reference Book. (Westing- house.) (d)*Chard, F. de la C., Power System Engineering. (Cleaver Hume.) (e) Truxal, J. G., Automatic Feedback Control System Synthesis. (McGraw-Hill.) West, J. C, Analytical Techniques for Non-linear Control Systems. (E.U.Р.) Gille, J. C., Pé1egrin, M. J. and Decaulne, P., Feedback Control Systems. (McGraw-Hill.) (f) Walsh, J. W. T., Photometry. (Constable.) Stevens, W. R., Principles of Lighting. (Constable.) Weston, H. C., Sight, Light, and E ficiency. (H. K. Lewis.) .

GROUP 3 (a) Petit, J. M. and McWhorter, M. M., Electronic Amplifier Circuits. (McGraw-Hill.) Stewart, J. L., Circuit Theory and Design. (Wiley.) Joyce, M. V. and Clarke, K. K., Transistor Circuit Analysis. (Addison-Wesley.) (b) Barlow, H. E. M. and Cullen, A. L., Microwave Measurements. (Constable.) Bronwell, A. B. and Beam, R. E., Theory and Application of Microwaves. (McGraw-Hí11.), Soohoo, R. F., Theory and Application of Ferrites. (Prentice-Hall.) (c) Spangenberg, K. R., Vacuum Tubes. (McGraw-Hill.) Van der Ziel, A., Solid State Physical Electronics. (Prentice-Hall.) Thomason, J. and Callick, E. B. В., Electron Physics and Technology. (E.U.P.) Loisell, W. H., Coupled Mode and Parametric Electronics. (Wiley.) (d) Guillemin, E. A., Synthesis of Passive Networks. (Wiley.) Van Valkenburg, M. E., Introduction to Modern Network Synthesis. (Wiley.) (e) Reza, F. M., An Introduction to Information Theory. (McGraw-Hill.) Schwartz, M., Information Transmission Modulation and Noise. (McGraw-Hill.) (f) Johnson, W. C., Transmission Lines and Networks. (McGraw-Hill.) Stewart, J. L., Circuit Analysis of Transmission Lines. (Wiley.) (g) Kraus, J. D., Antennas. (McGraw-Hill.) Jordan, E. C., Electromagnetic Waves and Radiating Systems. (Prentice-Hall.) (h) Beranek, L. L., Acoustics. (McGraw-Hill, x954.) (j) Strauss, L., Wave Generation and Shaping. (McGraw-Hill.) Edson, W. A., Vacuum Tube Oscillators. (Wiley.) (k) Caldwell, S. H., Switching and Logic Circuit Design. (Wiley.) Humphrey, W. S., Switching Circuits. (McGraw-Hill.

EXAMINATION Examinations will be held during the year at the end of the unit courses. There will be four 3-hour papers, or an equivalent number of hours of shorter papers, for Pass at the end of the year. Exemption from two of these papers is granted to those who pass in the unit examinations during the year. There will be four 3-hour papers, or an equivalent number of hours of shorter papers for Honours at the end of the year. 91 656. ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING DESIGN (Mr Bonwick) . A course of about zg lectures and 60 hours' practical work. SYLLABUS 1.Introductory concepts, Design calculations, Conductors, Insulators. Mechanical Forces, Frequency effects, Rating, Thermal effects, Contacts and switches, Control gear, Magnetic circuits and materials, Magnetic forces, Inductance, A.C. and D.C. Coils. . 2. A Book Study (during Third Term). BOОKS ' (a) Prescribed text-books *Wilson, W., The Design and Calculation of Electrical Apparatus. (3rd ed., Chapman and Hall.) Say, M. G., Electrical Engineering Design Manual. (3rd ed., Chapman and Hall.) (b) Recommended for reference Knowlton, A. E., Standard Handbook for Electrical Engineers. (McGraw-Hill.) Carter, G. W., The Electromagnetic Field in its Engineering Aspects. (Longmans, Green and Co.) EXAMINATION One a-hour paper for Pass and Honours. Practical work done during the year will be assessed in deciding results.

636. ELEMENTARY ECOLOGY (Mr Murray) A course of zб lectures, with practical work. SYLLABUS A systematic study of Australian native trees; types of vegetation—grassland, forest, scrub, swamp. Environmental factors and their relation to the structure and distribution of vegetation in Australia and, in particular, in Victoria. The study of soils in the field; their texture, structure and pH; nature of the soil profile; elementary particle size analysis; elementary physics of the soil; soil mapping. PRACTICAL AND FIELD WORK Two hours' laboratory work per week throughout the year, and a minimum of seven half-day and seven full-day field excursions. BOOKS Recommended for reference : Anon, Forest Trees of Australia. (Forestry and Timber Bureau.) Leeper, G. W., An Introduction to Sod Science. (M.U.P.) Patton, R. T., Know Your Own Trees. (3rd imp., M.U.P.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour theory paper and one 3-hour practical examination for Pass only.

552. ENGINEERING PART I A course of three lectures per week with drawing office work. Students entering for the first time will be required to attend an introductory course of two weeks' duration, commencing on Monday, а February íg63. SYLLABUS (a) Descriptive Geometry and Engineering Drawing. A course of about zo lectures. The use of drawing instruments, conventional engineering drawing practice and its principles. Construction of graphs and monograms. Descriptive (solid) geometry, including projections and sections of solids. Problems relating to planes, interpenetration and development of surfaces. 92

(b) Strength of Materials Part I. A course of about z7 lectures. Analytical and graphical treatment of statics. Co-planar and non-co-planar force systems, forces in framed structures. Stress and strain, elastic constants. Shear force, thrust, torque and bending moment diagrams. Stresses due to pure bending. Graphical differentiation and integration. First and second moments of area, controid and centres of gravity. (c) Dynamics of Machines Part I. A course of about r8 lectures. Torque, speed and power characteristics of engines and other machines. Friction. Power transmission by belts, clutches and screws. Brakes. Power.. transmission in shafts, couplings and gear trains. (d) Engineering Background. A series of about r3 lectures. The engineering courses and their relationship to developments, past, present and future. DRAWING OFFICE WORK Four hours per week throughout the year, entailing the solution of problems relating to sections (a), (b), (c) above. Students must procure the following set of drawing requisites before the course commences: 1. Set of drawing instruments. . Engineers should obtain a good set as it will be constantly required throughout the course and probably after graduation. The set must contain: Compasses—with pen and pencil attachment, and extension arm. Pen and pencil spring bows. Ruling pen. z. One io in. slide rule with ABCD, Sin, Tan, log-log scales—preferably Darmstadt pattern, or P.I.C. (A. G. Thornton, Ltd). 3. Celluloid set squares. One io in. adjustable set square. One 60 degrees set square, io in. size or larger (bevel edge). 4. One celluloid protractor 5 in. diameter or larger—preferably full circle type. 5. One French curve. 6. Scales. One 1z in. scale, graduated áa in., in., ga in., and mm. units. 7. Pencils—good quality drawing pencils. F (z required), H (z required), 4H and 5H or 6 . Also set of coloured pencils (6 colours). Н 8. One hard eraser, one artgum, one eraser shield. 9. One small fine file (5 in. smooth warding file) or sand-paper block. io. Indian ink. Pen and nibs (зоз Gillott). r 1. One roll of drafting tape. Note: University students may claim exemption from sales tax on the above equipment. Books (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Grinter, L. E., Engineering Preview. (Macmillan.) Hogben, L. T., Science for the Citizen. (Allen and Unwin.) Huxley, J., Uniqueness of Man. (Chang and Windus.) Shute, N., Slide Rule. (Heinemann.) Kirby, R. S., et al., Engineering in History. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Prescribed text-books "Timoshenko, S. and Young, D. H., Engineering Mechanics, Vol. I (Statics.) (McGraw-Hill.) •Institution of Engineers (Australia), Australian Standard Engineering Drawing Practice. (A.S. No, CZ. 1, 1951.) •Bevan, T., Theory of Machines. (Longmans.) . •Slaby, S. M., Descriptive Geometry. (Barnes and Noble.) (c) Recommended for reference Abbott, W., Practical Geometry and Engineering Graphics. (Blackie.) . British Standards Institution, Engineering Drawing Practice. (B.S. 308-1953.) French, T. E., Manual of Engineering Drawing. (McGraw-Hill.) Fairman, S. and Cutshall, C. S., Graphic Statics. (McGraw-Hill.) 93 Nara, H. R., Vector Mechanics for Engineers, Part I: Statics. (Wiley.) Metiam, J. L., Mechanics Part I: Statics. (Wiley.) Inglis, C. E. Applied Mechanics for Engineers. (C.U.P.) Hunt, K. H., Mechanisms and Motion. (E.U.P.) Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Vol. I. (Van Nostrand.) Hart, L В., The Great Engineers. (Methuen.) • Cressy, E., A Hundred Years of Mechanical Engineering. (Duckworth.) Hall, A. S., Construction of Graphs and Charts. (Pitman.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours combined. In order to pass the subject, students must reach a satisfactory standard in both the drawing-office work and in each section of the written papers. 556. ENGINEERING DESIGN PART I (Mr Svensson) A course of 2,o lectures and about 55 hours' drawing office work throughout the year. SYLLABUS General approach to design problems and criteria for functional failure.. Design stresses, factors of safety and probability of failure. Use of standard specifications and codes. Selection of materials. Design of components from . Srst principle and concepts of optimum design. Influence of manufacturing processes on design. DRAWING OFFICE WORK Students are required to prepare and submit design reports and drawings as required during the year. Work submitted will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading : Wallace, P. J., The Technique of Design. (Pitman.) (b) Prescribed text-books: . One of `Black, P. H., Machine Design. (McGraw-Hill.) *Maleev, V. L. and Hartman, J. В., Machine Design. (McGraw-Hill.) •Spotts, M. F., Design of Machine Elements. (Prentice-Hall.) *Наll, A. S., Holowenko, A. R., Laughlin, H. G., Machine Design. (Schaum.) (c) Recommended for reference Marks, L. S., Mechanical Engineers' Handbook. (McGraw-Hill.) . Steeds, W., Engineering Materials, Machine Tools and Processes. (Longmans.) Parker, S., Drawings and Dimensions. (Pitman.) The following Speпfications and Codes: Rolled Steel Sections for Structural Purposes (AS—AI—ig4o) Welding Code А5—CA8-1939 and Int 352-1952 Helical and Straight Spur Gears BS-436-194о Engineering Drawing Practice BS—зо8-1953 EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass only. The drawing office work will be assessed in the deciding of the examination results.

586. ENGINEERING DESIGN PART . I A A course of i2 lectures and 24 hours' drawing office work. SYLLABUS General approach to design problems and criteria for functional failure. Design stresses, factors of safety and probability of failure. Use of standard specifications and codes. DRAWING OFFICE WORK Preparation of a report and drawings associated with the design of a unit of a chemical pant. EXAMINATION There will be no examination in this subject but the work done by students throughout the course will be assessed for examination purposes. • ' 94 565. - ENGINEERING DESIGN A (Mr Wood, Dr Stevens, Mr Dow) A course of about 60 lectures and lei hours' drawing office or laboratory work through. out the year for Civil Engineering students. SYLLABUS GROUP AI. Structural Theory: A course of twenty-one lectures and fifty hours' practice and laboratory class. Analysis of statically determinate structures; . influence lines, deflections, general structural theory. Introduction to statically indeterminate structures. GROUP AII. Structural Design: A course of twenty-five lectures and about fifty hours' drawing office work. Design of structures—loads, wind pressure, impact effect. Building and bridge frames—bracing of these structures. Working stresses in steel, reinforced concrete and timber. Design of tension and compression members, beams and girders in steel, reinforced concrete and timber. Rivetted and welded connections, timber connections. Design in reinforced concrete. The elements of prestressed concrete. The design of large built-up members. A short course in the writing of English is included in this subject. DRAWING OFFICE WORK Students are required to prepare and submit during the year original designs based on the lecture course. Work submitted will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books : "Timoshenko, S. and Young, D. H., Theory of Structures. (McGraw-Hill.) *Вresler, B. and Lin, T. Y., Design of Steel Structures. (Wiley.) or *Gaylord, E. H. and Gaylord, C. N., Design of Steel Structures. (McGraw-Hill.) *Ferguson, P. M., Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals. (Wiley.) (b) Recommended for reference: Matheson, J. A. L., Hyperstatic Structures, Vols. I. and II. (Butterworth.) Johnson, J. B., Bryan, C. W. and Turneaure, F. E., Modern Framed Structures, Vols. I and III. (Wiley.) Grinter, L. E., Theory of Modern Steel Structures, Vol. I. (Macmillan.) Wilbur, J. B. and Norris, C. H., Elementary Structural Analysis. (McGraw.Hill.) Popov, E. P., Mechanics of Materials. (Ist ed., Prentice-Hall) Seely, F. B. and Smith, J. O., Advanced Mechanics of Materials. (Wiley.) Grincer, L. E., Design of Modern Steel Structures. (and ed., Macmillan.) Priest, H. M., The Practical Design of Welded Steel Structures. (Amer. Welding Soc.) Dunham, C. W., Theory and Practice of Re-inforced Concrete. (McGraw-Hill.) Sutherland, H. and Reese, R. C. S., Reinforced Concrete Design. (Wiley.) Pearson, R. G., Kloot, N. H. and Boyd, J. D., Timber Engineering Design Handbook. (C.S.I.R.O. and M.U.P.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours combined. The results of practical work done during the year will be assessed as part of the examination.

584. ENGINEERING DESIGN PART II Three hours of drawing office work and one hour of tutorial or discussion class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Design of pressure vessels, simple structures, and the mechanical parts of prime movers and other machines. Feasibility studies. EXAMINATION There will be no formal examination; students will be assessed on design projects to be completed during the course, however, any student may be required to submit to a practical test and to resubmit assignments of work performed during the course. 95 599. ENGINEERING DESIGN PART II A Three hours of drawing office work and one hour of tutorial or discussion class per week for two terms. SYLLABUS Design of the mechanical parts of prime movers and other machines. Feasibility studies. EXAMINATION There will be no formal examination; students will be assessed on the design pro ects to be completed during the course, however, any student may be required to submit to a practical test and to resubmit assignments of work performed during the course.

590. ENGINEERING DESIGN PART III (AGRICULTURAL) A course of three hours a week of drawing office work with some lectures and discussion periods. SYLLABUS As in Engineering Design Part III (Mechanical), together with selected lectures from Applied Thermodynamics Part III and from Automatic Control. EXAMINATION One ;-hour paper for Pass only. In order to pass the subject, candidates must reach an adequate standard in their drawing office work throughout the course and in the written paper.:

652. ENGINEERING DESIGN PART III (MECHANICAL) (Mr Clifton) A course of three hours per week of drawing office work including some lectures and discussion periods, during the first half of the year. SYLLABUS Methods of rational design. Optimization procedures. This course consists essentially of practical work in engineering design. Students will be required to carry out one or more major design projects involving the application of theoretical studies undertaken elsewhere in the Mechanical Engineering Course. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass only. In order to pass the subject, students must reach an adequate standard in their drawing office work throughout the course and in the written paper.

653. ENGINEERING DESIGN PART III (INDUSTRIAL) (Mr Svensson, Mr Mansoor) . Three hours per week of drawing office work and some lectures for the first half of the year. SYLLABUS . Product design with special attention to sales potential, cost of production and selection of suitable production methods. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Baldwin, E. N. and Niebel, В. W., Designing for Production. (Irwin.) Bolz, R., Production Processes—Their Influence on Design. (Penton.) Bowman, E. H. and Fetter, R. B., Analysis for Production Management. (Irwin.) EXAMINATION The Design Project will be used to assess the standard of all candidates, 96 574. ENGINEERING DESIGN (MINING) (Mr Aroni) A course of 2.q lectures and about 40 hours' drawing office work. SYLLABUS 1.Analysis of statically determinate structures. Influence lines. Introduction to statically indeterminate structures. 2.Structural materials. Types of structures and loads. Margins of safety. Working stresses. 3. Theory and design of beams and girders in steel. 4. Theory and design of reinforced concrete beams, columns and slabs. ;. Theory and design of steel and timber compression members. Riveted and welded connections; timber connections. DRAWING OFFICE WORK Students are required to prepare and submit during the year original designs based on the lecture course. Work submitted will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books Timoshenko, S. and Young, D. H., Theory of Structures. (McGraw-Hi11.) Grinter, L. E., Elementary Structural Analysis and Design. (Macmillan.) Ferguson, P. M., Reinforced Concrete Fundamentals. (Wiley.) (b) Recommended for reference Norris, C. H. and Wilbur, J. В., Elementary Structural Analysis. (and ed., McGraw-Hill.) Matheson, J. A. L. and Francis, A. J., Hyperstatic Structures, Vols. I and II. (Butterworth.) Gaylord, E. H. and Gaylord, C. N., Design of Steel Structures. (McGraw-Hill.) Pearson, R. G., Kloot, N. H. and Boyd, J. D., Timber Engineering Design Handbook. (C.S.I.R.O. and M.U.P.) Dunham, C. W., Theory and Practice of Reinforced Concrete. (3rd ed., McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. The results of practical work done during the year will be assessed as part of the examination.

560. ENGINEERING MATERIALS (Dr Osborn) A course of approximately 48 lectures and 36 hours' practical work. SYLLABUS (a) Nature and Structure— Elementary physics of the solid state with particular reference to metals, plastics, ceramics, resins, rubber, etc. The interaction of particles forming aggregate structures, e.g. rocks, soils, concrete. Elementary chemistry of cement and its relation to the macro structure of concrete. The structure of timber and fibres. The physico.chemical structures of gases and liquids. (b) Engineering Properties and Behaviour— Mechanical—elasticity and anelasticity, plasticity, strength, fracture, creep, fatigue, etc. Electrical—conduction, insulation, thermo-electric effect. . Magnetic. Dielectric behaviour. Thermal—expansion and conductivity. Nuclear—neutron cross section, radiation damage. Optical—transparency, photo and electro luminescence. Volumetric—swelling and shrinking phenomena. Surface—adhesion, friction, etc. Deterioration—corrosion, organic decay, chemical attack, etc. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book Van ‚lack, L. H., Elements of Materials Science. (Addison-Wesley.) 97 (b) Recommended for reference : . Dieter, G. E„ Mechanical Metallurgy. (McGraw-Hill.) Hiрреl, A R. von, Molecular Science and Molecular Engineering. (Wiley.) Jastrzebski, Z. D.,. Nature and Properties of Engineering Materials. (Wiley.) Jaeger, J. C., Elasticity, Fracture and Flow. (Methuen.) Gensamer, M., Strength of Materials under Combined Stress. (A.S.M.) Goldman, J. E. (ed.), The Science of Engineering Materials. (Wiley.) Guy, A. G., Elements of Physical Metallurgy. (Addison-Wesley.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. All work done in connection with practical work and practice classes will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's work in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination. 553. ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS PART I (Mr Ryan) A course of four lectures and three hours' tutorial and practice classes per week throughout the year. Preliminary reading: At least two of the following : Turnbull, H. W., The Great Mathematicians. (Methuen.) Dantzig, T., Number, the Language of Science. (Allen and Unwin or'Anhor.)ć Smeltzer, D., Man and Number. (Blackie.) Kline, M., Mathematics in Western Culture. (Allen and Unwin.) Rademacher, H. and Toeplitz, O., The Enjoyment of Mathematics. (Princeton U.P.) Abbott, A., Flatland. (Macmillan or Dover.) Titchmarsh, E. C., Mathematics for the General Reader. (Hutchinson.) SYLLABUS 1. Sets, Algebras. Number systems; elementary number theory; complex numbers. Graphs. Limits. Vectors. Introduction to linear algebra and probability. Approximations. Com- putations—arithmetical, graphical and mechanical. • z. Geometry. Polyhedra. Solid angles.. Plane and solid analytical geometry. Elementary topology, projective geometry and non-euclidean geometry.. 3.Calculus. Integration and differentiation; geometrical and physical applications. Series expansions. Partial differentiation. Simple differential equations; physical and chemical applications. 4. Dynamics. Idealizations of physical systems. Principles of mechanics. Motion of a particle, of a system of particles and of rigid bodies. ; Students-will be expected to learn to use manual calculating machines. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books : . Courant, R. and Robbins, H., What is Mathematics? (O.U.P.) Kemeny, J. G., Snell, J. and Thompson, G., Introduction to Finite Mathematics. (Prentice- Hall.) Thomas, G. В., Calculus and Analytic Geometry. (Addison-Wesley.) or Kells, L. M., Analytic Geometry and Calculus. (Prentice-Hall.) Christie, D. E., Intermediate College Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) or Bullen, K. E. Introduction to the Theory of Mechanics. (Science Press.) Kaye, G. and Laby, T., Four Figure Mathematical Tables. (3rd ed., Longmans.) or Knott, C., Four Figure Mathematical Tables. (Chambers.) (b) Recommended for reference: Allendoerfer, C. B. and Oakley, C. 0., Principles of Mathematics. (McGraw-HílL) Kemeny, J. G., Mirkil, H., Snell, J. and Thompson, G. L., Finite Mathematical Structures. (Prentice-Hall.) Courant, R., Differential and Integral Calculus, Vol. I. (Blaсkie,) . Tucke , C. O. and Armistead, W., Coordinate Geometry. (Longmans.) Randolph, J. F., Calculus. (Macmillan) Cauut, G. W., Infinitesimal Calculus. (Oxford.) Weatherburn, C. E., Elementary Vector Analysis. (Bell.) Synge, J. L. and Griffith, B. _A., Principles of Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill. Brand, L., Vectorial Mechanics. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours; the work done in tutorials, practice classes and on test papers will also carry some weight. 98 557. ENGINEERING; MATHEMATICS PART II (Mr Barton) A course of two lectures and two practice classes per week throughout the year. PRELIMINARY READING At the beginning of the year, some knowledge will be required of at least two of : Sawyer, W. W., Prelude to Mathematics. (Pelican.) Struik, D. J., A Concise History of Mathematics. (Bell or Dover.) Hilbert, D. and Cohn-Vossen, S., Geometry and the Imagination. (Chelsea.) Selected topics. Maxwell, J. C., Matter and Motion. (Dover.) Polya, G., Mathematics and Plausible Reasoning. (Princeton U.P.) Weyl, H., Symmetry. (Princeton U.P.) SYLLABUS 1. Vector Analysis. Differentiation and integration of scalar and vector point functions. Vector fields. z. Complex Functions. Exponential and related functions. Periodic phenomena. 3.Integration. Reduction formulae. Improper integrals. 4. Differential Equations. Standard types of equations of first and second orders. Linear equations with constant coefficients, of second and higher orders, and simultaneous systems. 5.Infinite Series. Convergence, and the elementary tests for positive term series. Absolute convergence. Power series and their use in approximate calculations. 6. Functions of Several Real Variables. Multiple integrals. Differentials. Stationary values. Line integrals. 7. Algebra. Boolean algebra; applications to logic, sets and networks. 8. Applications. Geometrical and physical applications. Mechanical and electrical principles. ВООКS Recommended for reference: i. Phillips, H. B., Vector Analysis. (Wiley.) Hague, B., An Introduction tо Vector Analysis. (Methuen.) Gans, R., Vector Analysis. (Blackie.) Weatherburn, C. E., Advanced Vector Analysis. (Bell.) 2. Durell, C. V. and Robson, A., Advanced Trigonometry, Chs. VIII to XIII. (Bell.) Biddons. A. W. and Hughes, R. T., Trigonometry, Part IV. Ch. XVII. (C.U.P.) Maxwell,. E. A., Analytical Calculus, Vol. II. Ch. XI. (C.U.P.) Bowman, F., Elementary Algebra, Part II. Chs. XLIII, XLIV. (Longman.) 3, 4, 5 and 6. Kells, L. M., Analytic Geometry and Calculus. (Prentice-Hall.) Osgood, W. F., Advanced Calculus. (Macmillan.) Courant, R., Differential and Integrai Calculus, z vols. (Blackie.) Salvadori, M. G. and Schwarz, R. J., Differential Equations in ,Engineering Problems. (Prentice-Hall.) Relton, F. E., Applied Differential Equations. (Blackie.) Kaplan, W., Ordinary Differential, Equations. (Addison-Wesley.) Thomas, G. B., Calculus and Analytic Geometry. (Addison-Wesley.) Caunt, G. W., Introduction to Infinitesimal Calculus. (Oxford.), 5. Bowman, F., Elementary Algebra, Part II. Chs. XXXVIII to XLI. (Longgmans.) Durell, C. V. and Robson, A., Advanced Algebra, Vol. II. Ch. XIV. (Bell.) Green, J. A., . Sequences and Series. (Routledge and Kegan Paul.) 7. Allendoerfer, C. B. and Oakley, C. O., Principles of Mathematics, Chs. i and 5. (McGraw- Hill.) Kemeny, J. G., Mirkil, H., Snell, J. L. and Thompson, G. L, Finite Mathematical Structures. (Prentice-Hall.) Nodelman, H. M. and Smith, F. W., Mathematics for Electronics with Applications, Ch. 13. (McGraw-Hill.) 8.Syyngge, J. L. and Griffith, B. A., Principles of Mecháńićs. (McGraw-Hill.) Skilliпg, H. H., Fundamentals of Electric Waves. (Wiley.) Jaeger, J. C., Introduction to Applied Mathematics. (O.U.P.) EXAMINATION One 3•hour paper for Pass and Honours; the work done in practice classes and on test papers will also carry some weight. 99 588. ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS PART II A. A course of two lectures and two tutorials a week for the first half of the year. SYLLABUS A selection of material from sections 1, , 3, 4 and 5 of the syllabus in Engineering Mathematics Part II. г BOOKS AND EXAMINATION As for Engineering Mathematics. Part II. 585. ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS PART III• A course of two lectures and two hours' practice work per week throughout the year. PRELIMINARY READING At the beginning of the year some knowledge will be required of at least two of the following: Bell, E. T., Mathematics, Queen and Servant of Science. (Bell.) Kasner, E. and Newman, J. R., Mathematics and the Imagination. (Simon and Schuster.) Sawyyer, W. W., A Concrete Approach to Abstract Algebra. (Freeman.) Stabler, E. R., An Introduction to Mathematical Thought. (Addison-Wesley.) Bell, E. T., Men of Mathematics. (Pelican.) or another of the books listed for preliminary reading for the previous year. SYLLABUS i. Matrix Algebra. Linear transformations. Rank. Partitioning. Eigenvalues. Applications to vibrating systems, networks and dimensional analysis. z. Vector Analysis. Integral transformations; physical applications. Curvilinear coordinates. Potential theory. ;. Numerical Methods. Curve fitting by least squares. Orthogonal functions. Solution of equations. Finite differences; interpolation, differentiation, integration, solution of differential equations. Relaxation methods. 4. Transform Calculus. Fourier transforms. Laplace transforms. Solution of differential equations. 5.Functions of Real Variables. Functions defined by integrals and differential equations; Bessel and Legendre functions. Partial differential equations. Difference equations. 6. Functions of a Complex Variable. Analytic functions. Conformal transformations. Lap- lace's equation. 7. Abstract Algebra. Groups. Fields. Boolean Algebra. Computations will involve the use of manual and electric calculating machines. BOliG (a) Prescribed text-books Hildebrand, F. B., Advanced Calculus for Applications. (Prentice-Hall, 1861.) Cohn, P. M., Linear Equations. (Routledge and Kegan Paul.) (b) Recommended for reference Phillips, H. B., Vector Analysis. (Wiley.) Hague, B., An Introduction to Vector Analysis. (Methuen.) Wylie, C. R., Advanced Engineering Mathematics. (McGraw-Hill.) Bronwell, A., Advanced Mathematics in Physics and Engineering. (McGraw-Hill.) Pipes, L. A., Applied Mathematics for Engineers and Physicists. (McGraw-Hí11.) Ford, L. R., Differential Equations. (McGraw-Hill.) Carslaw, H. S. and Jaeger, J. C., Operational Methods in Applied Mathematics. (О.U.P.) Margenau, H. and Murphy, G. M., The Mathematics of Physics and Chemistry. (Van Nostrand.) Kannan, T. and Biot, M. A., Mathematical Methods in Engineering. (McGraw-Hill.) Birkhoff, G. and MacLane, S., A Survey of Modern Algebra. (Macmillan.) Scarborough, J. B., Numerical Mathematical Analysis. (Johns Hopkins.) Buckingham, R. A., Numerical Methods. (Pitman.) . Hartree, D. R. Numerical Analysis. (O.U.P.) Jahnke, E. and Emde, F., Tables of Functions. (Dover.) Langhaar, H. L., Dimensional Analysis and Theory of Models. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours, together with prescribed computations during the course. • Subject to approval of previous mathematical performance. , 100 566. ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS PART III A A course of one lecture and an average of one hour practice work throughout the year. PRELIMINARY READING One of the following books Bell, E. T., Mathematics, Queen and Servant of Science. (Bell.) Kasner, E. and Newman, J. R., Mathematics and the Imagination. (Simon and Schuster.) or another of the books listed for preliminary reading for Engineering Mathematics Part II. SYLLABUS A selection of topics from the following: 1.Matrix Algebra. Linear transformations. Inverse of a matrix. 2.Vector Analysis. Integral transformations; equations of hydrodynamics, heat and electromagnetism. 3.Laplace Transforms. Solution of linear differential equations with constant coefficients. 4. Differential Equations. Series solutions; Bessel functions. Simple partial differential equations. 5.Functions of a Complex Variable. Analytic functions. Conformal transformations. 6. Curve Fitting. Method of least squares. Fourier analysis. 7. Finite differences. Interpolation. Numerical integration. Linear difference equations. Computations will involve the use of manual and electric calculating machines. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book Pipes, L. A., Applied Mathematics for Engineers and Physicists. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference Hildebrand, F. B., Advanced Calculus for Applications. (Prentice-Hall, 1961.) Jaeger, J. C., An Introduction to the Laplace Transformation. (Methuen.) Cohn, P. 1., Linear Equations. (Routledge and Kegan Paul.) Scarborough, J. B., Numerical Mathematical Analysis. (Johns Hopkins.) Bronwell, A., Advanced Mathematics in Physics and Engineering. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper together with prescribed computations during the course, for Pass standard only. 594. ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS PART III B A course of two lectures a week and one hour practice/tutorial throughout the year. SYLLABUS 1. As listed in Engineering Mathematics Part III A. 2.. Introduction to Operational Research (See under separate heading). 3.Introduction to the theory of Control Systems, as in Industrial Electronics and Control Syllabus. BOlkS (a) As in Engineering Mathematics Part III A, and McCloskey, J. F. and Toefethen, F. M., Operations Research for Management. (Johns Hopkins.) (b) Prescribed text-book Murphy, G. J., Control Engineering. (Van Nostrand, 195g.) (c) Recommended for reference: Wilts, C. H., Principles of Feedback Control. (Addison-Wesley, 196o.) Grabbe, E. M., Ramo, S. and Wooldridge, D. E., Handbook of Automation, Computation and Control, Vol. I. (Wiley, 1958.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers : one in section (a) (Engineering Mathematics Part III A), and one in sections (b) and (c) together, together with prescribed computations during the course, for Pass standard only. loi 573. ENGINEERING MATHEMATICS PART IV* (Mr Ryan) A course of two lectures and two practice classes weekly throughout the year. For part of the year, three lectures a week may be given, but attendance at only two of these will be required. PRELIMINARY READING At the beginning of the year some knowledge will be required of at least two of : Bell, E. T., The Development of Mathematics. (McGráw-Hi11.) Klein, F., Elementary Mathematics-Arithmetic, Algebra, Analysis. (Dover.) Klein, F., Elementary Mathematics-Geometry. (Dover.) Cohen, M. R. and Nagel, E., An Introduction to Logic and Scientific Method. (Harcourt Brace.) Smith, D. E., A Source Book in Mathematics. (McGraw-Hill or Dover.) Newman, J. R., The World of Mathematics. (Simon and Schuster.) or another of the books listed for preliminary reading for previous years. SYLLABUS 1. Vector Spaces. Vectors and tensors. N dimensional vector spaces. Linear operators. Eigenvectors. Orthogonal expansions. Function spaces. a. Advanced Calculus. Double limit operations. Differentiation and integration. Generalized functions. Non-linear differential equations. 3. Functions of a Complex Variable. Further conformal transformations. Contour integration. Transform calculus. Stability of linear systems. 4. Calculus of Variations. Euler's equations. Hamilton's Principle. Lagrange's equations. Castigliano's Principle. Rayleigh's Principle. 5. Integral Equations. Solution of linear integral equations. Iterative methods. Conversion of diffеrential equations. 6. Linear Programming. Convex sets; extrema. Simplex method. Duality. 7. Extension of treatment of a selection of topics prescribed for Engineering Mathematics Part III. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books : Hildebrand, F. B., Methods of Applied. Mathematics. (Prentice-Hall.) Smith, L. P., Mathematical Methods for Scientists and Engineers. (Prentice-Hall.) (b) Recommended for reference : Courant, R. and Hilbert, D., Methods of Mathematical Physics, Vol. L (Interscience.) Morse, P. M. and Feshbach, H., Methods of Theoretical Physics. (McGraw-Hill.) Osgood, W. F., Advanced Calculus. (Macmillan.) Beckenbach, E. F., Modern Mathematics for the Engineer. (McGraw-Hill.) Lighthill, M. J., Fourier Analysis and Generalized Functions. (Chapman and Hall.) Friedman, В., Principles and Techniques of Applied Mathematics. (Chapman and Hall.) . Sokolnikoff, I. S., Tensor Analysis. (Wiley.) Gibbs, W. J., Tensors in Electrical Machine Theory. (Chapman and Hall.) Stoker, J. J., Non-Linear Vibrations. (Interscience.) Vajda, S., The Theory of Games and Linear Programming. (Methuen.) Saaty, T. L., Mathematical Methods of Operations Research. (McGraw.Hill.) Seе also books listed for Engineering Mathematics Part III. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. The work done in practice classes will also carry some weight. . • Subject to approval of previous mathematical performance. 600. ENGINEERING PRACTICES (Dr Craig and external lecturers) A course of about 4о lectures with periodical practical classes of up to two hours' duration, for Electrical Engineering students. SYLLABUS 1. Business administration—the study of the factors of cost, sources of capital, and other issues relating to industrial activity of concern to the practising engineer. 102. z. Law—contract, tort and workers' compensation. 3.Specifications and Contracts—from the points of view of purchasers, suppliers, con- sultants, or members of standardizing bodies. 4. Electrical Wiring Regulations—their composition, application and enforcement. 5.The writing of English: BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books *Australian Standard C.B. 16-1957, General Conditions of Tendering and Contract for the Supply or Supply and Erection of Plant and Machinery. (Standards Association of Australia.) *Craig, H. F., Australian Case Studies in Business Administration. (b) Recommended for reference Grant, E. L. and Ireson, W. G., Principles of Engineering Economy. Koontz, H. and O'Donnell, C., Principles of Management. , State Electricity Commission of Victoria, Wiring Regulations. Yorston, R. K. and Fortescue, E. E., Australian Mercantile Law. (Law Book Co.) Abbett, R. W., Engineering Contracts and Specifications. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. 568.. FLUID MECHANICS A (Dr Lawson, Mr Joubert, Mr Sharp and Mr O'Neill) 1. Introductory Fluid Mechanics A course of two lectures per week in the first part of the year (approximately зо lectures total), together with practical and tutorial work. SYLLABUS The subject will deal with the basic principles and behaviour of fluids at rest and in motion and will include: statics, kinematics and dynamics of fluids; incompressible flow in closed conduits; compressible flow; flow around immersed bodies; fluid machinery; flow measurement dynamical similarity. PRACTICAL WORK Tutorial classes and laboratory work, totalling about 3б hours, relating to the above course. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book *Albertson, M. L., Barton, J. R. and Simons, D. B., Fluid Mechanics for Engineers. (Prentice-Hall.) Except for those students taking Fluid Mechanics part I, in which case the prescribed text-book is : Hunsaker, J. C. and Rightmire, B. G., Engineering Applications of Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference Hunsaker, J. C. and Rightmire, B. G., Engineering Applications of Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Vennard, J. K., Elementary Fluid Mechanics. (Wiley.) Streeter,V. L., Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Streeter, V. L., Fluid Dynamics. (McGraw-Hill.) Barna, P. S., Fluid Mechanics for Engineers. (Butterworth.) Prandtl, L. and Tietjens, D. G., Applied Hydro and Aero Mechanics. (Dover.) Prandtl, L. and Tietjens, D. G., Fundamentals of Hydro and Aero Mechanics. (Dover.) Prandtl, L., The Essentials of Fluid Dynamics. (BIacide.) Schuhmann, R., Metallurgical Engineering, Vol. 1. (Addison-Wesley Press,' 1952.) 2. Applications in Hydraulic Engineering A course of two lectures per week following syllabus t (approximately zo lectures total) together with practical and tutorial work. SYLLABUS Flow of liquids over weirs and in channels; flow of liquids in pipe systems; operation characteristics of hydraulic machinery; elaboration of some aspects of syllabus i. 103 PRACTICAL WORK Tutorial classes and laboratory work, totalling about 24 hours, relating to the above course. BOOKS As for syllabus i. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. There will be no practical examination, but the written paper may include questions on the practical work. The practical and tutorial work will be assessed in deciding the examination results. Candidates may be required to resubmit their practical books before the examination. 575. FLUID MECHANICS B (Dr Lawson, Mr Joubert, Mr Sharp and Mr O'Neill) As for Fluid Mechanics A syllabus i together with lectures only of syllabus 2. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass standard only. There will be no practical examination, but the written paper may include questions on the practical work. The practical work will be assessed in deciding the examination results. Candidates may be required to resubmit their practical books before the examination.

587. FLUID MECHANICS C (Dr Lawson and Mr Joubert) As for Fluid Mechanics A syllabus i. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass standard only. There will be no practical examination, but the written paper may include questions on the practical work. The practical work will be assessed in deciding the examination results. Candidates may be required to resubmit their practical books before the examination.

654. FLUID MECHANICS PART I (Dr Lawson and Mr Joubert) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year together with laboratory and practice classes. . SYLLABUS i. Introductory Fluid Mechanics. As for Fluid Mechanics A syllabus i. 2. Classical Hydrodynamics. Stream functions; circulation; vorticity; velocity potentials; complex potentials; conformal transformations; Kutta-Joukowski conditions; Schwarz-Christoffel theorem; free streamlines; three dimensional vortex motion. 3. Gas Dynamics. One dimensional flow; energy relations; shock waves; entropy changes; flow in nozzles; oblique shock waves. PRACTICAL WORK z4 hours of tutorial classes and зб hours of laboratory work relating to the above course. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books : Hunsaker, J. C. and Rightmire, В. G., Engineering Applications of Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Streeter, V. L., Fluid Dynamics. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference: Barna, P. S., Fluid Mechanics for Engineers. (Butterworth.) Streeter, V. L., Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Prandtl, L., The Essentials of Fluid Dynamics. (Blackie.) 104 Prandtl, L. and Tietjens, O. G.,'Applied Hydro and Acro Mechanics. (Dover.) Prandtl, L. and Tietjens, O. G., Fundamentals of Hydro and Acro Mechanics. (Dover.) Lamb, H., Hydrodynamics. (Dover.) Rutherford, D. E., Fluid Dynamics. (Oliver and Boyd.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. The first paper will cover the work from syllabus i. There will be no practical examination but the written papers may include questions o the practical work. . The practicalп and tutorial work will be assessed in deciding the examination results. Candidates may be required to resubmit their practical books before the examination.

655. FLUID MECHANICS PART II (Mr Joubert) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year together with laboratory and practice classes. SYLLABUS 1. Gas Dynamics. Mach lines; characteristics; hodographs, Prandtl-Meyer expansions; Ackeret theory; small perturbations. z. Wing Theory. Prandtl lifting line; three dimensional effects. 3.Pumps, fans, compressors, propellers and jets. Froude momentum theory; blade element theory, axial flow fans and pumps; centrifugal machines. 4. Boundary Layers. Navier-Stokes equations; Prandtl's assumptions; Laminar solutions; Von Karman's integral relations; Thwaite's solution; transition; turbulence; turbulent boundary layer; velocity defect law, Tetervin's method; three dimensional effects; Cole's wake function; compressible boundary layers, shock wave interaction; heat transfer. , PRACTICAL WORK Laboratory work totalling about thirty-six hours given in the first half of the year set under Mechanical Engineering Laboratory' plus some further tutorials. A number of projects from this subject will then be set in Mechanical Engineering Project. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books Duncan, Thom and Young, The Mechanics of Fluids. (Arnold.) Kuethe and Schetzer, Foundations of Aerodynamics. (Wiley.) Liepmann, H. W. and Roshko, Elements of Gasdynamics. (Wiley.) (b) Recommended for reference: Pope, Wind Tunnel Testing. (Wiley.) Pankhurst and Holder, Wind Tunnel Technique. (Pitman.) Hoerner, Aerodynamic Drag. (Hoerner.) Goldstein, Modern Developments in Fluid Mechanics, Vols. I and II. (Oxford.) Howarth, Modern Developments in Fluid Mechanics. High Speed Flow, Vols. I and II, (Oxford.) Thwaites, Incompressible Aerodynamics. (Oxford.) Glauert, Aerofoil and Airscrew Theory. (Cambridge.) Theodorsen, Theory of Propellers. (McGraw-Hill.) Vavra, M. H., Aero Thermodynamics and Flow in Turbo Machinery. (Wiley.) Schlichting, Boundary Layer Theory. (McGraw-hill.) High Speed Aerodynamics and Jet Propulsion. (Princeton.) Knudsen and Katz, Fluid Dynamics and Heat Transfer. (McGraw-Hill.) Wallis, Axial Flow Fans. (Newnes.) Von Mises, R., Theory of Flight. (Dover.) . Pai, Shih-I., Viscous Flow Theory, Vols. I and II. (Van Nostrand.) Dommasch, D. O., Principles of Aerodynamics. (Pitman.) Miles, E. R. C., Supersonic Aerodynamics. (Dover.) Rotty, R. M., Introduction to Gas Dynamics. (Wiley.) 1о5 EXAMINAТTдN One 3-hour paper for Final Pass and Honours. Sore further questions on more advanced aspects of the course will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours in conjunction with questions from other subjects. In order to pass the subject candidates must reach a satisfactory standard both in the practical work and in the written papers. 356. GEOLOGY PART I A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory and field work, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Elementary Tectonic and Dynamical Geology, Physiography, Crystallography, Mineralogy, Petrology, Palaeontology and Stratigraphy. LABORATORY.WORK Three hours per week, dealing with the study of geological maps and the examination of crystal models, minerals, rocks and fossils. FIELD WORK Six field excursions, including two whole-day excursions held on Saturdays. Excursion reports may be used in the assessment of candidates' examination results. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Any of the books recommended for reference below under 'General Reading'. (b) Prescribed text-books *Rutley, F. (ed. Read), Elements of Mineralogy. (23rd or later ed., Murby.) *Harker, A., Petrolоgy for Students. (C.U.P.) *Hills, E. S., The Physiography of Victoria. (Whitcombe & Tombs.) *Woods, H., Palaeontology. (8th ed., C.U.P.) (c) Recommended for reference : (i) General Reading. Any of the following: Gilluly, J., Waters, C. A. and Woodford, A. O., Principles of Geology. (Freeman.) Read, H. H., Geology. (H.U.L.) Longwell, C. R. and Flint, R. F., Introduction to Physical Geology. (Wiley.) Brown, H. E., Monnett, V. E. and Stovell, J. W., Introduction to Geology. (Ginn.) Dapples, E. C., Basic Geology for Science and Engineering. (Wiley.) Garrels, R. M., A Textbook of Geology. (Harper.) Emmons. W. H., Thiel, G. A., Stauffer, C. R. and Allison, I. S., Geology. (McGraw-Hill.) von Engeln, 0. D. and Caster, K. E., Geology. (McGraw-Hill.) Leet, D. L. and Judson, S., Physical Geology. (Prentice-Hall.) Kirkaldy, F. J. F., General Principles of Geology. (Hutchinson.) Dury, G. H., Face of the Earth. (Penguin.) (z) Petrology: Pirrson, L. V. and Knopf, A., Rocks and Rock Minerals. (Wiley.) Tyrrell, G. W., The Principles of Petrology. (Methuen.) Spock, L. E., Guide to the Study of Rocks. (Harper.) The library of the Department of Geology is open to students, and advice as to reading on any special section of the work will be given by members of the Staff. EXAMINATION One 3 hour written paper, one practical test of 3 hours, ao minutes. 604. GEOLOGY PART I (METALLURGY) A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory and field work (omitting lectures in Palaeontology and Stratigraphy). SYLLABUS Elementary Tectonic and Dynamical Geology, Physiography, Crystallography, Mineralogy and Petrology. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week, dealing with the study of geological maps and the examination of crystal models, minerals and rocks. 106 FIELD WOŘK Six field excursions, including two whole•day excursions held on Saturday. Excursion reports may be used in the assessment of candidates' examination results. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading Any of the books recommended for reference below under 'General Reading'. (b) Prescribed text-books: *Rutley, F. (ed. Read), Elements of Mineralogy. (23rd or later ed., Murby.) Harker, A., Petrology for Students. (C.U.P.) *Hills, E. S., The Physiography of Victoria. (Whitcombe & Tombs.) (c) Recommended for reference (i) General Reading. Any of the following: Gilluly, Jo Waters, C. A. and Woodford, A. 0., Principles of Geology. (Freeman.) Read, H. H., Geology. (H.U.L.) Longwell, C. R. and Flint, R. F., Introduction to Physical Geology. (Wiley.) Brown, H. E., Monnett, V. E. and Stovell, J. W., Introduction to Geology. (Ginn.) Dapples, E. C., Basic Geology for Science and Engineering. (Wiley.) Garrels, R. M., A Textbook of Geology. (Harper.) Emmons, W. H., Thiel, G. A., Stauffer, C. R. and Allison, 1. S., Geology. (McGraw-Hill.) von Engeln, O. D. and Caster, K. E., Geology. (McGraw-Hill.) Leet, D. L. and Judson, S., Physical Geology. (Prentice-Hall.) Kirkaldy, F. J. F., General Principles of Geology. (Hutchinson.) Dury, G. H., Face of the Earth. (Penguin.) ; (z) Petrology Pirrson, L. V. and Knopf, A., Rocks and Rock Minerals. (Wiley.) Tyrr ll, G. W., The Principles of Petrology. (Methuen.) Spock,е L. E., Guide to the Study of Rocks. (Harper.) The library of the Department of Geology is open to students, and advice as to reading on any special section of the work will be given by members of the Staff. EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one practical test of 3 hours ao minutes. 363. GEOLOGY. PART II A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory and field work, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Crystallography, Mineralogy, Petrology, Palaeontology, Stratigraphy, and Structural Geology. LABORATORY WORK Six hours per week. FIELD WORK Nine field excursions, of which two may be week-end excursions spent in the field, and the remainder day excursions held on Saturdays during the session. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Students should seek advice on vacation reading at the end of their First Year. (b) Prescribed text-books *Dana, E. S., Text-Book of Mineralogy. (Wiley.) . *Kerr, P. F., Optical Mineralogy. (McGraw-Hill.) ' *Woods, H., Palaeontology. (8th ed., C.U.P.) *Hills, E. S., Outlines of Structural Geology. (Methuen.) Harker, A., Petrology for Students. (C.U.P.) (c) Recommended for reference: Phillips, F. C., An Introduction to Crystallography. (LLоngmans.} Wade. F. A. and Mattox, R. B., Elements of Crystallography and Mineralogy. (Harper.) Hartshorne, N. H. and Stuart, A., Crystals and the Polarizing Microscope. (Arnold.) Wahlstrom, E. E., Optical Crystallography. (Wiley.) Winchell, A. N., Elements of Optical Mineralogy, Part I. (Wiley.) Wahlstrom, E. E., Petrographic Mineralogy. (WHey.) Tyrrell, G. W., Principles of Petrology. (Methuen.) 1о7 Harker, A., Metamorphism. (Methuen.) Shrock, R. R. and Twenhofel, W. H., Principles of Invertebrate Palaeontology. (McGraw- Hill.) Moore, R. C., Lalicker, C. G. and Fischer, A. G., Invertebrate Fossils. (McGraw-Hí11.) David, T. W. E., The. Geology of the Commonwealth of Australia. (Arnold.) Gignoux, M., Stratigraphïc Geology. (Freeman.) Dunbar, C. 0. and Rodgers, J., Principles of Stratigraphy. (Wiley.) Students should make full use of the library in the Geological Department for reference purposes, and help will be given by members of the Staff in the selection of suitable literature. • EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers; three 3-hour practical papers. 572. GEOLOGY PART II (MINING) As for Geology Part II, but omitting Stratigraphy and Palaeontology. 637. HYDROLOGY (Mr Alexander, Mr Sharp and Mr O'Neill) A course of one lecture per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Fluid pressure. Concept of a perfect fluid, streamlines. Bernoulli's theorem and applications. Orifices, flow meters, notches arid weirs. Viscous theory, boundary layers, laminar and turbulent flow in closed and open conduits. Rainfall; evaporation; percolation; frequency and intensity of storms; measurement of rainfall; stream gauging. Rainfall—run-off relationship; effect of nature of watershed. Use of hydrographic records for prediction in connection with water supply, drainage and irrigation. Data for erosion control. . BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book: Linsley, R. K., Kohler, M. A. and Paulhus, J. L. H., Hydrology for Engineers. (McGraw- Ill.) (b) Recommended for reference: Linsley, R. K., Kohler, M. A. and Paulhus, J. L. H., Applied Hydrology. (McGraw-Hill.) Streeter, V. L., Fluid Mechanics. (McGraw-Hill.) Wisler, C. 0. and Brater, E. F., Hydrology. (Wiley.) Johnstone, D. and Cross, W. P., Elements of Applied Hydrology. (Ronald Press.) Hydrology Handbook. (Prepared by the Hydrologic Committee of the Hydraulics Division of the American Society of Civil Engineers.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass standard only. 232. INDUSTRIAL ADMINISTRATION A course of two lectures and one tutorial class per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS 1. Organization. Organization as the framework of management. Formal and informal organization. Authority, power and status. The individual and the organization. z. Managing a Business. The nature and functions of management. Planning, direction, control and staffing. Management and psychology. Management and the community. Towards a theory of management. BOOKS PIescribed text-books: Barnard, C. I., The Functions of the Executive. (Harvard.) *Brown, J. A. C., The Social Psychology of Industry. (Pelican.) Drucker, P. F., The Practice of Management. (Harper.) Koontz, M. and O'Donnell, C., Principles of Management. (McGraw-Hill.) Newman, W. H., Administrative Action. (Pitman.) *Newman, W. H. and Sumner, C. E., The Process of Management. (Prentice-Hall.) *Simon, H. A., Administrative Behaviour. (Macmillan.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. 108 583. INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS AND CONTROL. (Mr Catгavas, Mr King-Smith) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year and approximately 60 hours' laboratory work. SYLLABUS 1. Vacuum gas and semi-conductor electron devices. Graphical and equivalent circuit analysis of Amplifiers. Rectifiers. Pulse circuits. z. Practical applications of electronics and electronic circuits. . 3. Introduction to closed-loop systems. The nature of closed-loop systems. Transfer functions. Response of closed-loop systems. Transient response. Stability criteria. Error constants. LABORATORY WORK Approximately 60 hours on experiments and projects related to the course. No student will be admitted to the final examination without evidence of satisfactory laboratory work. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books *Ryder, J. D., Engineering Electronics with Industrial Applications and Control. (McGraw- Hill.) D'Azzo, J. J. and Houpis, C. H., Feedback Control System Analysis and Synthesis. (McGraw-Hill.)t (b) Recommended for reference: De Witt, D. and Rossoff, A. L., Transistor Electronics. (McGraw-Hill.) Gray, T. S., Applied Electronics. (Wiley.) Kloeffler, G., Industrial Electronics and Control. (Wiley.) Cheng, D. K., Analysis of Linear S stems. (Addison-Wesley.) Harris, L. D., Introduction to Feedback Systems. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. t (This is recommended for acquisition only by those students intending to proceed to Automatic Control, where it will be the prescribed text-book.) 630. INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING PART I (Mr Svensson, Mr Brown) A course of two lectures per week and 65 hours' practical work throughout the year. SYLLABUS Manufacturing Processes. Principles of cutting, tool life, cutting fluids, chip control. Machining properties of materials. Abrasive processes, ultrasonic, electrospark and chemical methods of material removal. Influence of process on surface finish. Welding, influence of materials on welding processes. Shearing and plastic forming processes of bending, stretching, forging and extrusion. Moulding of metallic and non-metallic materials. Machine Tools. Generation of machined surfaces. Kinematic analysis, specification and inspection of machine tools. Work capacity, accuracy of size control and vibrations in machine tools. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book: Black, P. H., Theory of Metal Cutting. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference: Shaw, M. C., Metal Cutting Principles. (3rd ed., Massachusetts Inst. of Technology.) Ernst, H. and others, Machining Theory and Practice. (A.S.M.) A.S.T.E., Tool Engineers Handbook. (McGraw-Hill.) Alexander, J. M. and Brewer, R. C., The Manufacturing Properties of Materials. (Van. Nostrand.) Johnson, W. and Mellor, P. В., Plasticity for Mechanical Engineers. (Van Nostrand.) American Society of Mechanical Engineers, Manual on Cutting of Metals. (A.S.M.E•) Tourret, R., Performance of Metal-cutting Tools. (Butterworth.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. 109 632. INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING PART II (Professor Henderson, Mr Brown, Mr Mansoor, Mr Svensson) A course of three lectures per week and practical work throughout the year. SYLLABUS Engineering Metrology. Principles of length, angular and surface texture measurement. Comparison of measurement and limit gauging. Principles of construction and use of metrological instruments for static and dynamic measurement of size, form and position. Sources afd correction of errors in measurement. Principles of gauging, design of gauges. Specification and Control of Quality. Specifications for quality. Statistical methods as a guide to design and production planning. • Industrial. Experimentation. Planning of experiments, analysis of results. Work Study. History—Gilbreth and others. Field of work study, definitions and application. Human aspects, effect of work study on manager, supervisor and operator. Method study, procedures and analysis. Work measurement, time study. Work unit, rest allowances. Applications to: Job Evaluation, Planning, Incentives, Labour Cost Control. Geometrical Analysis of Engineering Design. Standards of Limits and Fits. Specification and interpretation of tolerance for size, form and position. Application of geometric tolerances. Gauging principles, distribution of tolerances between reference, inspection and workshop gauges. The dimensional analysis of tolerances on length and on position, design for interchange- ability. Probability theory applied to tolerances. Eficiency of Production. Economy of effort, materials, machines, man-power as affecting the design of product and planning of manufacturing processes. Cost analysis of manufacturing processes. Factors affecting machines selection and replacement and the use of special devices and machines. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books : . B.S. 308-195 3, Engineering Drawing Practice. .. B.S. 1916-1953, Parts r and z. Limits and Fits. Hume, K. J., Engineering Metrology. (Macdonald.) (b) Recommended for reference: . Rolt, F. H., Gauges and Fine Measurement. (Macmillan.) Grant, E. L., Statistical Quality Control. (McGraw-Hill.) Davies, O. L., Statistical Methods in Research and Production. (Oliver and Boyd.) Davies, O. L., The Design and Analysis of Industrial Experiments. (Oliver and Boyd.) Barnes, R. M., Motion. and Time Study. (Wiley.) Bowman, E. H. and Fetter, R. B., Analysis for Production Management. (Irwin.) Maynard, H. B. (ed.), Industrial Engineering Handbook. (McGraw-Hill.) , Parker, S., Drawings and Dimensions. (Pitman.) Baldwin, E. N. and Niebel, B. W., Designing for Production. (Irwin.) Bolz, R:, Production Processes—their Influence on Design. (Penton.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Final Pass and Honours. Some further questions oп more advanced aspects of the course, together with questions from other subjects, will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours. Final Honours candidates will also be required to submit an essay on an approved subject not later than 1st December. In order to pass the subject, candidates must reach a satisfactory standard in both practical work and written papers.

659. INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING (M) (Professor Henderson, Mr Brown, Mr Mansoor, Mr Svensson) A course of about sz lectures and seminar lasses, with practical work. SYLLABUS Principles of metal cutting. Engineering Metrology. Geometrical Analysis of Engineering Designs. Specification and Control of Quality. Industrial Experimentation. Work Study. Principles and performance of machine tools. 110 PRACTICAL WORK Three hours per week for about half the year. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books: B.S. 3 8-íg53; Engineering Drawing Practice. B.S. tgib-íg53,о Limits and Fits for Engineering Parts I and II. (b) Recommended for reference : Weidman, N. E. and Gibbons, R. C., Machinability and Machining of Metals. (McGraw- Hill.) Black, P. H., Theory of Metal Cutting. (McGraw-Hill.) . Rolt, F. H., Gauges and Fine Measurements, Vols. i and z. (Macmillan.) Hume, K. J., Engineering Metrology. (Macdonald.) Parker, S., Drawing and Dimensions. (Pitman.) Bowman, E. H. and Fetter, R. B., Analysis for Production Management. (Irwin.) Maynard, H. B. (ed.), Industrial Engineering Handbook. (McGraw-Hill.) Barnes, R. M., Motion and Time Study: (Wiley.) Davies, O. L., Statistical Methods in Research and Production. (Oliver and Boyd.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Final Pass and Honours. Some further questions on more advanced aspects of the course, together with questions from other subjects, will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours. . In order to pass the subject, candidates must reach a satisfactory standard in both practical work and written papers. • . 660. INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY Nine hours per week during the first half of the year, on experiments and practice classes associated with the subject matter in the fourth year. No student will be admitted to the Final Examinations without evidence of satisfactory laboratory work which will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. Records of laboratory work must be submitted as required. 661. INDUSTRIAL ENGINEERING PROJECT On the completion of Engineering Design Part III (Industrial) and Industrial Engineering Laboratory, all students will be required to undertake a special project. This may cover an investigation or design relating to some aspect of Industrial. Engineering. The time allotted is approximately izo hours. The student will be required to write a thesis and present a paper on the results of his project. No student will be admitted to the Final Examinations without evidence of satisfactory Project work which will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. 631. INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT PART I A course of 68 lectures throughout the year with tutorial classes. . SYLLABUS History of industrial development, development of the factory system, types of ownership, partnership, companies, employer associations, trade unions. Outline of the theory of economic systems, cost analysis and control, principles of estimating, elements of the legal system, law of contract, elements of law of tort, arbitration agency, industrial law, history of development of management, changes in the philosophy of management- specialization—the functional system, functions to be performed by management. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books Filippetti, G., Industrial Management in Transition. (Irwin, 19iá•) Koontz, M. and O'Donnell, C., Principles of Management. (McGraw-Hill, 1955.) Robertson, G. A., Engineering Management. (Blackie.) Rubinstein, R., John Citizen and the Law. (Pelican.) (b) Recommended for reference Fayol, H., General and Industrial Management. (Pitman.) Hammond, Rise of Modern Industry. (Methuen.) 111 Metcalf and Urwick, Dynamic Administration. (Management Prod. Trust Ltd.) • Kimball, D. S» Principles of Industrial Organization. (McGraw-Hill.) Spriеgel, W. R. and Lansburgh, R. H., Industrial Management. (5th ed., Wiley, 1955.) Amrroe, H. T., Ritchey, J. A. and Hulley, O. S., Manufacturing Organization and Management. (Prentice-Hall, 1957.) Sawer, G„ Australian Government Today. (I.U.P.) Cheshire and Fifoot, Law of Contract. (Butterworth.) Street, H., Law of Tort. (Butterworth.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for. Pass and Honours. 634. INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT PART I A (for Chemical Engineers only) A course of i8 lectures throughout the year. SYLLABUS History of industrial development; development of the factory system; types of ownership, partnership, companies. History of development of management, changes in the philosophy of management—specialization—the functional system, functions to be performed by management. Books (a) Prescribed text-books: Filippetti, G., Industrial.Management in Transition. (Irwin, 1953.) Koontz, M. and O'Donnell, C., Principles of Management. (McGraw-Hill, 1955.). Robertson, G. A., Engineering. Management. (Blackie. (b) Recommended for reference Fayol, H., General and Industrial Management. (Pitman.) Hammond, Rise of Modern Industry. (Methuen.) Metcalf and Urwick, Dynamic Administration. (Management Prod. Trust Ltd.) Kimball, D. S., Principles of Industrial Organization. (McGraw-Hill.) Spriegel, W. R. and Lansburgh, R. H., Industrial Management. (5th ed., Wiley, 1955.) Arrroe, H. T., Ritchey, J. A. and Hulley, O. S., Manufacturing Organization and Management. (Prentice-Hall, 1957.) EXAMINATION One z-hour paper for Pass only. 633. INDUSTRIAL MANAGEMENT PART II

A course of 3 lectures per week and zб hours' practical work throughout the year. SYLLABUS Industňal organization, еflìciеncy of production, standardization and simplification of materials and pproducts, organization of unit, batch and flow production, selection of plant, materials handling, process control and inspection, automatic methods, plan location and design, operation of a productive plant. Principles of management, responsibility of management to the community, industry, employees, customers, and the company. Labour payment systems, job evaluation. In- dustrial health and safety engineering. Labour selection and placement. Human relations in industry. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books: Foenander, O. de R., Industrial Conciliation and Arbitration in Australia. (Law Book Co. 1959•) Foenander, O. de R., Trade Unionism in Australia. (Law Book Co., 196і.) Maynard, H. B., Industrial Engineering Handbook. (McGraw-Hill, 1956.) (b) Recommended for reference Heinrich, H. W., Industrial Accident Prevention. (McGraw-Hill, 1941.) McCormick, E. J., Human Engineering. (McGraw-Hill, 1957.) Shapanis, A., Garner, W. R. and Morgan, G T., Applied Experimental Psychology. (Wiley, 1949.) 112 Viteles, M. S., Motivation and Morale in Industry. (Staples Press, London, 1954.) Apple, J. M., Plant Layout and Materials Handling. (N.Y. Ronald Press Co., 1950.) Bolz, H. A., Materials Handling Handbook. (N.Y. Ronald Press Co., 1958.) MacNiece, E. M., Production Forecasting, Planning and Control. (Wiley & Sons, 1951 .) Brown, R. G., Statistical Forecasting for Inventory Control. (McGraw-Hill, 1959.) Reinfeld, N. V., Production Control. (Prentice Hall 1959) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Final Pass and Honours. Some further questions on more advanced aspects of the course, together with questions from other subjects, will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours. Final Honours candidates will also be required to submit an essay on an approved subject not later than 1st December. In order to pass the subject, candidates must reach a ` satisfactory standard in both practical work and written papers: INTRODUCTION TO OPERATIONAL RESEARCH A course of ia lectures. See also Engineering Mathematics Part III (b). The nature and general method of operational research. The scope and application of specific operational research techniques, including linear programming, simulation models, theory of queues, theory of stock control, decision functions, theory of games, experimental design, statistical control. PRESCRIBED BOOK McCloskey, J. F. and Trefethen, Florence N., Operations. Research for Management. (Johns Hopkins.) Note. This course forms part of the subject Engineering Mathematics Part III В but may be taken separately. 641. THE LAW OF PROPERTY IN LAND (Mr A. L. Turner) A course of about io-la lectures. SYLLABUS (a) Introduction : Common and Statute Law. Reception of English Law into Australia. Real and Personal Property. Land tenure and its history. Estates in land, freehold and lease- hold. Licences. Interests_ in land of other persons: easements and profits. Qualifications of the rights of ownership: planning legislation, invalid conditions, etc. Land as a security: mortga es. Transfer of land: the common law and the Transfer of Land Act. The extinction of interests in land: adverse possession. (b) To obtain a pass in this subject, candidates must also attend the lectures and pass the examination in laws and Regulations for Surveyors.'t EXAMINATION One a-hour paper for Pass only. t A full-year course conducted by the Royal Melbourne Institute of Technology and delivered by a member of the professional staff of the office of Titles. The course begins in February, and an examination is held in November. A pass at this examination will gain exemption from examination and credit for the subject 'Laws and Regulat ions' in the examinations of the Surveyors Board of. Victoria. 663. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING LABORATORY Nine hours per week during the first half of the year, on experiments and practice classes associated with the subject matter of the optional subjects in the fourth year. No student will be admitted to the Final Examinations without evidence of satisfactory laboratory work which will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. Records of laboratory work must be submitted periodically as required. 664. MECHANICAL ENGINEERING PROJECT . On the completion of Engineering Design Part IV (Mechanical) and Mechanical Engineer- ing Laboratory, all students will be required to undertake a special project. This may cover an investigation or design relating to some aspect of Mechanical Engineering. The time allotted is approximately izo hours. The student will be required to write a thesis and present a paper on the results of his project. No student will be admitted to the Final Examinations without evidence of satisfactory Project work which will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. 113. 605. METALLURGICAL CHEMISTRY A course of approximately 50 lectures in physical chemistry, with special reference to metallurgical examples. SYLLABUS Ideal gas, kinetic theory, real gas, first law of thermodynamics, heat of reaction. Hess's law. irchhoff's law, reversible and irreversible processes, Carrot cycle, second law of thermodynamics,К entropy, maximum and net work functions, the liquid state, vapour pressure, surface energy, chemical equilibrium, chemical potential, activity, thermodynamics of ideal and real solutions, solutions of electrolytes, reversible cells, electrode potentials, kinetics of electrode processes, general equilibrium conditions, heterogeneous equilibria, pressure-temperature composition relations, reaction rate kinetics, atomic structure and periodic table, valence. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books : *Moore, W. 1., Physical Chemistry. (3rd ed., Longmans Green and Co.) or *Glasstone, S., Elements of Physical Chemistry. (Nostrand.) (b) Recommended for general reading and reference: Everett, D. H., Chemical Thermodynamics. (Longmans.) Steiner, L. E., Introduction to Chemical Thermodynamics. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. (Pass standard only.) 606. METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING PART I

A course of 25 lectures together with approximately 75 hours' practical work and 25 hours' practice classes. SYLLABUS 1. Mechanical Behaviour (a) Stress and strain states: Definitions—true and nominal, stresses and strains. Generalized state of stress. Stresses on any plane. Principal stresses and strains. Deviator and spherical components. (b) Possible Responses to Mechanical Environment. (i) Short-term deformation responses. The three ideal responses, Hookean elasticity. Newton viscosity, Rigid plastic. Non-ideal responses. Non-Hookean elasticity. Time dependent elasticity, поп-Newtonian viscosity, Visco-elasticity. Elastic plastic, strain hardening plastic, strain-softening plastic. (ii) Short- term fracture responses. Cleavage. Interparticle, Ductile—characteristic, (iii) Long-term responses. Creep and creep fracture. Fatigue-characteristics, time and temperature dependence. (iv) Mechanical Tests. Load and deformation mies and responses. Tensile, compression, hardness, notched bar, torsion, fatigue, creep. z. Analysis of Stress and Strain (Portion of the syllabus of Strength of Materials Part II). (i) Bending of Beams. Pure Flexure. Stress-strain distributions, elastic non-elastic behaviour. Bending about two axes. Principal axes. Shear and Bending. Distribution of shear stresses for bending about principal axes. Stress trajectories. (ii) Deflections of Beams. Analytical Methods. Integration. Macaulay Moment Area. Conjugate Beam Shear deformation. (iii) Superposition. (iv) Reciprocity. PRACTICE CLASSES One hour per week on calculations and discussions pertinent to the lecture topics. PRACTICAL WORK Three hours per week on experiments and calculations pertinent to the lecture syllabus. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book: Dieter, G. E., Mechanical Metallurgy. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference : The books recommended for reference for Strength of Materials Part II A. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. • All work done in connection with practical work and practice classes will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's work in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination. 114 609. METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING PАRТ II (Dr Cannon) A course of 36 lectures, together with practical work. SYLLABUS Process Engineering. 1. Heat Transfer. Conduction, convection and radiation, steady and transient states, heat exchangers, regenerators, recuperators, waste heat boilers. 2.. Mass Transfer. Theory of diffusion controlled processes, ion exchange, solvent extraction, humidifying, drying, cooling, counter current decantation. 3. Phase Separations. Filtering, settling, cyclones and centrifuges. 4. Refractories. Their selection and testing, furnace design and construction. PRACTICAL WORK. Approximately 75 hours on experiments relating to the syllabus. BOОKS Recommended for reference Brown, C. G. et al. Unit Operations. (Chapman and Hall, Wiley.) McAdams, W. H., Heat Transmission. (3rd ed., McGraw-Hill, 1954.) ' Schuhmann, Metallurgical Engineering. (Addison-Wesley, 1952.) Treybal, R. E., Mass Transfer Operations. (McGraw-Hill, 1955.) U.S. Steel Co., The Making, Shaping and Treating of Steel. (7th ed.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. Al work done in connection with practical work and practice classes will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's work in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination.

612. METALLURGICAL ENGINEERING PART III (Dr Cannon, Mr Hoggart, Mr Borland) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year together with practical work. SYLLABUS 1. Production Metallurgy. Selection and control of metal shaping processes. Foundry engineering. Welding engineering. Surface coatings and treatments. Surface hardening processes. Defects in metallic products. Non-destructive testing. 2.. Engineering Practice. Selection, testing characteristics and fields of application of engineering equipment commonly used in metallurgical operations. Materials handling. Power , supply and transmission. Fuel technology. Typical metallurgical plant practice. 3. Engineering Metallography. Selection of materials. Specifications and tests. Special ferrous and non-ferrous alloys including heat-, wear-, and corrosion-resistant alloys. "Typical selection problems. PRACTICAL WORK Approximately 40 hours of experiments, seminars,. practice classes, and works visits relating to the above syllabus. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books : Students are advised to consult the lecturers. (b) Recommended for reference The books recommended for Metallurgical Engineering Parts I and II, together with : Hinsley, J. F., Non-destructive Testing. (Macdonald and Evans, 1954.) Metals Handbook, 1gбo, Vol. I. (Amer. Soc. Metals.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. All work done in connection with practical work, practice classes and excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's work in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination. • 607. METALLURGY PARТ I A course of about 85 lectures, with practice classes, practical work and excursions throughout the year. SYLLABUS 1. Materials Science (a) Fundamentals of structure and statistical thermodynamics (z units). States of aggrega- tion of matter. The randomness concept of entropy. Free energy and its use in relation to phase diagrams. Crystalline solids. Crystallography. Crystal structures in relation to types of interatomic bonding. Techniques of crystallography. Multiphase structures. Amorphous materials. . (b) Structure and properties (Thermal Electrical and Magnetic) (i unit). Interatomic forces. Introduction to wave-mechanical concepts, Sommerfeld model and Band model of a solid. Interpretation of elasticity, thermal expansion, specific heat, electrical and thermal conductivity, dielectric properties, thermal and photo-emission, thermo-electricity, and magnetic properties in terms of theories covering metals, semi-conductors, insulators. Typical examples, including electronic devices. . (c) Structural origins of mechanical behaviour (i unit). Elasticity in relation to interatomic bonds. Viscosity; ideal fluids and non-ideal fluids. Visco-elasticity. Plasticity. Fracture (short-term); cleavage, interparticle failure, ductile fracture. Ductile-brittle transitions. Creep. Fatigue. z. Materials Processing. (a) Introduction to systems for separating materials. (i unit). Characteristics of raw materials. Assembly of raw materials. Factors affecting physical separations. Preparation of materials for processing. Size reduction and size separation. Liberation. Factors affecting chemical processing operations. Mass transfer techniques. Energy requirements for processing. Chemical energy. Fuels. Conversion of chemical energy to heat. Methods of heat transfer. (b) Separation of materials (i unit). Separations of: solid from solid, solid from liquid, solid from gas, liquid from liquid, liquid from gas, gas from gas. (c) Preparation of materials for utilization (i unit). Technological aspects of processing materials to make both metals and non-metals. Examples of integrated processes for producing metals. Mechanical processing of products, e-g. casting, compacting, rolling, . etc. Preparation of products for transport and storage. PRACTICE CLASSES One hour per week on calculations, discussions and demonstrations illustrating the principles of materials science and materials processing. PRACTICAL WORK A minimum of six hours per week on experiments dealing with: (a) Chemical Metallurgy. Quantitative and qualitative analyses of ores, metallurgical products and alloys. Fire assaying of ores for gold and silver. Experiments on phase separations in metallurgical systems. (b) Physical Metallurgy. Metallography and Physics of Metals. EXCURSIONS Excursions will be arranged periodically to local industries. Attendance at these is considered as part of the year's work, and a report must be written on each visit. VACATION WORK Students are strongly advised to consult the Appointments Board during the second term, with the object of obtaining experience in a metallurgical industry or establishment during the summer vacation. . BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading : Blainey, G., The Peaks of Lye '. (M.U.P:) Farwell, G., Down Argent Street. (Johnson, Sydney.) (b) Prescribed text-books: Gaudin, A. M., Principles of Mineral Dressing. (McGraw-Hill.) Boas, W., An Introduction to Physics of Metals and Alloys. (M.U.P.) • 116 Brick, R. M. and Phillips. A» Structure and Properties of Alloys. (znd ed., McGraw- Iill. *Cottrell, A. H., Theoretical Structural Metallurgy. (Arnold.) *Guy, A. G., Elements of Physical Metallurgy. (2nd ed., Addison-Wesley.) or *Chalmers, B., Physical Metallurgy. (Wiley.) Kehl, G. L., Principles of Metallographic Laboratory Practice. (3rd ed., McGraw-Hill.) Masing, G. (F. C. Thompson trans.), Foundations of Metallography. (The Institute of Metals, London.) Van Vlack, L. H., Elements of Materials Science. (Addison-Wesley.) Other newly published books may be prescribed instead of the above. Students are therefore advised to consult the lecturers before purchasing text-books. (c) Recommended for reference Ore Dressing Methods in Australia and Adjacent Territories. (Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress (1943) Publications, Vol. III.) Butts, A., Metallurgical Problems. (ind ed., McGraw-Hill.) Newton, J., Extractive Metallurgy. (Wiley.) Barrett, C. S., Structure ,of Metals. (2nd ed., McGraw-Hill.) Desch, C. H., Metallogra hy. (5th ed., Longmans.) Doan, G. E., The Principles of Physical Metallurgy. (3rd ed» McGraw-Hill.) Hume-Rothery, W., Atomic Theory for Students of Metallurgy. (znd ed., The Institute of Metals.) Hume-Rothery, W. and Raynor, G. V» Strućture of Metals and Alloys. (3rd ed., The Institute of Metals, London.) Lumsden, J., Thermodynamics of Alloys. (Inst. of Metals.) Rhines, F. N., Phase Diagrams in Metallurgy. (McGraw-Hill.) Seybolt, A. V. and Burke, J. E., Procedures in Experimental Metallurgy. (Wiley.) Taylor, A., X-ray Metallography. (Wiley.) EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year and two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours; a one-day practical examination may be given. All work done in connection with practical and practice classes and excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's work in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination. • 608. METALLURGY PART II (E) (Professor Worner, Associate Professor Dunkin, Mr Willis, Mr Carr, Dr Wood) A course of about 80 lectures, with practice classes, practical work and excursions throughout the year. SYLLABUS 1. Ore Dressing. Comminution; crushing and grinding practice and theory. Screen sizing. Motion of solid particles in fluids. Classification. Gravity methods of concentration; heavy media separation, jigging, tabling, etc. Centrifugal, magnetic and electrostatic concentration. Flotation concentration: Introduction to flotation systems, consideration of phases and interfaces, chemical preparation of minerals for flotation, complex relationships involving collectors; foams and flotation froths; technology. z. Physical Chemistry of Metal Extraction. Chemical behaviour of metals in relation to their metallurgy. Producer gas and water gas reactions. Equilibria in reduction of metallic oxides: affinity of metals for oxygen and sulphur; preferential oxidation. Equilibria between slag and metal phases in steel-making. Electro-chemistry in relation to production and refining of metals. Roasting of sulphides. Rate of heterogeneous reactions. Production and reactions of mattes. Simple applications of physico-chemical methods to metallurgical reactions. Gases in metals. 3. Physics of Solids. Further study of atomic arrangements : lattice energy, thermal vibrations, diffusion. Structure and mechanical properties: dislocations, strain-hardening, recrystallization, creep, fatigue, fracture. Further study of electron structure (zone model); alloy theory, conduction in metals and semi-conductors, magnetic materials, practical applications to solid-state devices. , 4. Metallography. Thermodynamics of alloys. Functions and effects of the alloying elements in steel. Detailed study of the formation and modes of transformation of austenite. Quenching media. Tempering and ageing in steel. Properties of heat treated steels. Quench cracking and dimensional stability. Surface treatment of steels. Relation between properties and microstructure. 1i7 PRACTICE CLASSES One hour per week on discussions, demonstrations and calculations illustrating the principles of ore dressing, extractive metallurgy and physical metallurgy. PRACTICAL WORK A total of 26о hours, involving experiments and calculations dealing with the following topics (a) Ore Dressing. Liberation, comminution, sizing, hydraulic classification, electrical separation, tabling, flocculation and flotation. (b) Chemical Metallurgy. Qualitative and quantitative analysis of steels, non-ferrous alloys, ores and metallurgical products. Instrumental methods of analysis including electro- analysis, polarography and absorptiometry. (c) Physical Metallurgy. Determination of physical and mechanical properties of metals. X-ray diffraction techniques. EXCURSIONS Visits to metallurgical industries and establishments will be arranged from time to time. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books The books prescribed for Metallurgy Part 3, together with : •Butts, A., Metallurgical Problems. (znd ed., McGraw-Hill.) Barrett, C. S., Structure of Metals. (гпd ed., McGraw-Hill.) Cullity, B. D., Elements of X-Ray Diffraction. (Addison-Wesley.) Raynor, G. V., Electron Theory of Metals. (Institute of Metals, London.) Other newly-published books may be prescribed instead of the above. Students are therefore advised to consult the lecturers before purchasing. (b) Recommended for reference: The books recommended for Metallurgy Part I, together with : Gaudin, A. M., Flotation. (2nd ed., McGraw-Hill, 1957.) Ore Dressing Methods in Australia and Adjacent Territories. (Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress (1953) Publications, Vol. III.) Kabine, P., Flotation Plant Practice. (Mining Pub.) Sutherland, K. L. and Wark, I. W., Principles of Flotation. (Aus. T.M.M., 1955.) Taggart, A. F., Elements of Ore Dressing. (Wiley.) Darken, L. S. and Gurry, W. R., Physical Chemistry of Metals. (McGraw-Hill.) Physical Chemistry of Process Metallurgy. (Faraday Soc., Disc. No. 4, 1948.) Sisco, F. T. (ed.), Basic Open-hearth Steelmaking. (A.I.M.E.) Bain, E. C., Alloying Elements in Steel. (Amer. Soc. Metals.) Bullens, D. K., Steel and its Heat Treatment. (5th ed., Wiley.) Hollomon, J. and Jaffe, L., Ferrous Metallurgical Design. (Wiley.) Impurities and Imperfections. (Amer. Soc, Metals.) Relation of Properties to Microstructure. (Amer. Soc. Metals.) EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year, and four 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours; a three-day practical examination may be given. All work done in connection with practical and practice classes and excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's work in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination. .. .

611. METALLURGY PART. III (Professor Werner, Associate Professor Dunkin, Mr Willis, Mr Carr, Dr Wood, Mr Hoggart) A course of about ioo lectures for Pass, and 125 lectures for Honours, throughout the year. In addition there are practice classes, discussions and practical work. Three optional courses are available, permitting some specialization in any one of the following: • (a) Ore Dressing . (b) Extraction Metallurgy (c) Physical Metallurgy. 118 SYLLABUS 1.Ore Dressing. A more advanced treatment of the topics listed under the heading `Ore Dressing' in the details for the subjects Metallurgy Part I and Metallurgy Part II, including : thickening, filtration, relation of ore dressing to hydro- and pyro-metallurgy, treatment of gold and uranium ores, mineral economics, mineragraphic examinations applied to the control of ore dressing practice, relationships between metallurgical and economic efficiencies in ore dressing. Design of treatment plants. Plant operation and control. Selected topics in flotation, with particular reference to testing. The surface chemistry of systems involved in flotation operations. 2. Extraction Metallurgy. The iron blast furnace, its functions, design, chemical and physical control. Steelmaking by the Bessemer, open-hearth, electric and oxygen methods. Production of ferroalloys. Steel ingots. Electrolytic recovery and refining of metals. Examples of metallurgical practice in the production of zinc, copper, lead, aluminium, etc. Extraction of reactive metals. . Physical Metallurgy. A more advanced treatment of topics selected from the following: з Atomic and electron structures of solids and their practical applications. Thermodynamics of alloys; short- and long-range order in solutions. Mechanism of phase changes; nucleation and growth; age hardening; order-disorder transformations; martensitic transformations; diffusion. Interfacial energy. Internal friction. Deformation and fracture. Dislocation Theory.Hardenability. of steels. 4. Mechanical Metallurgy. Plasticity theory and its applications to typical mechanical working processes including forging, rolling, wire drawing, extrusion, deep drawing. g. Materials for Nuclear Reactors. Introduction to nuclear engineering. (The production, utilization and properties of metallic materials of importance in nuclear engineering will be covered in the lectures on ore dressing, process metallurgy, and physical metallurgy.) PRACTICE CLASSES One hour per week on discussions, demonstrations and calculations illustrating the principles of ore dressing, extraction metallurgy and physical metallurgy. PRACTICAL WORK A minimum of ia hours per week. Ore Dressing: Ore examination and testing, including mineragraphy, sampling, sizing and concentration of ores and assaying of products. Chemical Metallurgy: Experiments illustrating the principles of metal extraction and refining. Electro-metallurgy. Sрectrоgraphy. Physical Metallurgy: Experiments dealing with metalloggra hy; mechanical, physical and non-destructive testing; metal shaping processes; X-ray diffraction and metal physics. ,. PROJECTS Each student will be required to carry out a literature survey and an investigation appropriate to the student's field of specialization. Final Honour candidates will be expected to attain a higher standard in their projects. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Bray, J. L., Ferrous Production Metallurgy. (Wiley.) (b) Prescribed text-books : The books prescribed for Metallurgy Parts I and II, together with *Edwards, A. B., The Textures of Ore Minerals and their Significance. (Aus. LM.M.) Taggart, A. F., Handbook of Mineral Dressing. (ind ed., Wiley.) • Hoffman, O. and Sachs, G., Introduction to the Theory of Plasticity for Engineers. (McGraw-Hill.) (c) Recommended for reference The books recommended for Metallurgy Part II, together with : Adam, N. K., The Physics and Chemistry of Surfaces. (O.U.P., 1941.) Honours only. Short, M. N., Microscopic Determination of the Ore Minerals. (U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 914•) Weiser, H. B., Colloid Chemistry. (Wiley, 1939.) Elliott, G. D. and Bond, J. A., Practical Iron Making. (United Steel Companies.) • . Mathewson, C. H. (ed.), Zinc. (Rheinhold.) Refining of Nonferrous Metals. (Inst. Min.Met., London.) •Cottrell, A. H., Dislocations and Plastic Flow in Crystals. (Oxford.) . 119 Grossmann, M., Principles of Heat Treatment. (Amer. Soc. Metals.) Read, W. T., Dislocations in Crystals. (McGraw-Hí11.) Sully, A. H., Metallic Creep: (Butterworth.) Glasstone, S., Principles of Nuclear Reactor Engineering. (Macmillan.) EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year, and three written papers for Pass, four for Honours. A three-day practical test may be given. All work done in connection with practical and tutorial classes, and excursions will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's work in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for submission if required in connection with the Annual Examination.

581. MINERAL INDUSTRY MANAGEMENT (Associate Professor Dunkin, Mr Nevi11) A course of about зa lectures. SYLLABUS The following topics are dealt with in general terms and with special reference to the mining and metallurgical industries : Development of industry. Principles of management. Organization of industry. Elements of book-keeping. Control of supplies, stores, production, personnel, etc. Accounts, costs, budgets, finance. Accident prevention; health and hygiene. Mine and plant location and design, lighting, housing, the town and community. Brief introduction to the law relating to contracts, partnerships, companies, mines, factories, etc. Planning, research, education and training. Valuation of mining properties (for mining students only). Mineral economics : The pattern of mineral and metal trade, trends in production and use, buying arid selling, cost of production, the Australian position. FINAL HONOURS ' Students who elect to take Final Honours must consult with the Head of the Department at the beginning of the academic year. These students may be set additional work during the year. Books Recommended for reference: Spriegel, W. R. and Lansburgh, R. H., Industrial Management. (Wiley.) Alford, L. P., Principles of Industrial Management. (Ronald.) Bethel, L. L., Atwater, F. S., Smith, G. H. and Stackman, H. A., Industrial Organization and Management. (McGraw-Hill.) Metcalf, H. C. and Urwick, L., Dynamic Administration. Fayol, H., General and Industrial Management. (Pitman.) Aitchison, L., Introduction to Industrial Metallurgy. (Macdonald & Evans.) The Law relating to Factories and Shops in Victoria. (Vict. Govt. Printer.) . The Companies Act. (Vict. Govt. Printer.) The Mines Acts of the Australian states and other countries. Heinrich, H. W., Industrial Accident Prevention. (McGraw-Hill.) Publications of the Standards Association of Australia. Publications of the Department of Labour and National Service. Publications of the Bureau of Mineral Resources. The Paley Report. (U.S. Govt: Printing Office.) • The Malone Report. (U.S. Govt. Printing Office.) For Mining students only Parks, R. D., Examination and Valuation of Mineral Property.. (Addison-Wesley.) Safety in Coal Mines. Vol. s. (I.L.O., 1g53•) Safety Code. (Prevention of Accidents Committee, Transvaal Chamber of Mines, íg53•) McAdam and Davidson, Mine Rescue Work. (Oliver & Boyd.) EXAMINATION , One 3-hour paper. 120 671. MINERAL PROCESSING A course of three lectures per week with practical work. SYLLABUS Introduction to engineering systems involving mineral processing. Characteristics of and assembly of raw materials. Factors affecting physical processing; preparation of minerals for processing-physical size reduction and size separation; liberation; energy requirements. Conditions affecting chemical processing; techniques of mass transfer and reaction vessels; energy requirements. Separation of materials including solid-solid, solid-liquid, solid-gas, liquid-liquid, liquid-gas and gas-gas systems with reference to mineral processing. Preparation of materials for utilization : Technological aspects of processing with reference to production of various materials both metallic and non-metallic; examples of integrated processes. Preparation of materials for marketing. . PRACTICAL WORK About 111 hours. 576. MINING PART I (Associate Professor Dunkin, Mr Nevill) A course of two lectures a week throughout the year with practical work. SYLLABUS 1. Prospecting, exploration and development, drilling, explosives, blasting (z units). z. Support of excavations, principal underground and surface mining methods, mine sampling (t unit). 3. Introduction to rock mechanics, the elements of design of mining excavations and equipment (1 unit). PRACTICAL WORK Three hours per week of excursions, practical work and practice classes. Candidates may be required to visit mines and other places associated with mining at times to be arranged during the year. A charge of £1 will be made for use of apparatus in the laboratory. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading : • Alexander, W. and Street, A., Metals in the Service of Man. (Pelican.) Blainey, G., The Peaks of Lyell. (M.U.P.) Farwell, G., Down Argent Street. (Johnson, Sydney.) Haddock, M. H., Cultural Contacts of Mining. (Routledge & Kegan Paul, 1949.) Read, J., Explosives. (Pelican.) (b) Prescribed text-books Lewis, R. S., The Elements of Mining. (znd ed., Wiley.) or Young, G. J., Elements of Mining. (4th ed., McGraw-Hill.) Gregory, C. E, Explosives for Engineers. (Q'ld. U.P., 196o.) (c) Recommended for reference: McAdam, R. and Westwater, R» Mining Explosives. (Edinburgh, Oliver and Boyd.) Davis, T. L., Chemistry of Powder and Explosives. (Wiley.) Реele, R., Mining Engineer's Handbook. (3rd ed., Wiley.) Hoover, H. C., Principles of Mining. (McGraw-Hill.) Beringer, B., Underground Practice in Mining. (nd ed., Mining Publications.) Stoces, B., Introduction to Mining. (Eng. ed., Lange, Maxwell & Springer, 1954.) Cumming, J. D., Diamond Drill Handbook. (and ed., Toronto.) Symposium on Diamond Drilling. (Journal of the. Chemical, Metallurgical and Mining Society of South Africa, Vol. 5", No. io, Part z, April, 1g3z.) Mining Methods in Australia and Adjacent Territories. (Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress (1953) Publications, Vol. II.) Jeppe, C. W. B., Gold Mining in the Witwatersrand. (Transvaal Chamber of Mines.) Tyler, P. McI., From the Ground Up. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION Tests throughout the year and one 3-hour written paper. Practical work done during the course will be assessed as part of the annual examination. Reports of assignments in practical work and excursions should be indexed and suitably bound in a folder and retained for resubmission on the last day of examination in Mining Part I, if required. 12.1 577. MINING PART II (Associate Professor Dunkin, Mr Nevi11) A course of 84 lectures, with practical work. SYLLABUS 1.Tunnelling and miпе development. 2. Gases and dust in mine atmospheres. 3. Mine ventilation and drainage. 4. Stoping, deep level mining, petroleum exploration and production. 5. Open pit and alluvial mining methods. 6. Underground mining of bedded deposits. 7. Мiпе examination and valuation. (Additional units on special topics may be prescribed for Final Honours candidates.) PRACTICAL WORK About 2, hours per week. Candidates may be required to visit mines and other places associated with mining at times to be arranged during the year. A charge of f i will be made for the supply of materials. FINAL HONOURS Students who elect to take Final Honours must consult with the Head of the Department at the beginning of the academic year. These students may be set additional work during the year. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Leith, C. K., Mineral Valuations of the Future. (A.I.M.E.) Marriott, Men, Money and Mines. (A.I.M.E.) Tyler, P. McI., From the Ground Up. (McGraw-Hill.) Rickard, T. A., A History of American Mining. (A.I.M.E., McGraw-Hill.) Jeppe, C. W. В., Gold Mining in South Africa. (Todd.) Jones, W. R., Minerals in Industry. (Pelican.) (b) Prescribed text-books Roberts, A. (ed.), Mine Ventilation. (Cleaver-Hume Press.) Isaacson, E. D. St. Q., Rock Pressure in Mines. (Mining Pub . Ltd.) Рeelе, R., Mining Engineer's Handbook. (3rd ed., Wiley.) (c) Recommended for reference Spalding, J., Deep Mining. (Mining Publications.) Metal Mining Practice. (U.S. Bur. Mines Bull. No. 41g.) Mining Methods in Australia and Adjacent Territories. (Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress (1953) Publications, Vol. II.) Australian Mining and Metallurgy—Miscellaneous Features and Practices. (Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress (1953) Publications, Vol. V.) Coal Mining: Report of the Technical Advisory Committee: Ministry of Fuel and Power. (H.М.S.O.) Mason, E., Practical Coal Mining for Miners, Vols. I and II. (2nd ed., Virtue, 1951.) Statham, I. C. F., Coal Mining Practice, 4 vols. (Caxton, 1958.) Coal Miner's Pocket Book. (McGraw-Hill.) Sinclair, J., Winning Coal. (Pitman, 196o.) Nelson, A., Methods of Working. (Thos. Wall, 1958.) Symposium on Shaft Sinking and Tunnelling. (1959.) (Inst. Min. Eng.) ' Engineering Factors in the Ventilation of Metal Mines. (U.S. Bur. Mines Bull. No. 385.) Dobrin, Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting. (McGraw-Hill.) Silicosis, Pneumoconiosis and Dust Suppression in Mines. (Inst. Min. Eng. and Inst. Mining and Met.) Reference should also be made to the journals of Mining and Metallurgical Societies in Australia, England, U.S.A., Canada and South Africa, and also to mining periodicals published in these countries. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour written papers. Additional tests may be set throughout the year. Practical work done during the course will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. Reports of assignments in practical work and excursions should be indexed and suitably bound in a folder and retained for resubmission on the last day of examination in Mining Part II if required. 122 578. МINING DESIGN (Mr Nevi11) A course of about four hours per week throughout the year, involving computations, study of mine plans, design and layout of workings and plant, discussions of practice. SYLLABUS The layout of mine workings in relation to the strength of rock, the shape, size and grade of orebody. The basis of selection and design of electrical, mechanical and structural equipment for mines. PRACTICAL WORK Calculations, designs and drawings with specifications and estimates, are to be completed by the student and submitted for examination at such times during the year as may be notified. FINAL HONOURS Students who elect to take Final Honours must consult with the Head of the Department at the beginning of the academic year. These students may be set additional work during the year. BOOKS Recommended for reference: Staley, W. W., Mine Plant Design. (McGraw-Hill.) Eaton, L., Practical Mine Development and Equipment. (McGraw-Hill.) Thomae, F. A. W., Power Plants on Metal Mines. (Mining Publications.) Broughton, H. H., Electric Winders. (Benn.) Peele, R., Mining Engineers Handbook. (3rd ed., Wiley.) Given, I. A., Mechanical Loading of Coal Underground. (McGraw-Hill.) Richardson, H. W. and Mayo, R. S., Practical Tunnel Driving. (McGraw-Hill.) Tillson, В. F., Mine Plant. (A.I.M.E.) Symposium on Shafts and Shaft Sinking. (Chem. Met. Min. Soc. S. Africa.) Wire Ropes in Mines—Proceedings of a Conference held in September, 195o. (Inst. Min. and Met., 1951.) EXAMINATION There is no formal examination. Candidates are judged on the work presented during the course. Reports of assignments in practical work should be indexed and suitably bound in a folder and retained for resubmission on the last day of examination in Mining Part II if required. 579. MINING GEOLOGY A course of about 40 lectures, together with laboratory and field work. SYLLABUS The character and distribution of mineral, coal and oil deposits. The principles governing their formation illustrated by examples from mining fields. Applications of Geophysics to mineral location. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week throughout the year. The practical work may be assessed in the deciding of the examination results. , • . FIELD EXCURSION One excursion of two or more days at a time to be arranged. FINAL HONOURS Students who elect to take Final Honours must consult with the Head of the Department at the beginning of the academic year. These students may be set additional work during the year. BOOks (a) Preliminary reading: ' Jones, W. R., Minerals in Industry. (Pelican.) (b) Prescribed text-books: Hills, E. S., Outlines of Structural Geology. (Methuen.) 123

(c) Recommended for reference Raistrick and Marshall, Nature and Origin of Coal and Coal Seams. (Eng. Univ. Press.) Lindgren, W., Mineral Deposits. (McGraw-Hill.) Emmons, W. H., Principles of Economic Geology. (McGraw-Hill.) Niggli, P., Ore Deposits of Magmatic Origin. (Murby.) Edwards, A. B., Textures of the Ore Minerals. (Aus. I.M.M.) Edwards, A. B. (ed.), Geology of Australian Ore Deposits. (Aus. I.M.M.) Dobrin, M. B., Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting. (znd ed.» McGraw-Hill, ig6o.) Levorsen, A. I., Geology of Petroleum. (Freeman.) Phillips, F. C., The Use of Stereographic Projection in Structural Geology. (Arnold.) Students should make full use of the library in the Geology Department for reference purposes, and help will be given by members of the Staff in the selection of suitable literature. EXAMINATION One 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical paper (an additional paper may be set for Final Honours candidates). 669. OPERATIONAL RESEARCH . A course consisting of two hours of lectures and two hours of practical work weekly throughout most of the year. SYLLABUS General principles and method. The phases of operational research.' Mathematical and statistical models of operational phenomena. Optimization. Mathematical programming (linear and dynamic); optimal sequencing. Life-table methods, with applications to recruiting and replacement. Matrix methods (including input-output analysis). Theory of games, with applications to policy decisions. Statistical control. Sampling inspection and decision procedures. Trend determination and forecasting. Design and analysis of fact-finding surveys, with applications (e.g.) to con- sumer research and work measurement. Design of industrial experiments. Tests of significance. Evolutionary operation. Cause-tracing by regression methods. Simulation models and the theory of queues applied to congestion and stock control. Applications of computers, with design of simple flow diagrams. Books (a) Prescribed text-book Sasieni, M., Yaspan, A. and Friedman, L., Operations Research, Methods and Problems. (Wiley.) (b) Recommended for reference: Churchman, C. W., Ackoff, R. L. and Arnoff, E. L. Introduction to Operations Research. (Wiley.) Herdan, G., Quality Control by Statistical Methods. (Nelson.) . McCloskey, J. F and Trefethen, F. N., Operations Research for Management. (Johns Hopkins.) McCloskey, J. F. and Coppinger, J. M., Operations Research for Management. Vol. II. (Johns Hopkins.) Bowman, E. H. and Fetter, R. B., Analysis for Production Management. (Irwin.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and a practical test. 580. ORE DRESSING (Associate Professor Dunkin, Mr Carr) A pass course of about go lectures and seminars with practical work; in addition, about 15 lectures and a practical project for final honour candidates. - SYLLABUS A more advanced treatment of the topics listed under the appropriate headings in the details for the subjects Mining Part I or Metallurgy Part I and Metallurgy Part II, including: thickening, filtration, relation of ore dressing to hydro- and pyro-metallurgy, treatment of gold and uranium ores, mineragraphic examinations applied to the control of ore dressing practice, relationships between metallurgical and economic efficiencies in ore dressing. Design of treatment plants. Plant operation and control. Selected topics in flotation with particular reference to testing. The surface chemistry of systems involved in flotation operations. - 124 Books (a) Prescribed text-books *Gaudin, A. M., Principles of Mineral Dressing. (McGraw-Hill.) Edwards, A. В., The Textures of the Ore Minerals and Their Significance. (Aus. I.M.M.) Sutherland, K. L., and Wark, I. W., Principles of Flotation. (Aus. I.M.M.,1955.) Gaudin, A. M., Flotation. (гпd ed., McGraw-Hill, 1947.) Taggart, A. F., Handbook of Mineral Dressing. (znd ed., Wiley.) (b) Recommended for reference Milling Methods, (Trans. A,I.M.E., 1930, 1934, 1939, 1943, 1946, 1949.) Michell, F. В., The Practice of Mineral Dressing. (Electrical Press, 1950.) Brown, G. G., et al., Unit Operations. (Chapman and Hall, Wiley, 1950.) Short, M. N., Microscopic Determination of the Ore Minerals. (U.S. Geol. Survey Bull. 914•) Taggart, A. F., Elements of Ore Dressing. (Chapman and Hall, Wiley, 1951.) Ore Dressing Methods in Australia and Adjacent Territories. (Fifth Empire Mining and Metallurgical Congress (1853) Publications, Vol. III.) Adam, N. K., Physics and Chemistry of Surfaces. (0.U.P., 1941.) Honours only. Moilliet, J. L., and Collie, B., Surface Activity. (Spon, 1951.) Verwey, E. J. W. and Overbeek, J. T. G., Theory of the Stability of Lyophobic Colloids.' (Elsevier, 1948.) Weiser, H. B., Colloid Chemistry. (Wiley, 1939.) . PRACTICAL WORK - Three hours per week throughout the year. Additional work for final honour candidates. A charge of fa will be made for the use of apparatus in the laboratory. FINAL HONOURS Students who elect to take Final Honours must consult with the Head of the Department at the beginning of the academic year. These students may be set additional work during the year. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. ' Additional tests may be set throughout the year. The practical work of candidates is judged on the experiments conducted during the course. Reports of assignments in practical work should be indexed and suitably bound in a folder and retained for resubmission on the day of examination in Ore Dressing if required. 642. PHOTOGRAMMETRY (Mr S. G. Bervoets) A course of three lectures per week and six hours' practical work per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS General introduction to photogrammetry and mapping. Stereoscopic measurements. Geometrical principles of the photograph. Radial triangulation, slotted templates, plani- retry from aerial photographs. General perspective theorems, graphical and optical rectification. Elements of stereo-photogrammetry, measurement of parallax differences, relative and absolute orientation, model deformations. . Camera calibration, various distortions affecting perspective quality of photographs. Plotting instruments. Principles of aero-triangulation. Specifications for photography. Navigation, control surveys. Production of maps. PRACTICAL WORK The equivalent of six hours per week devoted to field, laboratory and office work, tutorial classes and excursions. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book: Hallert, B., Photogrammetry. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Recommended for reference References will be given in lectures from time to time. EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. There will be no formal practical examination; the practical work performed during the year will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. However, any candidate may be required to submit to a practical test and to resubmit field notes and assignments of work performed during the course. 12.5 555. PHYSICS PART I (ENGINEERING COURSE) A course of three lectures per week, with laboratory work, throughout the year. A knowledge of Physics to the standard of the Matriculation examination will be assumed. SYLLABUS A selection from the following topics Introduction. The method and scope of physics; units and dimensions. Molecular physics. Kinetic theory: interpretation of pressure, molecular speeds and Max- well-Boltzmann distribution, mean free path, specific heat, equipartition of energy; transport phenomena, thermal conductivity and viscosity. Intermolecular forces: elasticity; surface phenomena; the solid state, crystallography. Wave motion. Kinematics; longitudinal and transverse waves, the wave equation. General wave properties; reflection, refraction, interference, diffraction, the Doppler effect, dispersion, polarization, attenuation. Dynamics; wave speed; energy and momentum carried by wave; intensity; boundary conditions at normal incidence. Applications; selected topics from the fields of acoustics, optics and thermal radiation. The structure of the atom. Alpha-particle scattering; Rutherford-Bohr theory. Complex atoms and quantum numbers, optical and X-ray spectra. The nucleus. Electricity and electromagnetism. Electrostatics; electric field and potential, capacitance. Direct current circuits. Magnetic induction; motion of charged particles in electric and magnetic fields. Electromagnetic induction; inductance. Alternating currents. Electrical properties of matter. A brief account of the classical and/or the quantum concepts of current flow, thermionic emission, thermal e.m.f.'s, magnetic and dielectric effects, the photoelectric effect and semi-conductor phenomena. LABORATORY WORK Three hours per week. The practical work of each student is examined continually during each term. Records of his success in experiment and impressions of his work are kept. This information is taken into account in assessing the results (including the Class List) at the Annual Examination; students whose practical work is unsatisfactory or who have not attended sufficient classes may be debarred from sitting for the written paper. An additional test in practical work may be given. Although it is not essential, students are advised to obtain a slide rule for use in laboratory work. An apparatus fee of f y must be paid to the University Branch of the National Bank, using a specially stamped bank slip obtained from the Enquiry Room on the Third Floor, Barry Building. This bank slip must be shown to the demonstrator during the first practical class. The full fee is retained as no charge will be made for reasonable wear and tear of the apparatus. . BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book: *Jolly, W. P., Physics for Electrical Engineers. (E.U.P.) (b) Recommended for additional reading: Resnick, R. and Halliday, D., Physics for Students of Science and Engineering Parts I and II. (Wiley.) Caro, D. E. and McDonell, J. A. and Spicer, B. M., Modern Physics. (Cheshire.) Sears, F. W. and Zemansky, M. W., University Physics. (ind ed., Addison-Wesley.) Copeland, P. L. and Bennett, W. E., Elements of Modern Physics. (O.U.P.) Note:. This is the prescribed text-book for Physics II (Engineering). . EXAMINATION . One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours combined. 559. PHYSICS PART II (ENGINEERING COURSE) A course of about зб lectures and practice classes. SYLLABUS Introduction to Modern Physics, Relativity, Electromagnetic Waves, Quantum effects, Wave-particle duality, Quantum mechanics, Physics of Nuclear Engineering. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book : *Copeland, P. L. and Bennett, W. E., Elements of Modern Physics. (O.U.P.) 126 (b) Recommended for additional reading: Wehr, M. R. and Richards, J. A., Physics of the Atom. (Addison-Wesley.) Blanchard, C. H., Burnett, C. R., Stoner, R. G. and Weber, R. G. Introduction to Modern Physics. (Pitman.) EXAMINATION Examinations will be held during the year.

657. PHYSICAL CHEMISTRY A course of approximately 40 lectures in physical chemistry with demonstrations and about too hours' practical work in physical chemistry. SYLLABUS Selected topics from molecular theory, thermodynamics, reaction kinetics, surface chemistry. molecular structure, electrolysis, catalysis, radio chemistry. The apparatus in the practical course is supplied by the Chemistry Department; a fee must be paid and evidence of payment produced before practical classes begin. EXAMINATION One 3.hour paper in Physical Chemistry for Pass and Honours.

369. PRINCIPLES OF GEOPHYSICS A course of about 40 lectures; and three hours' practical work per week, throughout the year. SYLLABUS General: Purpose and scope of Geophysics. The size and shape of the earth. Density of the earth. The age of the earth. Elements of Oceanography. . Gravity: The acceleration due to gravity and its measurement. The earth's gravitational field. Variation with height. Local variations on the surface of the earth. Types of anomalies; methods of gravity computation. Gravity maps. Relation of gravity to geology. Magnetism: The earth's magnetism; anomalies and variations with time. Magnetic properties of rocks. Measurements of the earth's magnetic field. Relation for magnetic anomalies to geology. Seismology: Wave propagation. Types of seismic waves. Earthquakes. Time-distance curves. The structure of the interior of the earth. Exploration seismology; refraction and reflection techniques. Structural investigations. Thermal Properties: Temperature measurements and thermal conductivity of the earth. Temperatures within the earth. Electrical: Telluric currents. Spontaneous polarization. Resistivity of rocks. Self potential and resistivity measurements. Radioactivity: Radioactivity of rocks and distribution of radioactivity on the surface of the earth. Radioactive age determinations. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: . Bates, D. R., The Planet Earth. Chaps. 1-7. (Pergamon, 1957.) Jeffreys, H., Earthquakes and Mountains. (and ed., Methuen, 195o.) (b) Prescribed text-books: Jacobs, J. A., Russell, R. D. and Wilson, J. T., Physics and Geology. (McGraw-Hill, 1959.) Dobrin, M. D., Introduction to Geophysical Prospecting. (and ed., McGraw-Hill, 1960.) (c) Recommended for reference: Blackett, P. M. S., Lectures on Rock Magnetism. (Weizmann Science Press of Israel, x956.) Howell, B. F., Introduction to Geophysics. (McGraw-Hill, 1959.) Kuiper, G. P., The Earth as a Planet, Vol. a of series The So ar System. (Univ. of Chicago Press, 1954.) Nettleton, L. L., Geophysical Prospecting for Oil. (McGraw-Hill, 1940.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. There is no practical examination, but the work of each student is assessed continually throughout the year, and is taken into account in determining the success of candidates at the Annual Examination. 12.7 fi58. PROCESS CHEMISTRÝ A course of one lecture per week throughout the year and about hours' laboratory work. зо SYLLABUS A survey of the chemistry and chemical engineering of selected industrial chemical processes within the general field named, particularly from the points of view of thermodynamics, kinetics, transport phenomena and materials of construction. The process will be selected from inorganic and organic chemical operations, e.g., heavy inorganic chemicals and acids, metallurgical processes, biochemical processes, electrochemistry, nuclear reactions, organic intermediates, oxidation, nitration, chlorination, hydrogenation, chemicals from coal and acetylene, petro-chemicals, hydrolysis, polymers, etc. BOOKS Prescribed text-book: Shreve, R. W., The Chemical Process Industries. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION One 2-hour paper for Pass and Honours.

592. PROPERTIES OF METALS (Dr Osborn) A course of one lecture per week, with practical work, throughout the year. SYLLABUS Interpretation of the structures of binary alloys; relation between structure and properties; modification of properties by heat treatment. Commercial and special alloys including special steels; selection, specification and properties. Shaping of metals; defects. Non- destructive testing, including radiographic, magnetic, ultrasonic and fluorescent methods. PRACTICAL WORK Approximately 50 hours, on experiments dealing with the heat treatment, mechanical testing and metallographic examination of engineering metals and alloys, metal shaping, non-destructive testing and service failures. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books Guy, A. G., Physical Metallurgy for Engineerś. (Addison-Wesley.) or Clark, D. S. and Varney, W. R., Physical Metallurgy for Engineers. (and d.,ě Van Nostrand, íg62.) (b) Recommended for reference: Metals Handbook, lobo, Vol. i. (Amer. Soc. Metals.) The Making, Shaping and Treating of Steel. (United States Steel Co.) EXAMINATION AND TESTS Tests throughout the year and one 3-hour written paper; one 3-hour practical test (Pass standard only). All work done in connection with practical work practice classes will be taken into account in assessing the results of the year's workапд in conjunction with the results of the Annual Examination. All records made during the year should be retained for sub-. mission if required in connection with the Annual Examination. PURE MATHEMATICS SUBJECTS (See under Bachelor of Arts) , 86. PURE MATHEMATICS PART II PASS COURSE A course of three lectures per week in first term and two lectures per week in remaining terms, together with practice classes throughout the year. After the first term the course for day students may be divided into two alternative 128 syllabuses, Option A being devoted to the further study оf calculus, Option $ to the more fundamental study of algebra and geometry. Only one of these options will be given if the support offering for the other or the staff available to conduct it is inadequate. It is not necessary to signify which option will be desired until late in first term. Those intending to proceed subsequently to Pure Mathematics Part III should choose iption A in preparation for Pure Mathematics Part III A, III C or III S, Option В for Pure Mathe- matics Part III В. SYLLABUS Complex Functions. Exponential and related functions of a complex variable. Differential Equations. Standard types of ordinary differential equations of the first and second orders. Integrals. Infinite and improper integrals. Reduction formulae. Curvilinear integrals. Multiple integrals. Functions of Two Variables. Analytical solid geometry. Determinants. Directional derivatives. Stationary points. Envelopes. Series. Taylor's theorem. Power series for the standard elementary functions, and combinations of them. Option A. Functions of Two Variables. Change of variables. Polar co-ordinates. Surface integrals. Series. Approximate calculations with series. Convergence. Absolute convergence. Differential Equations. Further linear differential equations, and sumultaneous systems. Option В: Topics will be chosen by the Department. In former years topics have been selected from: euclidean geometry, non-euclidean geometry, elementary number theory, elementary theory of equations, theory of conics and orbits. BOOKS (a) Preliminary reading : Courant, R. and Robbins, H. E., What is Mathematics? (О.U.Р.) (b) Prescribed text-books: Cooley, H. R., First Course in Calculus. (Wiley .) Maxwell, E. A., Analytical Calculus, Vols. III and IV. (C.U.P.) . Ferrar, W. L., Higher Algebra (the sequel, starting with ch. XV). (O.U.P.)

EXAMINATION. Two 3-hour papers. 665. PURE MATHEMATICS PART II (MIN.) The first term of the course prescribed for Pure Mathematics Part. II (Pass) evening lectures. EXAMINATION Not more than two 3-hour papers. 638. PURE MATHEMATICS PART III (SURVEYING COURSE) A course of two lectures per week and two practice classes per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS Differential geometry of curves and surfaces in space, with particular reference to the oblate spheroid and geodesy. Conformal mapping. Interpolation formulae. Curve fitting.. Theory of errors.

BOОKS Recommended for reference: Clarke, A. R., Geodesy. (O.U.P.) Weatherburn, C. E., Differential Geometry. (C.U.P.) Whittaker, E. T. and Robinson, G., Calculus of Observations. (Blackie.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers. 561. STATISTICS FOR ENGINEERS A course of ia lectures and ia hours' practice classes. SYLLABUS Statistical nature of engineering data; chance variability and variability ascribable to assignable causes. Probability relations between population (lot) and sample. Parameters and statistics; averages, measures of dispersion. Histograms and probability distributions. The standard theoretical distributions (normal, hypergeometric, binomial, Poisson). Dis- tribution of means and associated tests of significance. Control chart technique for means, measures of dispersion, number and fraction defective. Sampling inspection procedures. General procedure for the introduction of control technique in production engineering, with illustrations from current practice. PRACTICAL WORK Illustrative arithmetical examples, together with the construction and interpretation of control charts relating to the production of piece parts. The practical work will be assessed in the deciding of examination results. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book: Moroney, M. J., Facts from Figures. (Pelican.) (b) Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be posted on the Notice Board in the Department of Statistics. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper. Before admission to the examination, candidates must have satisfactorily completed the practical work. 463. STATISTICAL TECHNIQUES A course consisting of one hour of lectures, along with one hour of practical work weekly throughout the year. SYLLABUS Principles of scientific inference. Elements of probability; population and sample, parameter and statistic. Introductionto the standard distributions (hypergeometric, binomial, Poisson, normal, t, F and chi-square). Estimation and hypothesis testing. Regression, simple, multiple and curvilinear. Normal correlation. Experimental design; completely randomized, randomized block and Latin square . designs; split-plot designs, balanced incomplete block designs; confounding; fractional replication. Analysis of variance and covariance. PRACTICAL WORK One hour per week throughout the year involving computation with the use of calculating machines. An elementary knowledge of Mathematics will be assumed. ' BOOKS (a) Prescribed tables and text-book: *Lindley, D. V. and Miller, J. C. P., Cambridge Elementary Statistical Tables. (C.U.P.) Davies, O. L. (ed.), Statistical Methods in Research and Production. (Oliver and Boyd.) (b) Recommended for reference: A list of books recommended for reference will be posted on the Notice Board in the Department of Statistics. EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper and a practical test.

666. STRENGTH OF MATERIALS PART II (Dr Stevens) A course of two lectures per week with 2.7 hours' laboratory and 2g hours' tutorial work. SYLLABUS Elementary theory of elasticity. Elastic Constants. Non-elastic behaviour. Analysis of stress 130 and strain. Principal stresses and strains. Mohr's stress circle. Thin rings and cylinders. Bending of beams. Elastic and non-elastic behaviour. Principal axes. Shear stresses. Un symmetrical and eccentric loading. Deformation under flexure and shear. Composite beams. Combined bending and axial forces. Buckling of columns. Torsion of circular shafts. Combined torsion and bending. Close coiled helical springs. Principles of Superposition, Reciprocity and Virtual Work. Strain Energy. Castigliano's First Theorem. Introduction to statically determinate and indeterminate problems fn frames and beams. Stresses in thick walled vessels subjected to internal and external pressure. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Timoshenko, S., History of Strength of Materials, Chs. I-VII. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Prescribed text-books: •Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Vol. I. (Van Nostrand.) Salmon, E. H., Materials and Structures, Vol. I: The Elasticity and Strength of Materials. (Longmans.) Morley, A., Strength of Materials. (Longmans.) Case, J. and Chilver, J. H., Strength of Materials: (Arnold.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. Practical work done during the year will be considered in assessing a candidate's standard. 562. STRENGTH OF MATERIALS PART II A (Dr Stevens) A course of about 40 lectures, with 27 hours' laboratory and z hours' tutorial work throughout the year. SYLLABUS Elementary theory of elasticity. Elastic Constants. Non-elastic behaviour. Analysis of stress and strain. Principal stresses and strains. Thin rings and cylinders. Statically indeterminate frames. Bending of beams. Elastic and non-elastic behaviour. Principal axes. Shear stresses. Deforma- tion under flexure and shear. Combined bending and axial force. Columns. Torsion. Principles of Superposition, Reciprocity, Strain Energy. Statically indeterminate problems in bending. BOOKS (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Timoshenko, S., History of Strength of Materials, Chs. I-VII. (McGraw-Hill.) (b) Prescribed text-book: *Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Vol.; i. (Van Nostrand.) (c) Recommended for reference: Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Vol. z. (Van Nostrand.) Salmon, E. H., Materials and Structures, Vol. i : The Elasticity and Strength of Materials. (Longmans.) Morley, A., Strength of Materials. (Longmans.) Case, J. and Chilver, A. H., Strength of Materials. (Arnold.) . EXAMINATION . One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. Practical work done during the year will be considered in'assessing a candidate's standard. 667. STRENGTH OF MATERIALS PART III (Dr Laszlo) A course of about 3g lectures with 26 hours' practice classes. SYLLABUS 1. Stresses in thin walled shells, circular plates, twisted rings, application to pressure vessels and pipe joints. Stresses in thick walled vessels subjected to'internal afd external pressure. Centrifugal stresses in rotating machinery. Analysis of components of reciprocating г. engines. Bending of curved bars. 131 ЁbоKS ; (a) Recommended for preliminary reading: Tongue, R, Design and Construction of High Pressure Chemical Plant. (Chapman and Hall.) (b) Prescribed text-book *Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials (z Vols.). (Van Nostrand.) (c) Recommended for reference: Stodola, A. and Loewenstein, L. C., Steam and Gas Turbines. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours; the work done in practice classes will carry some weight. 668. STRENGTH OF MATERIALS PART III A A course of 24 lectures and z4 hours of practice/tutorial. SYLLABUS Section (ii) of Strength of Materials Part III, namely—Centrifugal stresses in rotating machinery; analysis of components of reciprocating engines; bending of curved bars. ВООКS As in Strength of Materials Part III. . EXAMINATION One a-hour paper for Pass only. The work done in practice classes will carry some weight. 593. STRENGTH OF MATERIALS PART IV (Dr Laszlo) A course of two lectures per week throughout the year. Tutorials, at which attendance is voluntary, will be arranged. SYLLABUS The topics discussed are broadly as follows : Elasticity theory. Special problems connected with beams, curved bars, torsion, stress concentration, elastic stability. Flat plates. Experimental stress and strain analysis. Shells. BOOKS Recommended for reference: *Timoshenko, S., Strength of Materials, Vol. z. (Van Nostrand.) *Timoshenko, S., Theory of Plates and Shells. (McGraw-Hill.) *Timoshenko, S. and Goodier, J. N., Theory of Elasticity. (McGraw-Hill.) Southwell, R. V., Theory of Elasticity. (O.U.P.) Jessop, H. T. and Harris, F. C., Photoelasticity. (Cleaver-Hume,) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Final Honours. Some further questions on more advanced aspects of the course will be set in one of two combined papers for Final Honours in conjunction with questions from other subjects. In order to pass the subject candidates must reach a satisfactory standard in both the practical work and the written papers. 563. SURVEYING PART I A course of two lectures and three hours' practical work per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS History and development of surveying and of the instruments used. Nature, causes and classes of errors of measurement. Theory, construction adjustment, care and use of—the steel band, optical square, Abney clinometer, magnetic compass, plane table, dumpy level, theodolite, and sextant. Recording of field notes. Line ranging. Surveying with steel band. Reduction of bearings. Traversing with magnetic compass. Traversing with theodolite. Calculation of traverse closures by method of latitudes and departures; methods of adjustment of traverse misclosure. Plane table surveying. 132 Theory of the spirit level; differential levelling; reduction of levels. Contour surveying and plotting; practical applications of contour plans. Calculation of areas by double meridian distances; areas with irregular boundaries. Calculation of volumes of earthwork and other materials. Setting out of plain circular curves. Elementary tacheometry. Barometric levelling. Use of surveying instruments in the workshop. General survey computation. Plotting from field notes, and preparation of plans. PRACTICAL WORK Field and offiсе work relating to the above. Students are required to provide themselves with the following: Field book of a recommended type; iz oz. plumb-bob; rectangular protractor, б in. x z in.; boxwood scale, 20/4o; 5 fig. tables of logarithms of numbers and natural and lo&arithmic trigonometrical functions of angles tabulated for every minute of arc; or Chambers' 7 Fig. Mathematical Tables (the latter tables will be required later by students proceeding to Surveying Part II). SURVEY CAMP See page 134. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book: (i) For students not proceeding to Surveying Part II: *Kissam, P., Surveying: Instruments and Methods. (McGraw-Hill.) (z) For students proceeding to Surveying Part II: *Clark, D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying For Engineers, Vol. I. (5th ed., Constable, 1958.) (b) Recommended for reference Davis, R. E., Foote, F. S. and Rayner, W. H., Surveying Theory and Practice. (McGraw- Hi11J Johnson, J. B. and Smith, L. S, Theory and Practice of Surveying. (John Wiley.) Breed, C. B. and Hosmer, G. L., Principles and Practice of Surveying. (John Wiley.) Rubey, H., Lommel, G. E. and Todd, M. W., Engineering Surveys. (Macmillan.) Thomas, W. N., Surveying. (Edward Arnold.) Taylor, E. W., Theodolite Design and Construction. (Cooke, Troughton & Simms.) Mason, R. G., Notes for Survey Chainmen. (Vic. S.R. & W.S. Comm.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass and Honours. There will be no formal practical examination; the practical work performed during the year will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. However, any candidate may be required to submit to a practical test and to resubmit field notes and assignments of work performed during the course.

639. SURVEYING PART II A course of three lectures per week and six hours' practical work per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS More advanced plane table surveying. Field methods of topographical surveying. Require rents and field work of surveys for roads, railways, water supply, irrigation. Theory and setting out of compound curves, transition curves, and vertical curves. Setting out of railway tracks. Underground surveying, special instruments and methods used, solution of problems in mining surveying. Alignment and setting out of tunnels. Measuring up and calculation of quantities in earthwork and other engineering materials. Hydrographic surveying in river and ocean, stream and tide gauging, sounding apparatus. Precise levelling with special equipment. Trigonometrical levelling. Introduction to theory of map projections for a spherical earth. Spherical astronomy. Conventional methods of determining latitude, azimuth and time. Convergence of meridians. Elementary theory of errors, application to survey observations. PRACTICAL WORK The equivalent of six hours per week devoted to field astronomy and other field and 00cе work. 133 SURVEY CAMP Before commencing on the course in Ѕuгvеуіпg Part II, students are required to attend a University Survey Camp of three weeks' duration and to spend two weeks under supervision in the Drawing Office of the Engineering School plotting field notes, or obtain , similar experience, to the satisfaction of the lecturer, under an approved civil engineer, or licensed surveyor, or geologist. í , BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books *Clark, D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers, Vol. I. (4th ed., Constable, 1951.) *Chapman, R. W. and Mackie, J. B., Astronomy for Land Surveyors. (5th ed., Griffin, 1953•) *Star Almanac for Surveyors. (1.1. Stationery Office.) (b) Recommended for reference: Flinks, A. R., Map Projections. (C.U.P.) Durham, E. B., Mine Surveying. (McGraw-Hí11.) Close, C. F., Text-Book of Topographical Surveying. (1.1. Stationery Office.) Higgins, A. L, Higher Surveying. (Macmillan.) EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. There will be no formal practical examination; the practical work performed during the , year will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. However, any candidate may ' be asked to submit to a practical test and to resubmit field notes and assignments of work performed during the course.

569. SURVEYING PART II (MINING COURSE) A course of 19 lectures and 27 hours' practical work during First and Second Terms, com- prising parts of the Syllabus, lectures and practical classes conducted in Surveying Part II. SYLLABUS Underground surveying including theory, construction and use of special instruments, transference of position and azimuth, solution of problems in strike and dip and of intersections of ore bodies by workings, measuring up and computing quantities, alignment and setting-out of tunnels. More advanced plane-table surveying; field methods of topographical surveying; fundamentals of methods of surveying for roads, railways and water supplies; railway points and crossings. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-book *Clark, D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers, Vol. I. (Constable.) (b) Recommended for reference : Durham, E. B., Mine Surveying. (McGraw-Hill.) EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper for Pass. There will be no formal practical examination; the practical work performed during the year will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. However, any candidate may be required to submit to a practical test and to resubmit field notes and assignments of work performed during the course. 643. SURVEYING PART III ' A course of three lectures per week and six hours' practical work per week throughout the year. SYLLABUS . Astronomy. More precise astronomical observations for latitude, longitude and azimuth. Geodetic Triangulation. Reconnaissance surveys for triangulation, and marking of trian ula- tion stations. Apparatus, methods and routine for base-line measurements. Field work of geodetic triangulation: methods and routine of observing and booking. Adjustment of observations by the theory of least squares. Solution of spheroidal triangles. Latitude, longitude and reverse azimuth. 134 Map Ргоj ctions. Theories of the common map projections of the spheroid. Grid co-ordinates. Transformation from geographical to grid co-ordinates and vice versa. Problems in the use of grid co-ordinates by the surveyor. Topographical Surveys. Methods of topographical surveying for snapping; precise traverses and their adjustment; precise levelling and adjustment of level nets. - PRACTICAL WORK The equivalent of six hours per week devoted to field and office work, tutorial classes and excursions. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books *Clark, D., Plane and Geodetic Surveying for Engineers Vol. II. (4th ed., Constable, 1951.) *Roelofs, R., Astronomy Applied to Land Surveying. (1st ed., N. V. Wed. J. Ahrend & Zoon, 195o.) (b) Recommended for reference: Other books will be referred to in lectures from time to time: EXAMINATION Two 3-hour papers for Pass and Honours. There will be no formal practical examination; the practical work performed during the year will be assessed as part of the Annual Examination. However, any candidate may be asked to submit to a practical test and to resubmit field notes and assignments of work performed during the course.

571. TOWN PLANNING Thirty lectures throughout the year. Note. This is an introductory course only and is not intended to provide adequate training for professional qualification. SYLLABUS The history of town planning and human environment; ancient, Greek, Roman, Medieval, Renaissance and 19th century; study of examples; the history of Australian towns; the development of transportation; the development of planning technique in the zoth century; Ebenezer Howard and the Garden Cities movement; Patrick Geddes and other pioneers; introduction to the principles and practice of town and country planning; the outlines of planning legislation. BOOKS (a) Prescribed text-books Hiorns, F. R., Town Building in History. (London, Barrap, 1956.) , Abercrombie, Sir P., Town and Country Planning. (London, H.U.L., 1945.) (b) Recommended for reference Haverfield, F., Ancient Town Planning. (Oxford, Clarendon Press, 1913.) Ashworth, W., The Genesis of Modern British Town Planning. (Routledge and Kegan Paul.) Unwin, R., Town Planning in Practice. (London, 1909.) Lanchester, H. V., Art of Town Planning. (London, Chapman and Hall, 1932.) Hackett, B., Man, Society and Environment. (P. Marshall, 1955•) ' Brown, A. J. and Sheгrard, H. M., Town and Country Planning. (M.U.P., 1951.) . EXAMINATION One 3-hour paper.

135 CHAPTER 5 Post Graduate Studies and. Graduate Schools

HIGHER DEGREES DEGREES OF MASTER Master of Engineering Master of Surveying . A candidate for the degree of Master of Engineering must have held the degree of Bachelor of Engineering for three years. A candidate for the degree of Master of Surveying must have held the degree of Bachelor of Surveying for three years. If he proposes to present for examination material appropriate to the branch in which he is already a Bachelor, he must produce satisfactory evidence of from three to five years' practical experience (according to whether he has obtained first or second class final honours in his Bachelor's course or not) subsequent to graduation, accompanied by a thesis, written report or original designs. (See regulations for detailed requirements.) If he desires to present for examination material appropriate to a branch of Engineering other than that in which he took the Bachelor's degree, the period of experience required will be determined by the Faculty.

Master of Engineering Science . This degree may be obtained on the completion of not less than one year's advanced studies and research in the Engineering and/or Metallurgical laboratories of the University subsequent to the completion of the course for the degree of Bachelor of Engineering. Candidates must be Bachelors of at least one year's standing before they may be admitted to the Master's degree. DEGREES OF DOCTOR Doctor of Philosophy This is a degree for full-time research workers. A candidate must be a graduate of this or some other University recognized for the purpose, must be of such standing as may be required by the Professorial Board for graduates in his Faculty, and must be accepted as such by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the department concerned. He must pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and research under a supervisor or supervisors appointed by the Board, and on its completion must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The only part-time candidates who are accepted by the Professorial Board are permanent members of staff. (See regulation 3.бо in University Calendar, 1962.) Doctor of Engineering This degree is granted on published and unpublished work in Engineering. Candidates must be Bachelors of at least five years' standing or Masters of at least two years' standing in some branch of Engineering. Further information regarding courses for degree of Doctor may be obtained from the Secretary of Graduate Studies, University of Melbourne, Parkville N.г. Further information regarding Master's degree courses in Engineering and Surveying may be obtained from the Secretary, Technical Branch, University of Melbourne, Park- ville N.г. GRADUATE SCHOOL IN CIVIL ENGINEERING FULL-TIME ONE YEAR COURSES LEADING TO DEGREE OF MASTER OF ENGINEERING SCIENCE OBJECTS AND SCOPE Full-time graduate courses leading to the degree of Master of Engineering Science are available in the department of Civil Engineering. The courses extend over a period of twelve months, approximately half a normal academic year being devoted to tormal teaching (advanced lectures, laboratory, and design work) and the remainder of the time to an individual research project. The courses will begin on 1 r March, 1963. In 1963 three courses will be offered, in Structural Engineering, Soil Engineering and 136 Hydraulic Engineering. In each course the principle adopted is that of major and minor subjects together with an elective. The formal teaching is given in two thirteen-week semesters with breaks for normal University vacations. In later years courses in Trans- portation Engineering and Civil Engineering Construction and Management will be added, .. as the staff position permits. Each subject is divided into three parts, I, IA and II. Parts I and II will each consist of about 5 lectures on advanced topics. Part IA will consist of laboratory, seminar and tutorial оwork for about 7g hours (major subject) or 40 hours (minor subject). A major unit consists of parts I, IA and II of a subject and a minor unit consists of parts I and IA of a subject. Candidates will be required to take a major unit of formal course work in one of the three subjects offered and a minor unit in one of the remaining two subjects. The arrangement of courses is First Semester Major unit part I —about 50 lectures Major unit part IA —about 75 hours Minor unit part I —about 5o lectures Minor unit part IA —about 40 hours Second Semester Major unit part II -about 50 lectures Elective To be chosen from an appropriate University subject —about 50 lectures In the courses in Structural Engineering topics such as the following are included: Safety, use of computers, cable structures, prestressing, elasticity, stability. Inelastic behaviour of steel structures, including multi-storey and triangulated frames. Concrete structures, including determinate and indeterminate prestressing, shells, pavements and concrete technology. Timber structures. The courses in Sail Engineering deal with topics such as the following: Physical properties of soils—structure, strength and deformation characteristics, shear strength of saturated and unsaturated soils, consolidation theory. Stability of earth masses. Flow of water through soils. Foundation analysis. Earth dam, pavement, foundation retaining wall and bulkhead design. The courses in Hydraulic Engineering will deal with topics such as the following: Theory of flow in open channels, water hammer and mass oscillations in surge systems, ground water flow, sediment transport, coastal engineering, flood routing, hydraulic structures, machinery, cavitation, methods of measurement. The laboratory, tutorial and design work in each subject are appropriate to and supple- ment the general topics dealt with in the lectures. Formal teaching is concentrated in the earlier part of the course. INDIVIDUAL RESEARCH PROTECTS Each student carries through an individual research project, the subject of which will be decided early in the course in consultation with the staff. Students are encouraged to bring forward problems arising from their professional experience. STANDARD AND CONDITIONS OF ENTRY The courses are intended primarily for graduates of Honours standard in Civil Engineer- ing of a recognized University. Some experience after graduation is advantageous, but not essential. It may be possible to arrange in individual cases for completion of the courses to be spread over a period of z years on a part-time basis. APPLICATION FOR ADMISSION Application for admission should be addressed to the Registrar, The University of Melbourne, Parkville Na, Victoria. The following particulars should be included: 1. Name, address and 'phone number. z, Age. . 3. Formal academic qualifications. 4. Brief review of professional experience and membership of professional institutions (if any). 137 5. Present position. 6. Which course it is desired to take. 7. Suggestions for research project. The last date for receipt of applications is Friday, xi January, 1963. FEES The fee for each course is fizo. In addition, registration, sports and Union fees amount to about Eu. EXAMINATIONS Examinations will be held on the formal work of the course, and each candidate will also be required to submit for examination a thesis on his research project. Successful candidates will be awarded the degree of Master of Engineering Science.

FEES Master of Engineering, Master of Surveying, Master of Engineering Science and Doctor of Philosophy When enrolling students, must consult the Fees Section of Students' Records before payment of fees. Lecture fees are paid yearly in advance, or in three terminal instalments, the first being paid on enrolment and the second and third on or before 10 May and г July respectively. All fees must be paid into the University's account at a branch of the National Bank of Australasia. Branches of the bank will be found next to the Bookroom and in Union House. EXAMINATION FEES FOR HIGHER DEGREES Master of Engineering . £13 13 o Master of Surveying . . 13 13 o Doctor of Philosophy ...... 13 13 o Doctor of Engineering z 1 o o GRADUATION . The dates for conferring degrees in 1963 are as follows : Wednesday, б March Wednesday, zo March Saturday, 3o March (Annual Commencement) Wednesday, io April Wednesday, 7 August Saturday, 14 December Candidates for degrees and diplomas must lodge an application on the prescribed form, obtainable at the Registrar's Office, by the date set down in the list of Principal Dates. This application must be accompanied by a bank slip for the degree or diploma fee. The fees are as follows For the degree of Master of Engineering and Master of Surveying £15 15 o For the degree of Master of Engineering Science ...... 15 15 o For the degree of Doctor of Philosophy ...... 21 o o* For the degree of Doctor of Engineering :...... 34 13 0"

GRANTS FROM RESEARCH FUNDS . ALLOCATION Grants from the General Research Fund are made by the Professorial Board on the advice of its Standing Research Committee and the heads of the departments concerned. RESEARCH AWARDS A limited number of research awards is made annually to candidates who are proceeding to higher degrees and who show promise of aptitude for research. Scholars are expected to devote their whole time to research, except for such tutoring and demonstrating work as • Less the examination fee. 138 is approved by the head of the appropriate department. Awards are made for one year, but may be renewed for additional yearly periods. Research grants are awarded to selected graduates of Bachelor standing. Research scholarships are awarded to selected candidates of Master standing who have shown marked ability for research and who are undertaking further research training, as Ph.D. candidates. Research scholarships may be renewed annually for a period not exceed- ing five years. EMOLUMENTS OF AWARDS For students proceeding to the degree of Master of Engineering Science the value of a research grant is £6oо plus annual compulsory fees. The value of research scholarships varies from £7oo to £775 per annum, plus fees. Grants for travel within Australia may be made to research scholars in appropriate cases. RESEARCH FELLOWSHIPS The University of Melbourne has established five research fellowships not more than two of which may be Senior Fellowships: The Senior Fellowships have the status and salary of a Senior Lecturer and the Junior Fellowship the status and salary of a lecturer. Fellow- ships may be held for one, two but not more than three years. Travelling allowance is made for a fellow appointed from overseas. Fellowships will be advertised as they become vacant. TRAVELLING RESEARCH SCHOLARSHIPS Two Travelling Research Scholarships* are offered each year to enable a graduate who shows first-rate capacity for research to undertake approved work at an overseas university, or other suitable institution. The value of the scholarship which is normally awarded for two years, is £Аgoo per annum. RESEARCH REPORT All persons conducting research in the University, whether under research awards or otherwise, are required to submit, by the end of February in each year, reports on their research during the preceding twelve months to the heads of their departments, together with a list of their research publications during that period. Heads of departments also submit departmental research reports, which are published in the annual Report of Research and Investigation. MODE OF APPLICATION Applications for research awards and grants must be made on a form designed for the purpose (and available at the Registrar's Office). Applications must be lodged with the Secretary of Graduate Studies on or about 8 December. In general, research awards are made as from i March. Further information may be obtained from the Secretary of Graduate Studies. The Aitchison Travelling Scholarship, one year, and the Myer Scholarship, one year, which are worth £Agoo,ф are also available for research abroad. Together they form a two-year scholarship.

139 CHAPTER 6 Regulations for Higher Degrees REGULATION 3.44 DEGREE OF MASTER OF ENGINEERING SCIENCE

[NOTE.—Pursuant to its wartime powers the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the faculty of Engineering has resolved that holders of the bachelor of Engineering Science degree conferred under the special wartime provisions of Chap. III, Reg. XLII, will not be permitted to proceed with the master af Engineering Science degree without the special permission of the faculty.] 1. Candidates for the degree of master of Engineering Science shall subsequently to the completion of the course for the degree of bachelor of Engineering pursue for not less than one year advanced studies and research at the Engineering and/or Metallurgical Labora- tories of the Universityt and shall thereafter present a thesis based on original work in some branch of Engineering Science approved by the faculty. z. The thesis shall be examined in the manner prescribed in regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees. The examination shall be for pass and honours.' 3. Candidates who have fulfilled the conditions prescribed and have satisfied the examiners and are bachelors of at least one year's standing of some branch of Engineering or of Engineering Science may be admitted to the degree of master of Engineering Science. ,

REGULATION 3.46 DEGREES OF MASTER OF ENGINEERING AND MASTER OF SURVEYING 1. A person may be a candidate' for the degree of master of Engineering if he is— (a) a bachelor in some branch of Engineering with standing of not less than three years or such longer standing as may be required by the faculty of Engineering, or (b) a graduate in Engineering Science or in some other faculty in either case with standing of not less than seven years or such longer standing as may be required by the faculty of Engineering and he has produced evidence satisfactory to the faculty of Engineering that he has had adequate training and experience in Engineering. z. A person may be a candidate' for the degree of master of Surveying if he is a bachelor of Surveying with standing of not less than three years. з. (1) A candidate may be admitted to the degree of master of Engineering who— (a) has produced evidence satisfactory to the faculty that, since graduating in the manner required by section 1, he has spent the minimum period hereinafter defined in acquiring proficiency in that branch of Engineering in which he is presenting material for examination; and (b) has presented: (i) a thesis or a written report, or s Faculty has resolved that June shall be the closing date each year for receipt of theses for M.Eng.Sc., except that extension of time mayзо be granted on recommendation of the Head of Department concerned. t With the permission of the faculty part of the work may be carried out in the laboratories of some other organization providing the whole of the work is under the control of the head of the University department concerned. i When candidates are graduates of other universities, the faculty has resolved that— (a) The status of bachelor of Engineering or bachelor of Surveying may be granted for the purpose of proceeding to the degrees of master of Engineering or master of Surveying respectively. Applications for such status will not be considered until the candidate has resided in Victoria for at least five years. (b) The status of bachelor, when granted, will become effective as from the date of the candidate's commencing residence in Victoria, or obtaining the equivalent of a bachelor's degree in Engineering or Surveying, as ap• propriate, whichever is the later. (c) Sections s (a) and 4 r (a) of the regulation will, in such cases, be interpreted as requiring the candidate to have producedз evidence satisfactory to the faculty that since the date from which the status of bachelor became effective he has spent not less than five years on approved engineering work or surveying work, as appropriate, in Victoria. or on work associated closely with some Victorian engineering fiггn or- authority. (d) During the period of five years prescribed in section (c) above the candidate will be expected to take steps to associate himself with this University, by research work or other work done at the University, or in some other manner approved by the faculty. 140 (ii) original designs of engineering work with which he has been connected in a responsible capacity, such designs being accompanied by all necessary calculations and specifications, or (iii) published work in Engineering or such unpublished work in Engineering as he deems appropriate or both. (z) The minimum period referred to in sub-section 3 (1) (a) hereof shall be— (a) where the candidate presents for examination material appropriate to the branch of Engineering in which he was admitted to the degree of bachelor, and has obtained first or second class final honours in the course for that degree, three years; (b) where the candidate presents for examination material appropriate to the branch of Engineering in which he was admitted to the degree of bachelor, atid has not obtained first or second class final honours in the course for that degree, five years; (c) otherwise such period as may be determined by the faculty of Engineering.' (3) All or part of any time spent in advanced studies or research or both, may, if the work is completed to the satisfaction of the faculty and is approved by the faculty as being appropriate to the field in which the candidate presents material for examination, be deemed by the faculty to be time spent for the purposes of sub-section 3 (1) (a) hereof. (4) Together with material of the type described in sub-section 3 (1) (b) hereof a .candidate may present material pertaining to advanced studies or research or both approved by the faculty as appropriate to the topic presented for examination. (5) The material presented must be acceptable to the faculty as appropriate to Engineer- ing, and must be satisfactory to the examiners nominated by the faculty. (6) No thesis, report, design, published or unpublished work shall be considered satisfactory unless it shows evidence of capacity for the development or application of scientific principles and methods, acquaintance with the work of others in similar fields and ability in the presentation of ideas. 4. (i) A candidate who is a bachelor of Surveying may be admitted to the degree of master of Surveying if he— (a) has produced evidence satisfactory to the faculty that since obtaining his degree of bachelor he has spent not less than five years in acquiring proficiency in Surveying provided that a candidate who has obtained first or second class honours in Survey- ing part III and Photogrammetry in his Surveying course the minimum period shall be three years; and (b) has presented (i) a thesis or a written report on his practical experience (with necessary plans), or (ii) published work in Surveying or such unpublished work in Surveying as he deems appropriate or both. (2) The material presented must be appropriate to Surveying, must be accepted by the faculty and must be satisfactory to examiners nominated by the faculty. (3) No thesis, report, published or unpublished work shall be considered satisfactory unless it shows evidence of capacity for the development or application of scientific principles and methods, acquaintance with the work of others in similar fields and ability in the presentation of ideas. 5. A candidate may not submit for examination work in respect of which he has already qualified for a degree in any university, or, without the permission of the faculty, work which he has previously submitted for any such degree. 6. The written report or original designs of Engineering or Surveying work submitted by any candidate under this regulation shall be examined in the manner prescribed in regulation 46 for the examination of theses for higher degrees. , 7. Notwithstanding anything to the contrary, any person who is accepted, under the regulations in force on or, before 3 t May, 1958, as a candidate for one of the following degrees, namely, master of Civil Engineering, master of Mining Engineering, master of Metallurgical Engineering, master of Electrical Engineering, master of Mechanical Engineer- ing or master of Chemical Engineering, may, if he complies with the regulations which were in force on the date of his being so accepted, be admitted-, (a) on or before 31 December, 1959, to the degree for which his candidature was accepted b or the degree of master of Engineering, whichever he may elect, or , (b) after 31 December, 1959, to the degree of master of Engineering. 141 REGULATION 3.47 DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF ENGINEERING . 1. The faculty may admit as a candidate for the degree of doctor of Engineerinngg a bachelor of Engineering who is of at least five years' standing, or a graduate in some other faculty who is of at least five years' standing and who satisfies the faculty that he possesses adequate experience of Engineering. 2. The faculty shall not admit any person as a candidate for the degree unless in the opinion of the faculty he has already made substantial published contributions to Engineering. 3. A' candidate shall submit a record of his published work, and the prescribed number of copies' of all the work, whether published or unpublished, which he wishes to submit for examination. A candidate may not submit for examination work in respect of which he has already qualified for a degree in any university or, without the permission of the faculty, work which he has previously presented for any such degree. The faculty, if it approve the subject or subjects of the work submitted for examination, shall nominate examiners. 4. A candidate, in submitting his published work and such unpublished work as he may think appropriate, shall state generally in a preface and specifically in notes the sources from which his information is derived, the extent to which he has availed himself of the work of others, and in general terms the portions of his work which he claims as original. When a candidate submits work carried out in collaboration with another person, he shall indicate his own share in the work. ç. Subject to the statutes and regulations of the University, the faculty , shall give directions for the conduct of the examination.' 6. A candidate whose work as submitted gives evidence of research and ability satisfactory to the examiners and in their opinion constitutes a definite contribution to Engineering and who has fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Engineering. 1 Three copies must be submitted (see regulation 4.6). REGULATION 5.60 DEGREE OF DOCTOR OF PHILOSOPHY ><. A candidate for the degree of doctor of Philosophy must— (a) be a graduate of the University or of some other university or approved institution of university status recognized for the purposes of this regulation by the Professorial Board, and, if not a graduate of the University of Melbourne, matriculate in the University; (b) submit a proposed course of advanced study and research to be undertaken by him in a department of the University; (c) give satisfactory evidence of adequate training' and ability to pursue the proposed course; (d) be of such standing' as may be required by the Professorial Вdard for graduates in his faculty; • (e). be accepted as such by the Professorial Board on the recommendation of the head of the appropriate department. . z. After being accepted he must pursue for at least two years a course of advanced study and research in the University under supervision prescribed by the Board, save that (a) in special circumstances the Board may grant permission for the candidate to spend not more than one year of his course in research at another institution provided that his work can be supervised in a manner satisfactory to the Board, or , - • (b) when the head of the appropriate department recommends that it is essential for the candidate to obtain material for his course away from the University, the Board may grant permission for the candidate to absent himself from the University for such period as may be determined in each case, provided that supervision satisfactory to the Board can be maintained. 3. (1) The candidate shall be required during the course to devote his whole time to his àdvanced study and research, save that— „' , 1 The Professorial Board will not normally accept a candidate for the degree who has not completed one year's research. The minimum formal requirements of the individual faculties• are as follows-

. 142 (a) the Board may allow a candidate 'on application to undertake a limited amount of University teaching or outside work which in its judgment will not interfere with the continuous pursuit of the proposed course of advanced study and research; and (b) a member of the University staff may be accepted as a part-time candidate for the degree, whereupon the Board shall prescribe a minimum period for the duration of his course. (z) In special circumstances the Board may accept as a part-time candidate for the degree a person engaged in another regular occupation which in its opinion leaves the candidate substantially free to pursue his course in a department of the University. The Board shall prescribe for the duration of his course of advanced study and research a minimum period which in its opinion, having regard to the proportion of his time which he is able to devote to the course in the appropriate University department, is equivalent to the two years ordinarily required.

4. A candidate may be required during his course to attend lectures and practical work in subjects prescribed by the Board. g. If the Board is of opinion that a candidate is not making satisfactory progress it may terminate his course or make such changes in the conditions of his candidature as it thinks fit. . 6. On completing the course of advanced study and research a candidate must present a satisfactory thesis embodying the results of his research. The thesis shall be examined in manner- provided in regulation 4.6 for the examination of theses for higher degrees. The candidate must also satisfy the examiners in such written, oral or practical examinations as may be required by the Board on the, recommendation of the examiners. There shall be a panel of three examiners of whom two shall be external. The head of the appropriate department shall act as chairman of the panel but need not be one of the three examiners. If the head of the appropriate department is not an examiner he shall not have a vote.a 7. Three copies of the thesis and a summary of ;oo-5оo words must be submitted. The thesis must be of standard format approved by the Board. 8. A candidate in submitting his thesis shall state generally in a preface and specifically in notes the sources from which his information is derived, the extent to which he has availed himself of the work of others, and in general terms the portions of his work which he claims as original. When a candidate submits work carried out in collaboration with another person, he shall indicate his own share in the work. g. A candidate may not present as his thesis any work for which a degree has been conferred on him in this or another university, but he will not be precluded from incor- porating such work or any part thereof in his thesis: Provided that in his application for acceptance he has stated his intention of doing so and in presenting the thesis indicates the part of the work which has been so incorporated. lo. Candidates who have fulfilled the prescribed conditions may be admitted to the degree of doctor of Philosophy.

Agriculture: М.Agr.Sc., or В.Аgr.Sc. of one уeаг'9 standing and experience in research. Architecture: B.Arch. with honours. Arts: M.А. with first class or second class (division A) honours, or B.A. with first or second class (division A) honours together with one year's full-time experience in approved post-graduate or scientific work- in. the subject as tested by publication or further examination to the satisfaction of the faculty of Arts (equivalent to first or second class honours). Dental Science: В.D.Sc. Economics and Commerce: ‚Cor., or (in special cases) its equivalent. Education: M.Ed., or B.Ed. with first class or high second class honours or with equivalent performance. Engineering: M.Eng.Sc., master in some branch of Engineering, or bachelor in some branch of Engineering with one year's post-graduate training in research. Lau,: LL.B. with honour or (in special cases) its equivalent. Medicine: M.В., B.S. Science: В.Se.. В.Sc. (hone.) with one year's experience in research or B.Sc. (ord.) with two years' experience in research; in special cases on strong recommendation from the head of the appropriate department, B.Sе. (ord.) with one year's experience in research may be accepted. If however the post-graduate research of a candidate has been conducted outside the University he must hold the degree of М.Sc. Veterinary Science: М.V.Sc., or В.V.Se. with two years' experience in research. 2 The chairman of examiners shall facilitate consultation. among the examiners and shall prepare a comprehensive report on the result of the examination.

143 REGULATION 4.6 EXAMINATION OF THESES FOR HIGHER DEGREES • I. Where it is provided that a candidate for any degree of master or doctor may submit a thesis' or work the Council may require that thesis or work to be in the English language.. Subject to dispensation by the appropriate faculty, the candidate shall furnish to the Registrar three typewritten or printed copies of his thesis or work. The form of the typewritten or printed copies shall be in accordance with specifications made from time to time by the Professorial Board.' i. No person shall be permitted to submit for examination a thesis or work for any degree of master or doctor (a) if it is substantially similar to a thesis or work previously examined and rejected in the University or in any other university unless the appropriate faculty gives pет- mission; (b) if it is substantially similar to a thesis or work upon which that person has qualified for a degree in the University or any other university; . . (c) while a thesis or work substantially similar thereto remains submitted for examination— . (i) for any other degree of the University, or • (ii) in any other university. 3. Each of the examiners shall read the thesis or work and may require the candidate to answer viva voce or in writing any questions concerning the subject of his thesis or work and to attend at the University for such examination. 4. Before making their formal return the examiners shall consult together or otherwise communicate with each other with regard to the thesis or work submitted. 5. (i) Subject to the provisions of this section the result of a candidate shall be in accordance with the decision of a majority of the examiners. ( z) Where there are two examiners and they are unable to agree, a third examiner shall be appointed by the Council in accordance with the provisions of section I hereof. 6. The Registrar shall deposit in the library of the University a copy of the thesis or work submitted by any candidate who has satisfied the examiners. 'The Professorial Board is of opinion that no candidate for a higher degree should be allowed to submit for examination a work for which a degree has been awarded in this or any other university, except as preliminary or supplementary evidence of the candidate's ability, 2 Recommendations for the format of theses— • (i) Generally should be on quarto size paper measuring no; in. x 8 in. but, where quarto is not suitable. on foolscap size paper measuring r3 in. x 8 in. (ii) Sheets should be numbered consecutively and clearly; interpolated sheets should be marked distinctly- e.g. bg(a). or as the case may require. - (iii) Folding diagrams or charts should be arranged so as to open out to the top and right. (iv) There should be a margin on the left hand side of at least r; in. uniform on all sheets. . (v) At least one copy. for deposit in the library, must be bound in such a manner that it will stand on the shelf as a book. All copies must have the pages firmly fastened within a cover. Spriлg-back folders must not be used. (It is recommended that theses be bound by the Melbourne University Press.) (vi) A title page must show the title of the thesis, the degree for which it is submitted, and the full name of the author. (vii) The name of the author must be on the spine and it is desirable to show there also the title, abbreviated if necess2ry.

144 CHAPTER 7 Awards for Engineering Students

The following table gives a summary of awards which are available to Engineering students at entrance, undergraduate, and postgraduate levels. More precise information concerning these awards may be obtained from the appropriate regulation (see Calendar) or other source, as indicated in the table. Values of awards are approximate only. Further awards in specific fields are listed in the appropriate departmental sections of this handbook. Calendar reference or Information Field Title and approximate value source ENTRANCE Unrestricted Senior Government Scholar- The Secretary, ships Education department, £40 p.a. Treasury Place, East Melbourne, Cz Free places Tuition fees The Secretary, Education department, Treasury Place, East. Melbourne, C.a N.U.A.U.S. Aboriginal R.6.97 Scholarships Registrar's Offiсe Determined according to individual needs Dick Bursaries R.6.54 £5о Accounts department Commonwealth Scholarships `Announcements' Tuition fees and a living Officer in Charge, allowance subject to a Commonwealth Scholarship means test Branch, University Students Loan fund R.7.56 Up to £t5o p.a. Registrar's office Cowrie Scholarships 'Announcements' £n P.a. Secrotаrc, Gowrie Scholar- ships Trust Fund, G.P.O. Box 206g, Sydney, N.S.W. Rest Home Bursary R.6.34 £45 Accounts department Edwin Nonus Smith Scholar- R.6.g1 ship Accounts department £5o p.a.. War Bursaries R.6.IOS Tuition fees Accounts department Almost unrestricted Dafydd Lewis Trust 'Announcements' Tuition fees and living Dafydd Lewis Trust, allowance c/o The Trustees, Executors and Agency Co. Ltd,. 401 Collins St, Melbourne, C.1 Engineering John Balfour Memorial R.6.67 Scholarship Accounts department Eiio p.a. Moran Bursary R.6.4o Ego p.a. Accounts department Thompson Scholarship R.6.42 £z8 p.a. Accounts department 145 Field Caksdar reference or Information Title and approximate value source UNDERGRADUATE Unrestricted Free places Commonwealth Scholarships Dick Bursaries Students Loan Fund See under ' tr ' Rest Home Bursary Еп апсе War Bursaries Dafydd Lewis Trust Aitchison Scholarships R.6.46 £70 Accounts department Engineering John Balfour Memorial Scholarship Moran Bursary } See under 'Entrance' Thompson Scholarship Guy Bradshaw Scholarship R.6.72(33) Books or instruments Accounts department (Lao) Oscar Weigel Trust Announcements' Up to £zoo p.a. Secretary, Technical Branch Applied Mathematics Dixson Scholarship 8.3.45.7 Part I £i5 R.6.13 Cement and Concrete Gibson Prize R.6.72(37) £i3. los. Chemistry (Engineering Exhibition R-3.45.7 course) £15 Chemistry Part I Dwight Prize R•3.45.7 £г5 R.6.5 Engineering Part I Howard Smithe Exhibition R.3.45.7 £ii R.7.3.6(n) Engineering Mathematics Exhibition R.3.45.7 Part I £i5 Engineering Mathematics Dixson Scholarship R.3.45.7 Part III £2o R.6.í3 Engineering Mathematics Stephen Bell . Prize R-6.72(44) Part IV £iб. ios. Secretary, Technical Branch Fluid Mechanics A W. M. McPherson Exhibition R.3.45.7 £zo R-7.3.6 i) Geology Part I Argus Exhibition R.3.гo.io £t5 R.6.3 Industrial Management Professor Julian King Prize Secretary, Technical Branch Part II (Human £15 Relations) Industrial Chemistry Grimwade Prize R.6.í8 facto Seстetary, Scientific Branch Industrial Management D. J. M. Rankin Prize R.6.72(2í) Part I Books (fia. i7s. od.) Mathematics. Wyselaskie Scholarship R.6.7 Eauo p.a. Professor of Mathematics Mechanical Engineering Michell Prize See under Mechanical Books (£8) Engineering Physics Part I Dwight's Prize R.3.45.7 f і R.6.5 Physics Part I Exhibition R.3.45.7 (Engineering course) £15 Pre-stressed Concrete Freyssinet Prize Professor of Civil Engineering (£z0) (In alternate years with Architecture)

146

Calendar reference or Information Field Title and approximate value source Properties of Engineering Exhibition 83.45.7 Materials Eis Pure Mathematics Part I John MacFarland Exhibition R.3•45.7 £15 R.7.3.6(е) Pure Mathematics Part II Dixson Scholarship А.3.45g . £го R.6.>t3 Strength of Materials Herbert Brookes Exhibition R.з.45.7 £го R.7.3.6.(m) GRADUATE Unrestricted Research Grants 'Announcements' £бoo p.a. Research Scholarships Dean of Graduate Studies' £7оо р.а. Research Fellowships £і 65о-£3опо p.a. Travelling Research Scholar• ships £goo p.a.. Aitchison Travelling Scholar• R.6.46 ship' Dean of Graduate Studies £goo Bartlett Research Scholarships R.6.5 í Leo Dean of Graduate Studies British Council Scholarships Mr S. Sheffield, Registrar's Maintenance and study office British Council Travel Grants 'Announcements' Tourist return sea passage Mr S. Sheffield, Registrar's ulIce Cowrie Research Travelling 'Announcements' Scholarships Trustees, Cowrie Scholarship £500 stg. Trust Fund, Box z06g, G.P.O., Sydney Rhodes Scholarship 'Announcements' £75o stg. p.a. Mr S. Sheffield, Registrar's officе Services Canteens Trust Fund General Secretary, Services Scholarships (for study Canteens Trust Fund, abroad), Victoria Barracks, Melbourne Maximum £iооo p.a. ' Commonwealth Scholarships 'Announcements' Tourist passage, fees, living Dean of Graduate Studies allowance Sir Arthur Sims Travelling R.6.8о Scholarship Dean of Graduate Studies. £7оо Taft Interchange Scholarship R.6.7o £400 Dean of Graduate Studies Preference to Engineering, General Motors-Holden's Ltd 'Announcements' Science, Commerce, Postgraduate Research Dean of Graduate Studies Economics Fellowships £8оo-£ìгоо pa. Fields of interest to C.S.I.R.O. Junior Postgraduate Dean of Graduate Studies C.S.I.R.O. Studentships' Fees plus living allowance C.S.I.R.O. Senior Postgraduate Studentships Fees plus living allowance C.S.I.R.O. Overseas Post- graduate Studentships. Fares, fees plus living allowance 147

aiendar reference or information Field Title and approximate value Č source Related to Atomic Energy Australian Atomic Energy Australian Atomic Energy Research Commission Postgraduate Commission ' Research Studentships Box 5343, G.P.O., Sydney, Fees plus £goo-£iioo p.a. N.S.W. . Fields of interest to I.C.I. Fellowships 'Announcements' 1.C.I.A.N.Z. £rioo p.a. Dean of Graduate Studies Industrial Chemistry Grimwade prize . See under 'Undergraduate' Engineering or Science Shell Scholarship 'Announcements' £750 stg. p.a. The Office Manager, Shell Co. of Australia Ltd, Melbourne Mining or Mechanical Mobil Oil Australia Research 'Announcements' Engineering or . Scholarship Dean of Graduate Studies Chemistry £750 Engineering Research or Argus Research Scholarship R.6.3 Travel - £50 Secretary, Technical Branch Dixson Research Scholarship R.6.í3 £240 Secretary, Technical Branch Melvin Memorial Scholarship R.6.3 r £86 Secretary, Technical Branch Bage Memorial Scholarship - R.6. Secretary,зз Technical Branch Stawell Sćholarship R.6.4 £75 Secretary, Technical Branch Radio Science Ormsby Hamilton Prize See under Electrical £t5 Engineering

(ELECTRICAL ENGINEERING) In addition to the awards listed on p. 145, the following are available to students of Electrical Engineering : UNDERGRADUATE EIectrical Engineering Dixson Scholarship R.3.45.7 Part I £>5 R.6.í3 Electrical Engineering John Monash Exhibition R.3.45.7 Part II f.zo А.7.з.6.(t) Third year McDonald Memorial Prize R.6.94 £52 Fourth year Cable Makers' Association 'Announcements' Prize Professor of Electrical f;io. ios. Engineering Fourth year I. R. E. Fisk Scholarship Professor of Electrical Award Engineering Eu Radio Science Ormsby Hamilton Radio R.6.7z(20) Prize Secretary, Technical Branch £15 FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION

Dixson Scholarship R.3.45.1 o .. £20 R.6.í3 Professor of Electrical Engineering

GRADUATE . , Electrical or Mechanical Raymond E. Purves—Clyde 'Announcements' Engineering Industries Research , Dean of Graduate Studies. Scholarship ,. £85ор.а. 148 Calendar reference or Information Field - Title and approximate value source VIL ENGINEERING) addition to the awards listed on p. 145, the following are available to students of 11 Engineering : UNDERGRADUATE gineering Design A. T. Danks Exhibition R.3.45.7 £ao . RR7.3.6:(s) FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION Argus Scholarship. R.3.45.10 £z5 R.6.3 Professor of Civil Engineering

ETALLURGICAL ENGINEERING) n addition to the awards listed on p. 145, the following are available to students of &llurgical Engineering: UNDERGRADUATE Balfour Memorial Scholar- R.6.67 ship Accounts department £11о p.a. etallurgy, Mining, and Mining and Metallurgical 'Announcements' Geology Bursaries Professor of Metallurgy £5o p.a. etallurgy Part I Dixson cholarship •3.45.7 £15 R.6.13А etallurgy Part IIE Exhibition А•3'•45-7 £zо FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION Dixson Scholarship R.á.45.10 Ezo R.6.13 Professor of Metallurgy GRADUATE ScholarshipiØ . R.3.г4.7 Related to Consolidated Consolidated Zinc Metal- 'Announcements' Zinc activities lurgical Research Professor of Metallurgy Scholarship £бoо p.a. dining or Metallurgy Gilbert Rigg Scholarship . R.6.1oz £z5o

SURVEYING) In addition to the awards listed on p. 145, the following are available to students of Surveying: UNDERGRADUATE Surveying Part I H. B. Howard Smith R.3.45.7 Exhibition . Ř.7.3.6.(k) £zo Surveying Part II Exhibition R•3•45.7 £zo 149 Field Calendar reference or Informal Title and approximate value source (CHEMICAL ENGINEERING) In addition to the awards listed on p. 145, the following are available to studenc-1 Chemical Engineering; UNDERGRADUATE Third year Union Carbide Prize 'Announcementš £5о GRADUATE Related to Consolidated Consolidated Zinc Metallurgi- 'Announcements' Zinc activities cal Research Scholarship Head of Chemical Engind £бoо p.a. ing department (MINING) In addition to the awards listed on p. 145, the following are available to students Mining Engineering: UNDERGRADUATE Mining, Metallurgy and Mining and Metallurgical 'Announcements' Geology Bursaries Head of Mining department £5o p.a. Mining Part I George Lansell Exhibition R.3 •45.7 £wo А.6.г3 FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION Lansell Scholarship R.3.45.10 £ . . 3 Зо HeadА Ь г of Mining departmen GRADUATE Related to. Consolidated Consolidated Zinc Metallurgi- 'Announcements' Zinc activities cal Research Scholarship Head of Mining deрaгtmen £бoo p.a. Mining Research George Lansell Research R.6.23 Scholarship Dean of Graduate Studies £50 Mining or Metallurgy Gilbert Rigg Scholarship R.6.102 f z о (MECHANICAL ENGINEERING) In addition to the awards listed on p. 145, the following are available to students Mechanical Engineering; UNDERGRADUATE Applied Thermodynamics Wright Prize R•3.45.7 Part I £io R.6.15 Applied Thermodynamics Dixson Scholarship R.3.45.7 Part II £15 R.6.13 Engineering Design Wright Prize 8.3.45.7 Lao R.6.15 Mechanical Engineering Michell Prize .6.7 ( 3) Books (£8) А г г FINAL HONOUR EXAMINATION Dixson Scholarship R.3.45.1о Lao R.6.13 Professor of Mechanical Engineering Rennie Memorial Prize R.6.7х(41) Books (£2.8) GRADUATE Mechanical or Electrical Raymond E. Purves—Clyde 'Announcements'... Engineering Industries Research Dean of Graduate Studies Scholarship £85о p.a. 150

Library Digitised Collections

Author/s: The University of Melbourne

Title: Handbook: Faculty of Engineering 1963

Date: 1963

Persistent Link: http://hdl.handle.net/11343/128661